JP6665361B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a player can change the effect mode by his / her own operation.

JP 2006-43440 A

  When switching between the effect modes, the player may forget the effect mode before the switching and select the effect mode before the switching as the effect mode after the switching. Further, even if the player wants to return to the effect mode before switching after listing the effect modes as options, there is a case where the player forgets the effect mode before switching and cannot return to the effect mode before switching.

When the gaming machine prepares various effect modes, the player spends time selecting the effect mode, and often forgets the effect mode before switching.
In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can assist a player in selecting an effect mode.

In order to achieve the above object, the following gaming machines are provided. The gaming machine includes a display mode switching unit and a display mode presenting unit. The display mode switching means includes a first display mode for displaying a variable display game in a first display mode in which a stopped symbol combination can be displayed based on a first symbol number, and a second symbol number different from the first symbol number. It is possible to switch between the second display mode in which the variable display game is displayed in the second display mode in which the symbol combination can be displayed by the selection operation ending condition after the selection operation. The display mode presenting means displays the first stop symbol combination when presenting the first display mode as an option when accepting a display mode selection operation while displaying the first stop symbol combination in the first display mode. When the second display mode is presented as an option, a second stop symbol combination that is a predetermined combination is displayed instead of the first stop symbol combination.

  According to the first aspect, in the gaming machine, the selection of the effect mode by the player can be assisted.

It is a perspective view showing an example of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of the composition of the production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a collective display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of a main process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a main process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an initial value random number update process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an input process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a switch reading process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an output process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a random number update process 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the fraud & winning monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of winning number counter updating processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the game machine state check processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the payment busy signal check processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure game processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the starting opening switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a hard random number acquisition process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure starting port switch common processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure reservation information judging processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure 1 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure 2 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big hit flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big hit flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a variation pattern setting process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the change start information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure change processing transition setting process (special figure 2) of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing during special figure change of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure display process transition setting process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a high probability change frequency update process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the production mode information check processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a fanfare / interval processing transition setting process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing change setting processing 1 during small hit fanfare of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of processing during a fanfare / interval according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing change setting processing during opening of a special winning a prize mouth of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of processing during opening of a special winning opening of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the big hit end processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end setting processing 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end setting processing 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing during a small hit fanfare of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of processing change setting processing during small hits of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing during small hits of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small hit operation change setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a timing chart of a small hit operation of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit remaining sphere process shift setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of small hit residual ball processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small hit end processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small hit end processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the production command setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the symbol variation control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a blink control timer initial value table of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the distribution processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a 2-byte distribution process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the general-purpose game process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a gate switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the regular electricity winning switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the usual figure usual processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a general-purpose everyday process shift setting process 1 according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing change setting processing during normal figure change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the processing during normal figure change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing shift setting processing during normal display in the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a process during normal-drawing display according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the process change setting processing during normal time per figure of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during a regular drawing hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the electric power operation shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a general electricity operation timing chart of a normal fluctuation winning device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the electric power remaining sphere processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a per-figure end processing transition setting process of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of end processing per day figure of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the usual figure shift processing setting processing 2 of the 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a segment LED editing process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the magnet fraud monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of an external information editing process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the main prize ball signal editing processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a transmission timing chart of a main prize ball signal of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a start-up port signal editing process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display during change of special figure 1 in state 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display during the change of the general figure in the state 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a comparison between the display during change of special figure 1 and the display during change of a general figure in state 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display during change of special figure 1 in state 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display during a change of a general figure in state 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparative example of the display during a change (modification) of the special figure 1 of 1st Embodiment, and the display during a change (modification) of a general figure. It is a figure showing an example of a screen during change display in a display of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | sequence of the small symbol group of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | sequence of the large symbol group of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 5) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the symbol replacement timing in the fluctuation | variation display of a small symbol group of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the temporary stop timing in the fluctuation | variation display of a large symbol group of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the 1st substitution design of a small design group of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the 2nd substitute design of the small design group of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | sequence of the small symbol group of the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the large symbol group of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of change of a display mode of a large symbol group according to a state of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of switching of the special symbol group of the large symbol group according to the state of the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen during change display in a display of a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen during change display in a display of a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a change display mode of a small symbol group of a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a change display mode of a small symbol group of a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a change display mode of a small symbol group of a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of change display mode of a small symbol group of a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 5) of a change display mode of a small symbol group of a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the pattern arrangement of the large pattern group of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a screen which a display of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of a screen which a display of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 5) of a screen which a display of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing the modification (the 1) of design group display of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification (the 2) of the symbol group display of 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of switching timing of a movie symbol and a non-movie symbol of the third embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification (the 1) of switching timing of a movie symbol and a non-movie symbol of the third embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification (the 2) of switching timing of a movie symbol and a non-movie symbol of the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an appearance of a display and an accessory of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the physical relationship of the display surface of the display of a 4th embodiment, and an accessory. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the physical relationship of the production display element of a 4th embodiment, and an accessory. It is a figure (the 2) showing an example of the physical relationship of the production display element of the 4th embodiment, and an accessory. It is a figure showing an example of a physical relationship of a display surface of a display of a modification of a 4th embodiment, and a movable character. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol arrangement of the large symbol group of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 5th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 5th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a screen which a display of a 5th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of a screen which a display of a 5th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing the modification of the screen which the display of a 5th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol arrangement of the large symbol group of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a large symbol group in a display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the production flow of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 6th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 6th embodiment displays. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a production flow of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a production flow of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a production flow of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of a production flow of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a screen which a display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of a screen which a display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing the example (the 5) of the screen which the display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 6) of a screen which a display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 7) of a screen which a display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 8) of a screen which a display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 9) of a screen which a display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 10) of a screen which a display of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a timing chart which shows an example (the 1) of the change timing of the opening mode of the special winning opening of a 7th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example (the 2) of the change timing of the opening mode of the special winning opening of a 7th embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of modification 1 of a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a screen which a display of modification 2 of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of a screen which two display devices of modification 3 of a 7th embodiment display. It is a figure showing an example of a screen which a display of modification 4 of a 7th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of the screen which two display devices of modification 5 of a 7th embodiment display. It is a figure showing an example of the mode of operation of the production device of the modification 6 of a 7th embodiment, and a screen which a display device displays. It is a figure showing an example of the ball hitting direction guidance display of modification 7 of the seventh embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view showing an example of an appearance and an attachment position of a back channel constituent unit of a game machine of an eighth embodiment. It is a top view showing the discharge channel of the safe ball and the out ball of the back channel constituent unit of an 8th embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the discharge | emission flow path of the safe sphere and the out sphere of the back flow path constituent unit of 8th Embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a position and a size of a discharge mouth to a back channel constituent unit of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an outlet allocation rule of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the discharge outlet allocation rule of the modification 1 of the 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a position and a size of an outlet to a back channel constituent unit of modification 2 of an 8th embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of the modification 3 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a position and a size of a discharge mouth to a back channel constituent unit of modification 3 of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a position and a size of a discharge mouth to a back channel constituent unit of modification 4 of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a position and a size of a discharge mouth to a back channel constituent unit of modification 5 of an 8th embodiment. It is a top view showing the discharge channel of the safe ball and the out ball of the back channel constituent unit of the modification 6 of an 8th embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the discharge | emission flow path of the safe ball | bowl and the out ball | ball of the back channel structure unit of the modification 6 of 8th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the discharge | emission flow path of the safe sphere and the out sphere of the back flow path component unit of the modification 7 of 8th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows the discharge | emission flow path of the safe sphere and the out sphere of the back flow path constituent unit of the modification 8 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the movable gutter switching processing of the modification 8 of the 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of a hold display of a 9th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a change mode of a hold display of a ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the suspended change mode decision processing of a ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the final reservation mode decision processing of a 9th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the final reservation mode judgment table of a 9th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the initial reservation mode decision processing of a 9th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the initial suspension mode judgment table of a 9th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the step up process decision processing of a 9th embodiment. FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending change mode determination table according to the ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the reservation change individual schedule decision processing of a 9th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the whole schedule update processing of a 9th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the whole schedule before and after update of a ninth embodiment, and an individual schedule of change of suspension. It is a figure showing an example of display contents of a hold display based on the whole schedule after updating of a 9th embodiment, and display contents of a hold digest display. It is a figure showing an example of the whole schedule before and after update of modification 1 of a 9th embodiment, and an individual schedule of a change of suspension. It is a figure showing an example of display contents of a hold display based on the whole schedule after an update of modification 1 of a 9th embodiment, and display contents of a hold digest display. It is a figure showing an example of the whole schedule before and after update of modification 2 of a 9th embodiment, and an individual schedule of a change of suspension. It is a figure showing an example of display contents of a hold display based on the whole schedule after an update of modification 2 of a 9th embodiment, and display contents of a hold digest display. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an overall schedule update process of Modification 3 of the ninth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the whole schedule before and after update of modification 3 of a 9th embodiment, and an individual schedule for change of suspension. It is a figure showing an example of display contents of a hold display based on the whole schedule after the update of the modification 3 of a 9th embodiment, and display contents of a hold digest display. It is a figure showing an example of the whole schedule before and after update of modification 4 of a 9th embodiment, and an individual schedule of a change of suspension. It is a figure showing an example of display contents of a hold display based on the whole schedule after the update of the modification 4 of a ninth embodiment, and display contents of a hold digest display. It is a figure showing an example of the screen display which a display displays at the time of a setting change operation of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of connection of the production control device of a 10th embodiment, and an option setting part. It is a figure showing an example of arrangement of a push button LED and a touch sensor in a push button of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a setting table of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a set state transition diagram of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the timing chart in the reset of the setting item of a 10th embodiment. It is a customer waiting state table (the 1) which shows an example of reset timing of a 10th embodiment. It is a customer waiting state table (the 2) which shows an example of reset timing of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a customer waiting display of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the main processing in the production control device of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the setting reset processing of a 10th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the setting table of the modification 1 of the 10th embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a setting reset process according to a first modification of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the setting table of the modification 2 of the 10th embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a setting reset process according to a second modification of the tenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen display which a display device displays at the time of a production mode change operation of an eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen display which a display displays at the time of a production mode change operation of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a change order of a production mode of an 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol arrangement of the exclusive symbol for every production mode of the 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen in production mode A and a display screen in production mode B of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen in production mode C and a display screen in production mode D of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents for every production mode when the production mode selection operation was received in the state where production mode A (including production mode R) of the eleventh embodiment was displayed. It is a figure showing an example of display contents for every production mode at the time of receiving production mode selection operation in the state where production mode B (including production mode R) of the eleventh embodiment was displayed. It is a figure showing an example of display contents for every production mode when the production mode selection operation was received in the state where production mode C (including production mode R) of the eleventh embodiment was displayed. It is a figure showing an example of display contents for every production mode when the production mode selection operation was received in the state where production mode D (including production mode R) of the eleventh embodiment was displayed. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the mode switching processing in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the mode switching processing in the production control device of the modification 1 of the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol handover setting table of the modification 1 of the 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the symbol handover setting table of the modification 2 of the 11th embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  The gaming machine (pachinko machine) 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12.

  On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and the like are internally provided to decorate and produce effects, and to notify when abnormalities occur (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally abnormal). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) in a notification color (for example, red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is provided below the front frame 12. When an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

  Also, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (reservoir plate) 21 for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided an option setting section 25 for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a decision button switch 25b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 causes the player's operation to intervene based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b. Can be performed. For example, an effect in which a player's operation is intervened includes an effect in a fluctuating display game (decorative special figure fluctuating display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on the display 41 can be operated, or the identification information in the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

  On the right side of the option setting unit 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation is performed to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device causes the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to play a game ball 32 on the front of the game board 30. (See FIG. 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30 respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. In other words, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In a region (display region) where an image on the display screen can be displayed, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to a game such as a character that produces a special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the rendering effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for an effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating is provided on the left and right portions of the center case 40. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (general symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the general symbol change display game. The game ball that has won the general-purpose starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general prize holes 35 are arranged. On the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the general-purpose starting gate 34, one general prize hole 35 is provided. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Immediately below the start winning opening 36, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure variable display game.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling toward the front side and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot flow in is maintained. Then, when the result of the normal-floating fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device is used to open the normal fluctuation prize device 37 easily. The state can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like.
Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, special fluctuations that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A winning device (large winning port) 38 is provided.

  The special fluctuation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. The large winning opening is converted from a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous for the player). That is, the special variable prize winning device 38 includes, for example, a large prize winning opening which is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large prize winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Has become. The game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, of the gaming area 32 in which the game balls flow, the left area of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. It has been. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left game area (so-called left hit), thereby aiming at winning in the starting winning opening 36, and firing a game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim for a prize to the ordinary figure starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation prize device 37 and the special fluctuation prize device 38.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, at a position corresponding to the right game area, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is disposed, and the flow is shifted to the right game area. Is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  Further, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game, which are the special figure change display game, and the general figure start gate 34 are provided. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a game-changing display game triggered by winning, and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a general symbol display unit. 55, a general-purpose hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the control system of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It comprises a data bus 140 and the like.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. The operation clock and timer interrupt of the game microcomputer 111 and a reference of a random number generation circuit are provided. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock signal is provided. A predetermined level DC voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100. It is made operational.

  The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. A power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to a RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the occurrence or recovery of the power failure.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, May be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal By providing the generation unit 430, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the exchange target.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, a built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32 V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410 and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on the signal, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a fluctuation pattern table for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the effect contents, the presence / absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining a second half variation pattern that is a variation pattern after the reach state (second half variation group table, second half variation pattern selection table, and the like), and a variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, when a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed, This refers to a display state in which the derived display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be a reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving special result modes include a normal reach (N reach), a special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of “no reach” <“normal reach” <“special 1 reach” <“special 2 reach” <“special 3 reach” <“premier reach”. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the special result mode is lost). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for solenoids and display devices to output the game machine 10 Performs overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number of a fluctuation pattern for determining a reach or a variable display without a reach (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit of a universal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. Have.

  Further, the CPU 111A obtains any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111 </ b> A determines the game result (win (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability). State), the operating state (time saving operation state) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of stored memories, and the like, and selects one of the fluctuation pattern tables from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. To get. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains one of the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out the. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variable winning device 37. The gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the normal figure starting gate 34 are connected to each other, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are short-circuited incorrectly, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wire is cut off and floated. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, when the detection signal of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the winning port switch 38a, and the abnormality of the sensor and the switch are detected from the output of the proximity I / F 121. Is output to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a game sensor may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC from the power supply device 400. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 (changes to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding an address assigned to the second input port 123. By doing so, it can be read. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (fullness)), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the input signal and supplying the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, so that the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 to be output to the test test apparatus is turned off. It is configured to be. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special design information of the variable display game to the trial shooting test device of the accredited institution (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the control cannot be performed is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus. I have.

  The output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and has a special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 and a universal electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data is provided. The output unit 130 further includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. Can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal in response to a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by applying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via a digit line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided. Not provided.

Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of the effect control device according to the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied in case of a power failure. A ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and management of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing a character image and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are input as well.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) system. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address bus / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The output sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address bus / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. Good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and an enter button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect character switch 47 for detecting an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44 and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 to detect the main control microcomputer A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, it is supplied from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and to the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like. And reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging the hit of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, and reads the ROM 111B. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and a process of judging a hit or miss of the ordinary figure change display game is performed. After the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the general symbol display unit 55 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a general symbol variance display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of the normal symbol change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display unit 55, and the general electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control executing unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). In the case where the result of the ordinary figure change display game is out of place, control is performed to display the outcoming result mode on the ordinary figure display section 55.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on the starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed. The random number value for the jackpot determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to perform a process of determining a hit or miss in the first special figure variation display game. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the big hit determination of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed based on the start memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit or miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning region (start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). .

  In addition, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control apparatus 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing for setting the effect state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 displays the special result mode or the small hit result mode. Is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small hitting game state (that is, processing for executing a special game or a small hitting game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, and allows the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. Is performed. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after opening of the special winning opening, a special winning opening is achieved. Is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) of repeating (repeating) the round a predetermined number of times is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that performs control to open and close the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game results in the high probability state, the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game can be used. Both variable display games are in the high probability state.

  Further, based on the result of the special figure change display game, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (a specific game state, a normal figure high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state. In this time-saving state, the probability of being a winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is set to a high probability (general-figure high-probability state) higher than 0 which is a normal probability (general-figure low-probability state). Is possible. Thereby, the opening time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable prize device 37 is in the low probability state in the ordinary figure. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to “0” so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the general-figure variation display game (normal-figure variation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the general-figure stop time for displaying the result of the general-figure variation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec × 1 time), The opening time of the second hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the opening time of the third hit symbol (normal time of opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 3 times).

  It should be noted that the execution time of the general-float display game, the general-figure stop time, the number of times of the general-figure release, and the general-figure release time are set so that the general-figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 are controlled to reduce the working hours. For example, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-mentioned general-purpose variable display game (the general-purpose variable display time) to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (Eg, 10,000 ms equals 1000 ms). Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds is set). 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is released as a result of the general fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is changed to the first time in the normal state (low normal probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The number of times (for example, four times) can be set to the second number of times of opening. Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of being a hit result of the general-figure change display game (general-figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal-figure low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. It is possible to set a probability (normal high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the time-saving state, the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the ordinary figure fluctuation time, the ordinary figure stop time, the number of ordinary electricity open times, the ordinary time open time, and the ordinary figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

  Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the batch display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The collective display device 50 performs various status displays according to the lighting modes of the LED_00 to the LED_31.

  The collective display device 50 distributes various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, thereby displaying a round display section 51, a special figure 1 hold display section 52, a special figure 1 symbol display section 53, and a special figure 2 symbol display section 54. , A general symbol display unit 55, a general symbol hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57. The round display section 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game by the lighting mode of four LEDs from LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_14 to LED_21. The general symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the general symbol game according to a lighting mode of four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. The general-purpose reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the general-purpose game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_28 and LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_30 and LED_31. The special figure 2 reservation display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_22 and LED_23.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the value of a register or the like is saved at the start address of the region when an interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the high order. In step S4, 00h at the head of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

  Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a sub control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as a main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of data held in the RAM area. Accordingly, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to calculate the check data excluding a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be controlled. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the RAM initialization switch may be operated from power-on until the elapse of the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  Next, after performing a process of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), measuring a standby time and monitoring occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). Perform First, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on is set. A determination is made (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not been continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is ON for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine 10 waits for the power to be shut off. . In this manner, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and to appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. be able to.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so that backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM 111C, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value becomes “0”. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). When the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (Read Write Memory) such as the RAM 111C or EEPROM is permitted (step S12). S13), outputting off data to all output ports (setting to no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 previously read (step S16).

  If the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16). If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process shifts to step S21 (FIG. 7) to perform the process when the power is restored normally from the power failure.

  Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make means of conversion.

  In step S21 (FIG. 7), an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether the special figure is in the high probability state (the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state) (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. If the special map is in the high probability state (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23). For example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50 is provided. Is turned on (lighting) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31 is performed. Proceed to. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, at step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer wait demonstration screen command if a customer waits, Otherwise, a plurality of commands such as a command on the recovery screen) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to be permitted to access (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined A plurality of commands such as a time (for example, 30 seconds) command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 by a frequency dividing circuit, and outputs a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. A CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the first embodiment, a special symbol hit symbol is determined). RWM as the initial values (start values) of random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers), random numbers for determining the hits of common symbols (hit random numbers), and random numbers for determining the hit symbols of common symbols (hit symbol random numbers) After saving in a predetermined area (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. ), The regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (Step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use a random number generated by a random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit random number, the small hit random number, the hit random number, and the hit random number are This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a processing unit. In the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is used in which a start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round. "Has been adopted. Each of the above random numbers may be a counter-type update by “+1” or “−1”, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step S35, the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both methods are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the initial value random number updating process, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. In the case where the initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing is not performed as in the embodiment and is performed only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing, This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is not continued for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily inhibiting interruption (step S39) is performed. A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Then, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off (step S43) and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44), access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the processing (step S45), the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the slave control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) for performing various controls in accordance with the instructions from the main control means Etc.), when the power is turned on, the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device. Device 100) and power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an operation of the initialization operation unit. And an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the information stored in the RAM 111C, so that the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.
[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM used. Next, “0” is set as the calculated value (step S103).

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), It is determined whether the calculation of the checksum has been completed (step S107). If the calculation is not completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and repeats the above processing. If the calculation has been completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment. This initial value random number updating process is the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the above-described main process. In the initial value random number updating process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is updated by “+1”. Is updated (step S113), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S114), and the initial value random number updating process ends. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number which is an initial value of a random number which determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number which determines the small hit stop symbol of the special figure. Is a random number that is the initial value of. In addition, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a hit in the ordinary figure changing game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is an initial value of a random number that determines a winning symbol in the ordinary figure changing game. It is a random number that becomes It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in a model having no small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, a timer interrupt process in the above-described main process will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs in the above-described main process from when an interrupt is issued to when the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39). The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S121). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and fetching of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S123) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S124) for performing drive control and the like of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) is performed. When a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the firing permitting signal is set to a state where it can be set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no signal processing or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device 100, and is a second signal (a firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device 200. Are also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the firing control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (Step S125) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (Step S126), and a random number update process 2 (Step S127) are performed. Thereafter, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the winning port switch 38a shown in FIG. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) for performing whether the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is open or the like is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S130) for performing a process related to the general figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131) for driving a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display a special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61 Inspection of magnet fraud (step S132), which performs a process of checking a detection signal from the system to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a process of checking a detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. A monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S134) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt. This is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of the timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S123) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the input processing according to the first embodiment.

  In this input processing, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S142), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S142). S143). Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and unused bit data is prepared (step S145). S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and a switch reading process (step S148) is performed. Here, in the first embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value to a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set to an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and unused bit data is prepared (step S150). In step S151, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S152). Then, a switch reading process (step S153) is performed, and the input process ends.

  As the switches monitored by the first input port 122, as shown in FIG. 3, the glass frame open detection switch 63, the body frame open detection switch 64, the RAM initialization switch 112 (unused in this processing), There are a power failure monitoring signal (unused in this process) generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400, a dispensing abnormality status signal, a shot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch. The switches to be monitored at the second input port 123 include a start-up opening 1 switch 36a (“start-up opening 1 winning signal”) and a start-up opening 2 switch 37a (“start-up opening 2 winning signal”, “normal electric accessory 1” Winning signal 1 is also output), winning opening switch 35a ("normal winning opening winning signal"), large winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal"), and gate switch 34a ("normal pattern 1 related to" Gate passing signal 1 "). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include a panel radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave illegal signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S148 and S153) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the switch reading process according to the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S161). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S162), and the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is set. Is saved (step S164). After that, it waits for a delay time (about 100 μs) to elapse before the second reading (step S165).

  After the elapse of the delay time (about 100 μs), the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step S166). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S167), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (step S169). Thereafter, in the first and second readings, a fixed bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 (step S170), and the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is obtained. The determined bit is set (step S171).

  Next, in the first and second readings, an undefined bit pattern in which the same bit is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 is created (step S172), and the logic between the undefined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is taken and set as a previously held bit (step S173). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined, saved as the currently determined state (step S174), the exclusive OR of the last time and the current determined state is calculated, and saved as the rising edge (step S175). The switch reading process ends.

  When a timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt processing, and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been performed. However, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, a correct determination may not be performed. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S124) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the output processing according to the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) for outputting segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data output to the second output port 134 for outputting the data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S182).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S183), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The output data of the line is obtained (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LED_00 to the LED_31 of the collective display device 50, a round display, a special figure 1 hold display, a special figure 1 symbol display, a special figure 2 symbol display, an ordinary symbol display, an ordinary figure hold display, and There is a state display (game state display such as a time saving state or a high probability state).

  Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for external information output (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is “door / frame open” and “security signal”.

  Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for outputting the segment (step S188).

  Subsequently, various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). The external information to be synthesized here is "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol fixed number signal", "start opening signal", "main prize ball" Signal "and the like. Next, the combined data and the emission permission output data are combined (step S190), and the combined data is output to the fifth output port 137 for external information output and emission permission signal output (step S191).

  Next, data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S192). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

  Next, data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S194). Further, data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S195). Then, data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196), and the output processing ends.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the payout command transmission processing of the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is a process of updating (increase) the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In the payout command transmission processing, first, out of a plurality of winning number counter areas provided according to the number of winning balls (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and fourteen winning balls), each of the plurality of winning number counter areas is checked. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area 2 that stores up to 255 winning (step S201). If there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S203).

  When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (updated by "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter area 2 is deleted. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is obtained (step S205). Next, the value of the prize ball remaining area is added to the payout number (step S206), the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is equal to or more than "0" (step S209; Y), the main award ball signal output frequency is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the remaining award ball number area. (Step S211). Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) every 10 payout schedules, and 10 payouts from the payout substrate (payout control device 200). One pulse is output every time.

  Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not greater than or equal to "0" (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set, and the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0”. , No subtraction is performed. As described above, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed. The transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side can pay out the prize ball.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213). If it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213; Y), It is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) include “during payout operation”, “ball lending operation”, “shot ball out error”, “overflow error”, “frame radio wave illegal occurrence "Medium", "Abnormality of paid-out ball detection switch (switch for monitoring the paid-out ball)", "Insufficient payout error", "During excessive payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of acquired game balls remaining) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

  Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the checking of all areas has not been completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

  In step S215, when there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S218), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is updated. The command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

  When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S213; N), when it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). If it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas has been completed (step S217; Y), or if the processing of step S221 has been completed, the payout command transmission processing ends.

[Random number update processing 1]
Next, a random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update process 1 according to the first embodiment. The random number updating process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number updating process.

  In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S231). If the big hit symbol random number in the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). Also, if the jackpot symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next time the loaded jackpot symbol random number of the ordinary figure is loaded. Is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. Is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S236). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237).

  If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). If the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; Y), the hit initial random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the next initial value of the loaded hit random number is assigned to the corresponding random number counter (step S238). It is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number area (step S239). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240).

  When the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number updating process 1 ends. If the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the winning symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded winning symbol random number corresponds. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) (step S242), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update processing 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update processing 2 of the first embodiment. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. Is set as an update target, and each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to:

  In the random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which random number of a plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is set to a value from “0” to “3”. The range is updated (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.

  Subsequently, for example, a random number such as a counter (hereinafter, referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter to which the appropriate value is set is loaded (step S254). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to random numbers. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value is different from the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 are updated. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although four bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is merely an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value of the M1 counter remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the added value (hereinafter, this is referred to as the The value is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as an addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S258). ), And proceed to step S259. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become “0”, and if “0” is added later, the value does not change from the value before the addition. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), a value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set ( (Step S260), and the process proceeds to step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), “0” is set as the upper one byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower one byte of the random number value Is set (Step S261), and the routine goes to Step S262.

  In step S262, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is greater than the upper limit determination value obtained in step S253. (Step S263). If the new random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; N), the new random number is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S264), and this value is set to 1 byte. The random number or a 2-byte random number is saved in a lower random number area (step S265).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number updating process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, its value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S267). Then, the random number update processing 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the startup winning opening 36 or the startup area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for the purpose.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table (for example, a port to which a detection signal from a count switch is input) corresponding to the winning opening switch 38a in the winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38). , And data indicating the bit position of the signal in the port, etc.) are prepared (step S271). Next, even if the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) winning in the special winning opening and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (step S272). .

  Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored for an illegal winning and a normal winning is performed. The detected fraud & winning monitoring process (step S274) is executed. Then, a winning port monitoring table of the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the public telephone is prepared (step S275), and an unauthorized / winning monitoring process for monitoring for an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning (step S275). Step S276) is executed.

  Next, a winning port monitoring table for winning port switches (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the winning port switch 35a for the general winning port 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. A number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

  Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which one of the plurality of switches and signals for monitoring the error state of the gaming machine 10 to be monitored this time is set to “0”. Is updated in the range from to (3) (step S279). After that, according to the value of the state scan counter, any one of a switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of a connector disconnection of the switch, a shot ball out error from the dispensing control device 200, an overflow error from the overflow switch, and a dispensing abnormality error. A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting an error monitoring based on a crab as a target is prepared (step S280). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S281) is performed.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting monitoring of an error based on any of the glass frame opening, the body frame opening, the frame radio irregularity, and the touch switch is prepared. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S283) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284). If the value of the state scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring is performed. The process ends. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the disconnection of the switch connector or the like according to the value of the state scan counter. A gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the game machine as a target is prepared (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S286) is performed, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process ends. Note that the payout busy signal check processing is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed at a period of 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
Next, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fraudulent and winning monitoring processing of the first embodiment. Each winning port monitoring table prepared in the winning port switch / error monitoring process includes “data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)”, “lower address of fraud monitoring information”, “illegal winning”. "Lower address of number area", "illegal winning error notification command", "illegal winning number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination)", "winning port switch table address", and "notification timer update information (permission / update)" It is assumed that information is defined.

  This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. As for the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (normal fluctuation winning device 37), it is easy to forcibly open the opening / closing member, insert a game ball, and pay out a prize ball. In addition to monitoring for fraud.

  In this fraudulent & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S292). The irregularity monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is the large winning port switch 38a. When the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than a state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the ordinary drawing.

  If it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). If there is an input at the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the added illegal winning number after addition is the monitoring target fraud occurrence determination number (step S294). It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than (for example, 5) (step S295).

  The reason why the number of determinations is set to five is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball is in the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is passed after passing through or a noise is put on a signal from being immediately determined to be illegal. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is not necessarily illegal to easily determine that the information is illegal.

  If the number is not equal to or larger than the determined number (step S295; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the determined number (step S295; Y), the number of unauthorized winnings is kept at the determined number of occurrences of fraud (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target unauthorized winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step S298), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and a winning number counter updating process for setting a winning ball is performed (step S301). Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and it is determined whether the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S303). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process ends. The information for which the updating of the notification timer is not permitted includes the special winning opening switch 38a. This is because one large winning opening is monitored with two switches. When the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer is updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer times out in half the specified time. In order to avoid such a timer update, the update at the timing of the special winning opening switch which performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. When the update of the notification timer is permitted as in the case of the big winning port switch and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 for which the monitoring process is performed later (step S303; Y), the target notification timer is “0”. If not, "-1" is updated (step S304). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to “0”.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is one of the large winning port switches 38a, and when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is the other large winning port switch 38a. Is not allowed. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as frequently with respect to the fraudulent notification for the special variable prize device 38, thereby preventing the time-up from occurring in half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). In addition, when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is the big winning port switch 38a or the starting port 2 switch 37a, the updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305). If the value is not "0" (step S305; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud and winning monitoring is performed. The process ends. If the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, a target unauthorized release command is prepared (step S306), and an unauthorized winning release flag is set as the unauthorized flag. Is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes “0” (step S308).

  When the value of the notification timer is “0” (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer is “0” in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of the target illegal winnings is Cleared (step S309), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). When the value of the notification timer is not the moment when the value of the notification timer has become “0” (step S308; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer has become “0” in the previous fraud and winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag Is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S310; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area do not match (Step S310; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (Step S311), and the effect command setting processing is performed (Step S311). Step S312), and terminates the fraud & winning monitoring process. By the above processing, an injustice notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the occurrence of the injustice, and an infraction winning illegality release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the injustice release, and the start and end of the injustice notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (steps S278 and S301) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process and the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning number counter updating process of the first embodiment. The winning table of the winning port monitoring table prepared in the winning port switch / state monitoring process includes information on “number of repetitions” and “data for determining whether there is an input defined for each switch”. (Monitoring switch bit) "," lower address of winning number counter area 1 ", and" lower address of winning number counter area 2 ".

  In the winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (exactly, an input change). Is determined (step S322).

  If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs. (Step S325). If no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning counter for the prize ball (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range from “0” to “65535”. If an overflow has occurred (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is bypassed.

  Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not an overflow occurs (step S329). If no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). Thereby, the winning number counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in a range from “0” to “255”. If an overflow has occurred (step S329; Y), the processing of step S330 is passed.

  When the table address is updated to the address of the next record in step S331, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S332). If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S332; N), the process returns to the process (step S322) of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332; Y), the winning counter updating process is terminated. Through the above processing, a prize ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check processing (step S286) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the gaming machine state check processing of the first embodiment. Each gaming machine status monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process includes “lower address of the head address of the status monitoring region”, “port of the switch control region in which the target signal information is stored”. "Lower address of input state area", "Mask data for extracting only bits of target signal", "Signal on determination data", "State off command (in the case of error, meaning of error notification end command)", Information of a “state on command (meaning an error notification start command in the case of an error system)”, a “state off monitoring timer comparison value”, and a “state on monitoring timer comparison value” are defined.

  In this gaming machine state check processing, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S341), and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored is ON, that is, whether or not the signal indicates an error. A determination is made (step S342). Note that the case where the signal to be monitored is not ON means a normal state where there is no error for an error system, and a state where the touch switch is not touched. Also, the case where the signal to be monitored is ON means an error (abnormal or illegal) state for an error system, and a touch state for a touch switch.

  If the signal is not on in step S342 (step S342; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S343), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). Then, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  On the other hand, when the signal is ON (step S342; Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step S346), and a target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S347). Then, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S349; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352). It is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S349; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target status monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

  If the value of the target status monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine status check processing ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by “−1” and kept at the value of “comparison value −1” (step S354). ), And compares the prepared status flag with the value of the target status flag area (step S355).

  Then, when the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S355; Y), this gaming machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the prepared state flag is turned off. An effect command setting process of transmitting either the command or the status ON command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine status check process ends.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the winning port switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the payout busy signal check process according to the first embodiment.

  In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S361). Step S362), and sets the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (step S363). The OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value set here is set to, for example, 32 ms.

  If the payout busy signal is on in step S361 (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). As the ON determination monitoring timer comparison value set here, for example, 32 ms is set.

  Next, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal (step S366). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S366; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S369), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). When the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S366; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area ( Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

  When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), the payout busy signal check process ends. When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “−1” and kept at the value of “comparison value−1” (step S371). Then, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check processing ends.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S129) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special figure game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed. In the special figure game process, first, a start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a. In the start-up switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, extraction of various random numbers (big hit random number or the like) is performed. The game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure change display game based on the winning.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a (the special winning opening switch 1 and the special winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is “0” (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

  In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation A special map ordinary process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "1" in step A7, the special figure changing process is performed to set the stop display time of the special figure and to set information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the big winning port of each big hit A special figure display process (step A10) for setting a fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is “3” in step A7, the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing is set. Processing during the fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round, or a special winning opening remains A special winning opening processing (step A12) for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set, and if it is the final round, A special winning port remaining ball process (step A13) for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning port, setting information necessary for performing a jackpot ending process, and the like is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hitting A small-hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is “8” in step A7, the small hit operation transition processing, the setting of the command for the small hit end screen, the setting of information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are performed. The small hitting process (step A16) is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is "9" in step A7, a small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end processing is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "10" in step A7, a small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

  Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (step A19), a symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), a symbol variation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. To end. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not “0” (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do it.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and the special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is activated). The condition device not operating means that the above-described flag is not set, for example, in a case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start-up switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a starting port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to determine whether there is a winning in the starting port 1. It is determined whether or not it is (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the starting opening 1 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special figure working hours (general power support) (step A104). . Note that the determination in step A104 is to determine whether or not the gaming state is under normal power support, and does not include the level of the probability state in the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not working (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special figure is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, in the time saving state, a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure change display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the winning opening 1 (start winning opening 36) does not win unless the player has left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless the player has right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game. However, when the starting port 1 receives a prize during the time-saving state (ie, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-turn instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and to cause the effect control device 300 to issue a notification (warning) for instructing right-hand operation.

  Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the starting port 1 (start winning port 36) (step A107), a common process for a special figure starting port switch (step A108) is performed.

  Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the start-up opening 2 (step A111; N), the start-up switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the starting opening 2 (step A111; Y), the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation prize device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal fluctuation prize. It is determined whether or not the device 37 is operated to be in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A112). If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), step A114 is performed. The processing shifts to the processing of (1) and the subsequent processing is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal operation of the ordinary electric power is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not a fraudulent fraud has occurred, it is determined that a fraud has occurred if the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable prize device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  In step A113, if it is determined that the unauthorized fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting information of suspension by the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The start port switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring processing is ended. If it is determined in step A113 that irregularities in the telephone are occurring (step A113; Y), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process according to the first embodiment.

  In the hard random number acquisition processing, first, non-winning information is set for the monitoring opening of the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A121). It is determined whether there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the mouth 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A123). A124).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125). Then, among the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (ordinary fluctuation winning device 37), the information on the winning opening of the monitoring opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process ends. .

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure startup port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described startup port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure starting port switch common processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.
In the special figure starting port switch common process, first, information on the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored, out of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, is transmitted to a management device external to the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the output count, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135 by passing step A134. In the first embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", when the value is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored, among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, is less than the upper limit value ( Step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by “+1” ( (Step A136), and saves the starting port winning flag to be monitored (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A125). Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning opening 1 has not been won (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the winning opening 1 has been won (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol random number of the RWM is prepared. The data is saved in the storage area (step A144).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.

  Next, a start command switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), and effect command setting processing (step A148) is performed to execute the special figure start port switch common processing. finish.

  Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and executes the special figure variable display game. And a starting winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory which is an execution right. The start winning storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting storage with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and starts. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure suspension information determination process of the first embodiment.

  The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  In the special figure reservation information determination processing, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A151).

When it is determined in step A151 that the winning opening 1 has not been won (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning opening 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (step A152).

In step A152, when it is determined that the special figure is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not being reduced (step A152; N), it is determined whether a large hit or a small hit is being performed (step A153).

If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not being performed or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. Big hit determination processing (step A154) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A155). If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is corresponded. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164, where the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a jackpot (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
When it is determined in step A158 that the winning opening 1 has not been won (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164. Is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the starting opening 1 (step A158; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether or not it is a small hit. Is performed (step A159).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164 to perform the subsequent processes.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is set. After acquiring (step A162), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing (step A165) is performed. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game (step A167). Perform

  Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the production command setting process (step A168) A169), and the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. The special figure information setting processing in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step A167 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  By the above processing, a look-ahead design command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, to change the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) It forms a pre-judgment means. In addition, the timing at which the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning game in which the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the fluctuation display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Grand prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special game state (step A201). If the special winning opening is being processed (Y in step A201), the process proceeds to step A205, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A202).

  If the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the winning prize opening remaining ball is not being processed (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit is being processed (during the small hitting game state) (step A203).

  If the small hitting process is being performed (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If it is not during the small hit processing (step A203; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (step A204).

  If the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step A204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (Step A204; Y), the process proceeds to Step A205.

  Since the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer becomes "0", the value of the special figure game processing number is checked to check the progress of the game. Can be checked. Therefore, to determine whether the special winning game is being opened, the special winning ball remaining ball is being processed, the small hit is being processed, or the small hit remaining ball is being processed, the value of the special figure game processing number is checked. Do it.

  Then, "0" is set to a winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A205), and is there an input to the special winning opening switch 1? Is determined (step A206).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210, and the subsequent processes are performed. When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to " +1 "is updated (step A209).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210). If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. The subsequent processing is performed. When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to " +1 "is updated (step A213).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214). If the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. When the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A215), and if the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A215). In step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

  If the large winning prize remaining ball is not being processed (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A216). If the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A216; In Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

  If the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter ("1" or "2") is added to the big winning opening count (step A217), and the big winning opening count is reduced. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) (step A218).

  If the special winning opening count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the special winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220). ), It is determined whether or not the small hitting process is being performed (step A221).

  If the small hitting process is not being performed (step A221; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the small hitting process is being performed (step A221; Y), the value of the small hit opening operation end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

(Tokuzu usual processing)
Next, the details of the special figure ordinary processing (step A8) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure ordinary processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figure 2 (the number of second start storages) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 1 is “0” (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311). (Step A311; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), effect command setting processing (step A314) is performed, special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends. . On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311 (step A311; Y), special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” in step A301 (step A301; N), special figure 2 change start processing (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is performed. The number-of-suspension command is prepared (step A303), and effect command setting processing (step A304) is performed. Then, a special figure changing process transition setting processing (step A305) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  If the number of special figure 1 reservations is not “0” in step A306 (step A306; N), special figure 1 change start processing (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations is performed. The number-of-reservation command is prepared (step A308), and effect command setting processing (step A309) is performed. Then, a special figure changing process transition setting processing (step A310) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 reservation number check is performed before the special figure 1 reservation number check, so that if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A302) Will be executed. That is, the second special figure change display game is executed prior to the first special figure change display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A315) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure ordinary processing, is set as the processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A321). A322).

  Then, the information in the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. I do.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 change start process according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure change display game. In the special figure 1 change start process, first, a special figure 1 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the change symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special change A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the figure change display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting fluctuation start information of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 change start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the second special figure change display game. The same processing as the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. It is done as.

  In the special figure 2 change start process, first, a special figure 2 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the change symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the figure change display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various kinds of information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (Step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A347), and the special figure 2 change start process ends.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 1 setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (step A353), and information of the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is stored. "0" is cleared (step A354). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not there is (step SA356).

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A355) is a jackpot (step A356; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the missed information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value indicates whether or not the big hit is a small hit. Is determined (step A358), and it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

  If the result of the small hit determination processing (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information was saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination processing (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed while the loss information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure change display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM and prepared (step A372), and the information of the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is stored. "0" is cleared (step A373). The reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is (step SA375).

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the missed information was saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the deviation information to the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure change display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the above-described special figure suspension information determination processing, the big hit flag 1 setting processing, and the big hit determination processing (steps A154, A355, A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit determination process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. , Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), it is out of place. Therefore, "other than a big hit (outlier)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the game is in a high probability state (the probability state of the special figure change display game is a high probability state) (step A383). .

  If the high probability is high (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value during the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A384). Step A386). If the state is not the high-probability state (step A383; N), an upper-limit determination value during low-probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big-hit random number is larger than the upper-limit determination value (step A385). A386).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is out of order. Then, "other than the big hit (outlier)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the above described special figure suspension information determination processing and the small hit determination processing (steps A159 and A358) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit determination process according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination processing, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). In addition, the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, the small hit upper limit. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. Of course, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are set so as not to be covered.

  If the value of the big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (Step A391; Y), that is, if the big hit is a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (Step A393), and the small hit judgment processing ends.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), a small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and it is determined whether or not the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value. A determination is made (step A392).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A392; Y), that is, when the big hit is judged to be a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (Step A393), and the small hit judgment processing ends.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if the big hit is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step A333) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations) First, the big random number of the big hit symbol is loaded (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 and a stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction determination is performed. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode shifts at the timing of the hit, and the shift destination of the effect mode to shift to after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, when a specific big hit symbol (for example, a 4R surely changing design) among the big hits in the special map 1 is used, the production mode of the transition destination is determined to be a certain change depending on whether or not the game state is being changed. It is determined whether or not to enter the production mode, or to transition to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not it is a positive change. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol number area (step A413).

  Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of a loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). Then, the information of the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to "0" (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step A343) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area ( The jackpot symbol random numbers are loaded from (for the number of holds 1) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol number area (step A434). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 and a stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction determination is performed. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a special effect mode in which the change in the certainty is determined regardless of the big hit symbol. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A443), and effect command setting processing (step A444) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the start port 1 (start winning port 36), and executes the first variable display game at the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). A variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. In addition, the game control device 100 forms a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A166, A334, and A344) in the special figure suspension information determination processing, the special figure 1 change start processing, and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure information setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the fluctuation, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of the fluctuation. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure change display game, and the like.

  In the special figure information setting process, first, a first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and a first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

  Next, the first-half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).

  Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stopped symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating a first half fluctuation (a fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, when the number of reservations is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of out-of-office. In other cases, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first-half fluctuation. Note that a fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

  Next, a second half variable group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and a second half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

  Next, a second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

  Next, the second-half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stopped symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)) and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the rate of occurrence of reach changes according to the number of holds only in the case of misses (the rate of occurrence of reach decreases when the number of holds is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the above-described special figure suspension information determination processing, special figure 1 change start processing, and change pattern setting processing (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 change start will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the variation pattern setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, a fluctuation group address table is set (step A471), an address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step A472), and the target fluctuation pattern is set. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the second-half change group table is different between a hit and a non-hit. Specifically, the hitting data has a 1-byte size and the hitting data has a 2-byte size. The rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of losing, and even one byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the size of the hit is one byte. Therefore, at the time of hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of outliers is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size of outliers is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure change display game is a miss (step A474). If the result is a miss (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed. The process shifts to A477 and performs the subsequent processes. If it is not a loss (step A474; N), a distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, a distribution process (step A479) is performed, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and saved in the second half variation number area (step A480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared. (Step A484). After that, a distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, saved in the first variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting processing (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the change start information setting process, first, information on the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step A494), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step A495).

  Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by “−1” (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information on the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the change start information setting processing ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A fluctuation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are given, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Transition setting during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 1)]
Next, details of the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process shift setting processing (special figure 1) of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 1), first, the processing number relating to the special figure change processing is set to “1” as the processing number (step A511), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. The number is saved (step A512).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). The signal related to the start of the change of the special figure 1 is a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 changing signal. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the flash control timer (the timer of the flash cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is stored in the special figure 1 flash control timer area. (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the special-figure-variation-in-process shift setting process (special-figure 1) ends.

[Transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 2) (step A305) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting processing (special figure 2) of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 2), first, the processing number “1” relating to the special figure change processing is set as the processing number (step A521), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. The number is saved (step A522).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal relating to the start of change of the special figure 2 (the special symbol 2 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the flashing control timer (the timer of the flash cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is stored in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area. Is saved (set) (step A526), and the special figure changing process transition setting processing (special figure 2) ends.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process, first, a display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. If the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set.

  Next, a special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure display process ends. That is, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Transition setting processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process shift setting process (step A603) in the above described special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure display process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number “2” related to the special figure displaying processing is set as the processing number (step A611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A612).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 change is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 change is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). The signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal. The signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

  Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for output in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, a stop flag relating to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area ( Step A616) As a control information of the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, a stop flag relating to the stop of the variation in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area. Then (step A617), the process shift setting process during special figure display is terminated.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, details of the special figure display processing (step A10) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step A701). Step A702).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step A703), the information of the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variable display game (the special figure 2) A signal relating to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and a round number upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit is a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal that turns on the signal that turns on the special symbol 2 Including.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2 (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706). (Step A706; Y), the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure change display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (Step A707), A number upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal that turns on the signal per special symbol. Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, The data is saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the production command setting processing is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716). A717) is performed.

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on when a big hit with a payout (the big win opening information is other than the big win opening information 1) is turned on, and a big hit without a payout (so-called sudden jackpot, etc., big win opening). When the information is the special winning opening information 1), it is turned on when a big hit occurs during the time saving state, and turned off otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is turned on when there is a big hit with a payout, and turned off when the big hit has no payout.

  After that, the special winning opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A719), the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (Step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special map when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, information of the special winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared (step A722), and the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared. The flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing for displaying a special figure is completed.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

  If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high-probability variation count updating process (step A726), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step A727) ) To determine whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (the probability state of the special figure change display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure high probability is not present (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure command area (step A729), and the production command setting processing is performed. (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure high probability is present (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state, the small winning occurrence opens the large winning prize, but the small winning occurrence occurs. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order not to make the player aware of.

  Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Then, the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high-probability variation count updating process (step A735), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step A735) A736), the remaining number of rotations for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining number of rotations for effect and the remaining rotation for switching preparation match (step A738). It should be noted that the switching preparation remaining rotation speed is a different value (rotation speed: for example, four times in mode A, three times in mode B, eight times in mode C, etc.) in all of the plurality of effect modes. May be the same value (the number of rotations) in any one of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value (the number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. ).

  If it is determined in step A738 that the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A738; N), the special figure ordinary process shift setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display is performed. The middle processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command setting is performed. After performing the processing (step A740), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure displaying process ends. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a prefetch effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is effected across modes. Can be avoided.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update processing]
Next, details of the high-probability-variation-number updating process (steps A726 and A735) in the special figure displaying process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the high-probability-change-times updating process according to the first embodiment.

  In the high probability change frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is being performed (step A751). If the special figure high probability is not being performed (step A751; N), the high probability change frequency update process is performed. To end.

  If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the high probability change count for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state is updated by “−1” (step A752), It is determined whether the probability change frequency is “0” (step A753).

  If the number of times of high probability change is not “0” (step A753; N), the process of updating the number of times of high probability change is ended. If the number of high-probability changes is "0" (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal relating to the end of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Step A755). Note that the signal regarding the high probability end is a signal for turning off the two big hit signals.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving (no high probability & time saving or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). The signal relating to the end of the high probability & shortening of time is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal. In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the ordinary figure, the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A757), and the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1. Then, in order to turn off the display LED during the right-handed operation, the number during the left-handed operation is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high-probability change frequency update process ends.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check processing (steps A727 and A736) in the special figure displaying processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the effect mode information check processing of the first embodiment.

  In the effect mode information check processing, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771; Y), The effect mode information check processing ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed in accordance with the number of executed special figure change display games, and, for example, an effect mode that continues to the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. It is.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation speed, which is the number of executable times of the special figure change display game until the effect mode is changed, is updated by "-1" (step A772). ), It is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed is “0” (step A773). The process of step A772 is a counting unit that counts the number of executions of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game.

  If the effect remaining rotation speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check processing ends. If the effect remaining rotation speed is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

  The effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A776), and the remaining effect number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the remaining effect number area (step A777). The effect mode to be shifted to (the effect mode at the shift destination) can be known from the next mode shift information already saved before step A776. Next mode transition information on the next production mode after the transition production mode is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). Note that the processing in step A776 is effect mode execution control means for performing execution control of one of a plurality of effect modes (game modes) in response to the counting result by the counting means (step A772). (Game mode execution control means).

  A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area, that is, if the probability state does not change (Step A780; Y), the effect mode is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 without transmitting the command. The information check processing ends. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A781), and the production command setting is performed. The processing (step A782) is performed.

  Then, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed. Then, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed to determine whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

  If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check processing ends. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), effect command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and effect mode information check is performed. The process ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signal related to the start of the big hit includes, for example, a signal that turns on one signal of the big hit (outputs with a big hit + a small hit) and a signal that turns on four signals of the big hit (outputs with a big hit).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). The signal relating to the end of the high probability & shortening of time is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  After that, the information of the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the general-purpose game mode flag is set. The low probability flag is saved in the area (step A797).

  Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the information in the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A801), and the special figure variation that can be executed in the high probability state The information of the high-probability variation count area for managing the number of display games is cleared (step A802). Thereby, the high probability state and the time saving state are completed, and the state becomes the normal probability state and the normal state.

  Thereafter, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and since the game control device 100 manages the effect mode, the information of the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804). The non-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal relating to the right-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handing is performed in the gaming state display number 2 area in order to light the display LED during right-handing The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 ends. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1, first, a processing number relating to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal related to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on one signal of the big hit (outputs a big hit + a small hit).

  Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

  Then, the information of the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A816), and the illegal monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal related to the right strike instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the firing position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to turn on the display LED for right-handed operation, the number for right-handed operation is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by "+1" (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902). (Step A903) is performed.

  Thereafter, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is determined by the obtained opening switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).

  If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the special winning opening for short opening (0.2s in the first embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. The game is saved (step A907), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A909) is performed to open the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the opening time of the long winning opening for long opening (29s in the first embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A908), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process (Step A909) is performed to open the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit patterns, (1) 4R, large winning opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, large winning opening information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, big winning opening information 3 (1-4R is long opening, 5-16R is short opening), (4) 4R, big winning opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, big winning Open mouth information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, open winning opening information 6 (1-8R open long, 9-16R open short), (7) 16R, open winning opening information 7 (1) 4R is set to long open, and 5-16R is set to short open).

  Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are stored in the special winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the winning opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is performed such that the opening operation is long, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is short opening.

(Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process)
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A909) in the above-described fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number “4” related to the special winning opening processing is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A912). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the start of opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning on the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing setting setting for opening the special winning opening is ended.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
Next, the details of the special winning opening processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the processing during opening of the special winning opening according to the first embodiment.

  In the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM to determine whether or not the current round is the last round. Is determined (step A1001).

  If it is the last round (step A1001; Y), the final ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and an ending command is prepared (step A1008). A1009), the process shifts to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is not the last round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is reduced. It is determined whether the value exceeds the open switching determination value (A1004).

  When the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010 to perform the subsequent processes.

  If the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010 to perform the subsequent processes.

Thereafter, the effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening processing is ended.
(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing transition setting processing)
Next, details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) in the above-described special winning opening processing during opening will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning port remaining sphere processing shift setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special winning port remaining ball processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing, “5” is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, the OFF data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the special winning opening remaining sphere processing transition setting processing ends.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing)
Next, details of the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special winning port remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the last round. Is determined (step A1101).

  If it is the last round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1111), and the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern ( For example, 1.9 s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113), the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the special winning port remaining ball processing ends.

  If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), and it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105). In this case (step A1105; Y), the processing shifts to the processing of step A1109, and the subsequent processing is performed.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening information is a value of a rank down staging system (step A1106). If it is not the value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the special winning opening opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) ( In step A1107), if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), an interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 s) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. And the subsequent processing.

  Then, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above described special winning port remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1122). Then, a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The signal relating to the end of the opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.
[Big hit end process shift setting process]
Next, details of the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1114) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, the process number “6” relating to the big hit end process is set as the process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

  Then, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). The signal relating to the end of the opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Next, information in the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and information in the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1135). . Then, the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information of the special winning opening information area for storing the special winning opening information flag is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end transition setting process ends.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the big hit end processing (step A14) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end processing of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end processing, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is time reduction operation data (step A1201). If it is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) is performed, and if it is the time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) is performed. .

  Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of the change start (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is obtained. The transfer information is acquired and saved in the next mode transfer information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1210), and effect command setting processing (step A1211) is performed.

  In addition, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that further include information on the effect mode in either “high probability / without time saving” or “no high probability / without time saving”. In the case of the first embodiment, when the big hit ends, the state always changes to a probable change state (a so-called ST state). Therefore, as the probability information command, “high probability / time reduction / effect mode A”, “high probability / time reduction / effect” There are "Mode B", "High-probability, no time-saving, effect mode C", and "High-probability, no time-saving, effect mode A", which are not used in this processing. , "Low probability, no time saving, effect mode B" and "Low probability, no time saving, effect mode C".

Next, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability-change-number command corresponding to the high-probability-change number is prepared (step A1214), and effect command setting processing (step A1215) is performed to determine whether or not a time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1215). A1216).

If the time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end processing ends.
If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after effect command setting processing (Step A1218) is performed, the special figure normal processing shifts. The setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process ends.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting processing 1 (step A1202) in the above big hit end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end setting processing 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding the absence of a time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal relating to the absence of the time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning off the two big hit signals.

  Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the time saving state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). The signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the time reduction state is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time. The signal includes a signal for turning off the shortened state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, the number of no time saving state is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A1223), the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1226), and the signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to extinguish the display LED during right strike, the number in left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the big hit end setting processing 1 ends.
[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting processing 2 (step A1203) in the above big hit end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal related to the start of the time-saving state is, for example, a signal that turns on two jackpot signals. The signal related to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner since it is output from the big hit.

  Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). Signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state include, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, the number of the time reduction state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the universal figure high probability flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1236), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state. However, since the right-handed mode is set during the big hit, the setting for the right-handed is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Tokuzu ordinary processing shift setting processing 2]
Next, details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-described big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, first, “0”, which is the processing number related to the special figure ordinary processing, is set as the processing number (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A124). A1242).

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signal regarding the end of the big hit includes, for example, a signal for turning off one big hit, a signal for turning off three big hits, and a signal for turning off four big hits.

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signal relating to the end of the big hit includes a signal for turning off the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal for turning off the signal for operating the continuous actor, a signal for turning off the signal per special symbol, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 2. Includes a signal that turns off the signal.

  Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1248), the irregularity monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 2 is performed. To end.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a view illustrating a flowchart of processing during the small hit fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare middle process, the small hit middle process shift setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hit fanfare middle process ends.
[Small hit middle processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit mid-flight processing shift setting processing (step A1301) in the small hit fan-fare midway processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hitting middle processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number “8” related to the small hitting middle processing is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1312). ).

  Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning on the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and the information of the special winning opening count number area for storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hit operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hit control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit middle processing transition setting processing ends.
[Small hit processing]
Next, details of the small hitting medium processing (step A16) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hitting small process, first, the small hitting middle control pointer is loaded from the small hitting middle control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hitting middle control pointer is set to the small hitting operation end value (for example, "6"). It is determined whether or not the above is true (step A1402).

  If the value of the loaded small hit control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hit middle control pointer in the small hit middle control pointer area is updated by "+1" (step A1403). ), The small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hit mid-process is terminated. If the loaded small hit control pointer value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is It is determined whether or not the figure is high (step A1406). Note that the determination in step A1406 determines a probability state as a determination target and does not determine a time reduction state.

  If the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to step A1409, and the subsequent processes are performed. If the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and effect command setting processing (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is terminated.

[Small hit operation shift setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting processing (step A1404) in the small hit middle processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit operation shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit operation transition setting processing, first, the value of the small hit control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). If the value of the small hit control pointer loaded in step A1401 is “0”, “2”, or “4” (step A1411; pointer = 0, 2, 4), the value of the small hit control pointer is changed to The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the OFF data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation shift setting processing ends.

  If the value of the small hit control pointer loaded in step A1401 is "1", "3", or "5" (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the small hit control pointer is changed to The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding special winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation shift setting process ends.

  Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hit operation of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointer.

  The small hit operation includes a small hit fanfare time (300 ms), a subsequent big winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), a subsequent big winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a subsequent waiting time. Time (1500 ms), a subsequent special winning opening time (200 ms), a subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), a subsequent special winning opening time (200 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (1900 ms). This is a series of operations for a total of 7600 ms including the small hit ending time (100 ms).

  In the case of the small hit operation, the value of the control pointer becomes “0” after the first winning opening time of the special winning opening, and the respective processes corresponding to the values of the control pointer from “0” to “5” are performed. The value of the control pointer becomes “6”. In this manner, in the case of the small hit operation, the small hit remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the special variable winning device 38 four times. In the small hitting operation, by setting the small hitting ending time after the remaining ball processing time, an apparent ending time of 2000 ms obtained by adding the remaining small ball ending time of 1900 ms to the control small hitting ending time of 100 ms.

  In addition, during the small hit fan fare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hit ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. In addition, during the special winning opening time, the special variable winning device 38 is opened by controlling the special winning opening solenoid 38b to be on.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere processing shift setting processing (step A1409) in the small hit medium processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number relating to the small hit remaining ball processing, “9”, is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1421). Step A1422).

  Then, the small hitting remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is turned off in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing ends.

[Small hit ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing according to the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining sphere processing, the small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1501) is performed, and the small hit remaining sphere processing ends.
[Small hit end processing shift setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end processing shift setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end process shift setting process, first, the process number “10” related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1512). ).

  Then, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Then, the information in the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit control pointer area is cleared to zero (step A1516), and the small hit end transition setting processing is performed. To end.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (step A18) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end processing, first, a flag relating to a probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1601). A1602). If the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the start of the change (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is obtained (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the remaining effect rotational speed is acquired and saved in the remaining effect rotational speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is acquired. The data is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

  Then, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609). .

  If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1610), and the production command setting processing (step A1610) A1611).

  Then, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed. Further, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), and effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed to determine whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

  If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and effect command setting processing (step A1618) is performed.

  Then, a flag relating to the time saving state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1619 is during special figure time reduction (step A1620). If the flag loaded in step A1619 is during special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end processing ends.

  If the flag loaded in step A1619 is not during special figure time reduction (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed state number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed. The hit end processing ends.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3, first, "0" which is a processing number related to the special figure ordinary processing is set as a processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A163). A1632).

  Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal related to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off one signal of the big hit. The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

  Then, the information in the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1637), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 3 is executed. finish.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in the above-described special figure game process subroutine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the effect command setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

  Thereby, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a two-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION", like an effect command, but may be configured in a larger byte configuration. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multiple-byte configuration may be used.

Then, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process ends.

  By writing the command data (ACTION) into the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. Will be done.

  In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives these commands and performs effect control on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the symbol variation control process of the first embodiment.

  In the symbol change control process, first, a target change control flag is set and it is checked whether the symbol is changing (step A1801), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether the symbol is changing (step A1802). .

  If it is changing (step A1802; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the blink control timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the target symbol is updated by "-1" (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the blink control timer is "0" (step A1805).

  If the blinking control timer is “0” (step A1805; Y), a blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target symbol and state is obtained (step A1806), and the blinking control timer initial value is set to the target symbol. The data is saved in the blink control timer area (step A1807). The blink control timer initial value will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the variable symbol number of the target symbol is updated by "+1" (step A1808), and the flow shifts to the process of step A1809. If the blink control timer is not “0” (step A1805; N), the process moves to step A1809.

  Then, display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), and the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process ends. I do.

  If it is not fluctuating in step A1802 (step A1802; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol is obtained (step A1810). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is obtained (step A1811), and the obtained display data is saved in the target symbol segment area (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process ends. I do.

  In addition, on the fluctuation control table prepared in the special figure game process, information on the lower address of the fluctuation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stopping), and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined. I have.

[Flashing control timer initial value table]
Next, the details of the blink control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired in the above-described symbol variation control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an example of the blink control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. FIG.

The initial value of the blink control timer is set for each target symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) and its state (state 1, state 2).
The initial value of the blink control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1 and is 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2. Further, the initial value of the blink control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1 and is 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2. In addition, the initial value of the blink control timer is 160 ms when the general figure is in the state 1 and is 120 ms when the general figure is in the state 2.

  Note that the initial value of the blink control timer is smaller than the value of the state 1 in the state 2 but is not limited thereto. The initial value of the blinking control timer may be larger than the value of the state 1 in the state 2. For example, the initial value of the blink control timer is 60 ms when Toku-zu 1 is in State 1, 80 ms when Toku-zu 1 is in State 2 and 60 ms when Toku-zu 2 is in State 1. The time may be 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2, 120 ms when the special figure is in the state 1, and 160 ms when the general figure is in the state 2.

  In addition, the state 2 is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the state 1, and a specific gaming state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not in the probability fluctuation state, it corresponds to the state 1, and when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is in the probability fluctuation state, the state 2 is set. Equivalent to.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55 in addition to the state display section 57 in the collective display device 50 to play the game of the gaming machine 10. The status can be displayed.

  In the collective display device 50, instead of the status display unit 57, the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is displayed by a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a general symbol display unit 55. Can also be displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 performs the first state display on the state display unit 57 in the first period, performs the second state display on the state display unit 57 in the second period thereafter, and displays the special figure 1 symbol display. The first state display can be performed by the unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 notifies the game state transition (trigger notification) on the state display unit 57 at the time of the game state transition from the normal state to the probability fluctuation state or the like. In addition, when the gaming state such as the normal state or the probability variation state is the steady state, the gaming machine 10 displays the gaming state in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55. Is in a steady state (steady state notification). Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to notify the gaming state using the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. The gaming machine 10 may notify the gaming state using one or two of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify a more complicated game state by a combination of the display modes of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55. . Further, the gaming machine 10 notifies a more complicated game state by a combination of the display modes of the state display section 57, the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55. It may be. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify a game progress that is easy for the player to understand.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the distribution processing according to the first embodiment.

  The distribution process selects the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1 or the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 Processing for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game and selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 It is.

  In the distribution process, first, the prepared first-half variation group table (selection table), the second-half variation selection table (selection table), and the first data of the first-half variation selection table (selection table) have a code without distribution (that is, “0”). ) Is checked (step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the leading data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the second-half variation group table, the second-half variation selection table, and the first-half variation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half variation pattern group, the second-half variation pattern, and the first-half variation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not need to be assigned, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  If the first data of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step A1902; Y), the code is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1902; Y). (Step A1907), the distribution processing ends. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without sorting (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table First, one specified distribution value is acquired (step A1903).

  Subsequently, from the random number values (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the fluctuation pattern setting process, the distribution values acquired in step A1903 are obtained. After calculating a new random value by subtraction (step A1904), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). If the new random number is not smaller than “0” (step A1905; N), the address of the next distribution value is updated (step A1906), and the process returns to step A1903.

  That is, in step A1903, after the distribution values specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are acquired, the random number value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random number value. The distribution value is subtracted, and a new random value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one of the second-half change selection table, the second-half change pattern, and the first-half change pattern defined in the second-half change group table, the second-half change selection table, and the first-half change selection table, Select a variation number or first half variation number. If it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A1907), and the distribution process ends. I do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution processing of the first embodiment.

  The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second-half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second-half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the two-byte distribution processing, first, is the first data of the second half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting processing a code without distribution (that is, “0”)? Is checked (step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the leading data is a code without distribution (step A2002). Here, the second half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half variation pattern group, but defines the second half variation pattern group in which the second half variation pattern is “no reach”. In a fluctuation group table (for example, some fluctuation group tables in a case where the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, and therefore, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top. .

  If the first data in the second half fluctuation group table is a code without allocation (step A2002; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (step A2007), and the 2-byte allocation processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value specified first in the second half variable group table is acquired (step A2003).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the variation pattern setting process (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005). If the new random number is not smaller than “0” (step A2005; N), the address of the next distribution value is updated (step A2006), and the process returns to step A2003. That is, in step A2003, after obtaining the distribution value specified next in the fluctuation group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted as the new random value using the determined random number in step A2005, and a new random value is obtained. A numerical value is calculated (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y). As a result, one of the second-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second-half variation selection table defined in the second-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2007), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To end.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S130) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 77 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the general-purpose game process of the first embodiment. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure change display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  In the general game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general winning switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B2). Perform Next, if the ordinary game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become “0” (step B4).

  If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or the time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to a process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number. A process (step B5) of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to in a register is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number using the table is performed. . Then, a subroutine call (step B7) based on the game processing number is performed.

  In step B7, when the game processing number is "0", the start of the change of the ordinary figure change display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the ordinary figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the processing during the change of the ordinary figure change game are performed. A general process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the operation is performed. If the game processing number is "1" in step B7, a general figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process is performed.

  In step B7, if the game processing number is “2”, if the result of the normal figure change display game is a hit, setting of a general power release time according to whether or not the time saving state The general-drawing display process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the per-drawing middle process is performed. If the game processing number is "3" in step B7, the process is executed during the general drawing operation (step S7) in which the processing during the general drawing operation is continued, or information necessary for performing the ordinary electric ball remaining processing is set. B11) is performed.

  If the game processing number is "4" in step B7, a general electric remaining sphere processing (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing a general drawing end processing is performed. If the game processing number is "5" in step B7, a general figure end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the general figure ordinary processing (step B8) is performed.

  Thereafter, a general symbol variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display is prepared (step B14), and a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator (step B15). Is performed, and the ordinary figure game process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (step B102). Here, the game state of right-handing is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during special figure time reduction (general power support). In the case of the game state of right-handing (step B102; Y), the processing shifts to step B105. When the game state is not the right-handed game state (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), an effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, the number of ordinary drawing reservations is acquired, and the ordinary drawing reservation number is acquired. Is smaller than the upper limit (for example, “4”) (step B105).

  If the number of ordinary drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of ordinary drawing reservations is updated by "+1" (step B106), and the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of ordinary drawing reservations is changed. It is calculated (step B107). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process ends.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N). Then, the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the normal winning switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this general-purpose winning switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal-variation winning display device is in the hit state and the normal-variation winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations. Is determined (step B111). Then, when the vehicle is in the normal position (step B111; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and if there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If it is determined, the count value of the ordinary power counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated ordinary telephone counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B114), and when the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y). When it is determined, based on the fact that the count value of the ordinary power counter has reached the upper limit, the value of the operation end (for example, “4”) is saved as a process for closing the ordinary power in the normal pointer per hit control pointer area ( (Step B115), the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the general-purpose winning switch monitoring process ends. In other words, if there is a general prize winning equal to or greater than the upper limit during the hit state of the general figure, the value of the hit end is saved in the normal figure hitting processing control pointer area at that time, and To end.

  Also, when it is determined in step B111 that the vehicle is not in the ordinary drawing mode (step B111; N), when it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or step B114 When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B8) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ordinary processing in the first embodiment. In this ordinary drawing ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary drawing reservations is “0” (step B121), and if the number of ordinary drawing reservations is “0” (step B121; Y), The figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B141) is performed, and the ordinary figure ordinary processing ends. If the number of reserved symbols is not "0" (step B121; N), the random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) (step B122). Then, the hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) are cleared to zero (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability of a winning result in the general-floor variation display game is higher than the normal probability, that is, whether it is a time-saving state (step B124). If it is not during the general figure high probability (step B124; N), a low probability lower limit determination value is set (step B125). If it is during the general figure high probability (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit determination value is set. It is set (step B126). The low probability upper limit determination value and the high probability upper limit determination value are common values (for example, “251”). The low-probability lower-limit determination value and the high-probability-lower-limit determination value are different values (for example, the low-probability-lower-limit determination value is “251” and the high-probability-lower-limit determination value is “1”). The high-probability lower-limit judgment value is a small value in comparison. As a result, the hit probability increases at high probabilities as compared to low probabilities, for example, 0/251 for low probabilities and 250/251 for high probabilities.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127). If the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; N), whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value is determined. Is determined (step B128). In step B127, if the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; Y), or in steps B127 and B128, if the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), In the case of a loss, the loss information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), the loss stop symbol number is set (step B130), and the loss symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B131). Also, in steps B127 and B128, when the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value and equal to or larger than the lower limit judgment value, that is, in the case of a hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area ( (Step B132), a hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in a general symbol stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of winning symbols.

  Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). Thereafter, the random number storage area per ordinary figure is shifted (step B137), the empty area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the reserved number of ordinary figures is updated by "-1" (step B139). In other words, with the execution of the general-figure variation display game relating to the oldest general-family reservation number 1, the ranks of the general-family reservation numbers “2” to “4” that are on hold after the general-family reservation number “1” Are carried out one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number for ordinary figure reservation 1 to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved ordinary figure 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the reserved number of ordinary figure is decremented by “1”.

Then, a normal-figure-change processing transition setting processing (step B140) is performed, and the normal-figure normal processing ends.
[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B141) in the ordinary figure ordinary processing described above will be described. FIG. 81 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the general-purpose ordinary process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment. In the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1, first, "0" is set as the processing number for shifting to the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B151), and the processing number is saved in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B151). B152). After that, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the ordinary telephone irregularity monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 ends.

[Process shift setting process during normal fluctuation]
Next, the details of the normal-figure-change processing transition setting processing (step B140) in the normal-figure normal processing described above will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process of setting transition to processing during normal-figure fluctuation according to the first embodiment. In the normal figure change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure change processing (step B161), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area ( (Step B162), the normal figure fluctuation time (common to the low probability and the high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B163). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). Note that the signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal.

  Next, a fluctuating flag indicating that the general-figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating is saved in the general-figure fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, the initial value of the blink control timer (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the blink period timer of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blink control timer area (step B166), and the ordinary figure change process transition setting processing is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the general figure changing process (step B9) in the general figure game processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the processing during the ordinary figure fluctuation of the first embodiment. In the normal figure changing process, a normal figure displaying process shift setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal figure changing process ends.

[Transfer setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-figure display processing transition setting processing (step B171) in the general-figure fluctuation processing described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process-setting-for-process-in-general-drawing-mode process setting process of the first embodiment. In the normal figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the normal diagram display process (step B181), and the process number is set in the general figure game process number area. Save (step B182). After that, the general-purpose display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B183). Further, a signal relating to the end of the change in the ordinary figure is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). The signal related to the end of the change of the ordinary figure is a signal for turning off the signal during the normal change of the symbol 1.

Next, a stop flag indicating that the general-figure change display game is stopped is saved in the general-figure change control flag area (step B185), and the normal-figure display process shift setting processing ends.
[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process of displaying a general figure (step B10) in the above-described general figure game process will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process during normal-drawing display according to the first embodiment. In the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or out-of-position information) set in the normal figure normal processing is loaded (step B191), and the information of the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

  If the hit flag is not the hit information (step B193; N), the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B198) for shifting to the ordinary figure ordinary processing is performed, and the ordinary figure displaying processing ends. The normal-drawing-normal-process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), a hitting process setting table is set (step B194).

  Then, a hit start pointer value (one of the control pointers “0”, “2”, and “4”) corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information is obtained, and saved in the normal pointer hit symbol control pointer area (step B195). The general-purpose release time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B196). Thus, the opening mode of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 during the time saving state is set, and for example, the opening can be performed four times. After that, a normal-drawing-per-middle-process-in-migration setting process (step B197) is performed, and the normal-drawing-middle-display-in-progress process ends.

[Middle-time process shift setting process]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal-per-figure process (step B197) in the above-described general-floor display process will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process-setting-for-medium-time-period transition setting process of the first embodiment. In this process, the process number is set to "3" (step B201), and the process number is saved in the general game process number area. (Step B202). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal figure change display game (a signal related to the normal figure change display game) and a signal related to the start of the normal power operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). Note that the signal related to the start of the normal figure variation display game is a signal for turning on the normal signal per symbol design, and the signal related to the start of the general power operation is a signal for turning on the normal electric accessory 1 active signal. It is.

Next, ON data is saved in a general-purpose solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general-purpose solenoid (step B204).
Further, the information in the general telephone count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable prize device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the general illegal winning device for storing the number of prizes to the normal variable prize device 37 during the general illegal unauthorized monitoring period. The information of the winning number area is cleared (step B206). Then, a flag defining the outside of the irregularity monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary telephone irregularity monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the process for setting the normal-principle-per-middle processing transition is ended.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, a detailed description will be given of the during-normal-drawing process (step B11) in the above-described general-purpose game processing. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during the ordinary hitting operation in the first embodiment. In this routine processing, the control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the loaded control pointer is set to the value of the control pointer upper limit area in the routine control. It is determined whether or not (the value of the hit end) has been reached (step B212).

  If the value of the control pointer during normal operation does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit area during normal operation (step B212; N), the control pointer during normal operation is updated by "+1" (step B213). Then, the normal power operation shift setting process (step B214) is performed, and the normal time hitting process ends. When the value of the control pointer during the ordinary figure reaches the value of the upper limit value area of the control pointer during the ordinary figure (the value of the hit end) (step B212; Y), the control passes the step B213 and sets the transition to the ordinary power operation. The processing (step B214) is performed, and the processing during the ordinary drawing ends.

(Privilege operation transition setting process)
Next, the details of the ordinary power operation shift setting process (step B214) in the above-described ordinary diagram hitting process will be described. FIG. 88 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary power operation shift setting process of the first embodiment. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer. In the normal power operation shift setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B221).

  When the value of the control pointer is either “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to Step B222. That is, in order to control the closing of the ordinary variable prize device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the closing of the ordinary variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B222). The off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c (step B223), and the general-purpose operation shift setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is one of "1" and "3", the flow shifts to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal variable prize device 37, the normal power open time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the open time of the normal variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B224) The ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B225), and the general power operation shift setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4", the flow shifts to step B226. That is, "4" is set as the processing number (step B226) in order to end the opening control of the ordinary fluctuation prize device 37 and perform the ordinary electric remaining ball processing (step B12). Then, this processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (step B227), and the general electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B228). After that, the off data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn off the general power solenoid 37c (step B229), and the general power operation shift setting process ends.

  Next, the ordinary power operation in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a view showing a general power operation timing chart of the ordinary variable prize device of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointer.

  The normal power operation in the case of the winning symbol 1 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a total of 1200 ms including a normal symbol display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (500 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms). Is a series of operations. In the case of the hit symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes “4” after the elapse of the ordinary power release time, and the ordinary power winning sphere device 37 performs the ordinary power remaining sphere processing after one opening operation.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the hit symbol 2 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed in a normal symbol display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait time (200 ms). This is a series of operations for a total of 4800 ms, including the normal power release time (1700 ms) and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 2, the value of the control pointer becomes “2” after the first ordinary power release time has elapsed, and the control pointer value goes through the respective processes corresponding to “2” and “3”. The value of the pointer becomes “4”. In this manner, in the case of the hit symbol 2, the normal-power remaining sphere process is performed after the two-time opening operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the hit symbol 3 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed by a normal symbol display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait time (200 ms). This is a series of operations of a total of 6700 ms including a normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 3, the value of the control pointer becomes “0” after the elapse of the first ordinary power release time, and the values of the control pointer correspond to “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. Through the respective processes, the value of the control pointer becomes “4”. In this way, in the case of the hit symbol 3, the ordinary-power remaining sphere processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 three times.

  During the normal figure display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the normal electric solenoid 37c. In addition, during the normal power release time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by the ON control of the general power solenoid 37c.

(Puden residual sphere treatment)
Next, the ordinary power remaining sphere process (step B12) in the above ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 90 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary electric remaining sphere processing of the first embodiment. In the ordinary power remaining sphere processing, the ordinary figure end processing shift setting processing (step B231) is performed, and the ordinary power remaining sphere processing is ended.

[Private figure end processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing shift setting processing (step B231) in the above-described general electric remaining sphere processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the per-figure end processing transition setting processing according to the first embodiment. In the general figure end processing transition setting processing, first, a processing number “5” relating to the general figure end processing is set (step B241), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area (step B242). ).

  Thereafter, the general-purpose ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B243), and a signal relating to the end of the operation of the normal variable prize device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). The signal related to the end of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a signal for turning off the normal electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information in the ordinary telephone count number area for counting the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area during the per-chart is cleared (step B246), and the per-chart end processing transition setting process ends.

[End processing per map]
Next, an explanation will be given of the end process (step B13) in the above-described general map game process. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the per-figure end processing according to the first embodiment. In the per-figure-per-draw end processing, the per-figure per-day processing transition setting processing 2 (step B251) is performed, and the per-figure per-draw end processing is terminated.

[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 (step B251) in the above ordinary figure end processing will be described. FIG. 93 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 of the first embodiment. In the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, first, a processing number “0” relating to the ordinary figure ordinary processing is set (step B261), and the processing number is saved in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B262). .

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the hit in the normal figure changing game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). Note that the signal relating to the end of the hit in the normal figure changing game is a signal for turning off the signal during normal pattern 1 changing.

  After that, a flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is saved in the flag area for fraud monitoring during the fraudulent operation (step B264), and the process for setting the normal processing to normal processing transition 2 ends. .

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the segment LED editing process according to the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings related to the driving of the LEDs constituting the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, the general view reservation display unit 56, and the status display unit 57 provided in the collective display device 50 are performed. Perform

In the segment LED editing processing, first, “1” is added to the blink control timer to update the timer (step C11). The blink control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output on-timing of the general-purpose pending display is determined (step C12), and if it is the output-on timing (step C12; Y), the general-purpose pending number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on-timing is set. If it is not (step C12; N), the ordinary figure reservation number display table 2 is set (step C14). The determination of the output on-timing of the general-purpose hold display can be made by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, a blinking period of 128 ms can be set by referring to the fifth bit of the timer that is incremented by one every 4 ms.

  After that, the display data corresponding to the number of ordinary figure reservations is acquired from the set ordinary figure reservation number display table 1 or the ordinary figure reservation number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing display data of LED_00 to LED_31.

  For example, the number-of-regular-pending-number display table 1 and the number-of-regular-pending-number display table 2 have the same value for the number of ordinary figure-reserved numbers “0” to “2” and different values for the number of reserved general-purpose numbers “3” and “4”. It is. As a result, the corresponding LED is turned off with the number of reserved general figures “0”, the corresponding LED is lit with the number of reserved general figures “1” and “2”, and the number of reserved general figures “3” is displayed on the general figure reservation display unit 56. , "4" realizes blinking of the corresponding LED.

  Next, the output ON timing of the special figure 1 hold display is determined (step C16), and if it is the output ON timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C17), and the output is performed. If it is not the ON timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C18). The determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display can be performed in the same manner as the determination of the output on-timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by one every 4 ms from the general-purpose display, a blinking cycle different from that of the general-purpose display can be set.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 1 hold number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C19). In addition, the lighting mode of the LED is also realized in the special figure 1 display section 52 in the same manner as in the general figure display section 56.

  Next, the output ON timing of the special figure 2 suspension display is determined (step C20), and if it is the output ON timing (step C20; Y), the special figure 2 suspension number display table 1 is set (step C21), and the output is performed. If it is not the ON timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C22). Note that the determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display can be performed in the same manner as the determination of the output on-timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by one every 4 ms from the general-purpose display, a blinking cycle different from that of the general-purpose display can be set.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension number is acquired from the set special figure 2 suspension number display table 1 or the special figure 2 suspension number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C23). It should be noted that the lighting state of the LED is also realized in the special figure 2 holding display section 58 in the same manner as in the general figure holding display section 56.

  Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C25). .

Next, the game status display table 1 is set (step C26), display data corresponding to the game status display number 1 is obtained, and saved in the segment area (step C27).
The gaming state display table 1 indicates whether the gaming state of the special figure game is during the time saving period (during regular power support), in other words, whether or not it is one of the gaming states advantageous to the player. A display mode for notification by the display unit 57 is defined. For example, when the LED_29 of the status display unit 57 is turned off, “normal” is notified, and when the LED_29 is turned on, “special figure time reduction (general power support)” is notified.

  Thereafter, the game status display table 2 is set (step C28), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is obtained, saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process ends.

  The game state display table 2 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is a right-handed game state, in other words, whether or not it is another game state advantageous to the player. Defines the display mode for notification. For example, when the LED_30 of the status display unit 57 is turned off, “normal hit (left hit)” is notified, and when the LED_30 is turned on, “right hit” is notified. It should be noted that the period of notifying “right-handed” includes a period corresponding to a gaming state such as a big hit, a small hit, and a general power support.

  Thus, the segment LED editing process can notify the player of the progress of the game according to the set display mode. Therefore, the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, the special figure 2 reservation display unit 58, the general figure reservation display unit 56, the state display unit 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

  Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process and a board radio fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraudulent activities will be described. A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player according to the result of the game may be fraudulently attempted to illegally obtain the game value. Among such fraudulent acts, a gaming machine provided with a mechanism for detecting a fraudulent act using a magnet has been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent activities, and detection methods and conditions corresponding to each type are required. However, the occurrence of an abnormal state could not be accurately detected.

  In particular, erroneously determining that an abnormal state has occurred even though an abnormal state leading to wrongdoing has not occurred, and performing a notification or the like causes a player's distrust and a repelling factor of the game in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important to prevent erroneous detection of such an abnormal state.

  Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection results of the magnetic detector for detecting abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For example, in order to prevent erroneous detection of an abnormal state, the following illegal magnet monitoring process and illegal panel radio wave monitoring process are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
First, the magnet illegal monitoring process (step S132) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In the magnet unauthorized monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 61 serving as a magnetic detector for detecting an abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. Since the magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector that detects the approach of a magnet, the magnetic sensor can be rephrased as a magnet sensor.

  In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, based on the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), whether the magnetic sensor is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected. It is determined whether or not it is (Step C31). If the magnetic sensor is ON (step C31; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, “1” is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the period of detecting abnormal magnetism and updated (step C32). ), It is determined whether or not the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has expired (step C33).

  If the magnet irregularity monitoring timer times out (step C33; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), abnormality is determined. When abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the magnet fraud reporting timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud reporting timer area (step C35). Then, a command for magnet impropriety notification is prepared (step C36), a magnet improper occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet improper flag (step C37), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet improper flag matches the value of the magnet improper flag area. A determination is made (step C43).

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period.

  On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor is not turned on (step C31; N), that is, if abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that defines the magnet fraud notification time period. If the timer is not "0", "1" is subtracted from the magnet improper notification timer and updated (step C39). Note that the minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is “0” (Step C40). When the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has not expired (step C33; N), the process also proceeds to step C39.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step C40; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. When the value of the magnet fraudulent notification timer is “0” (Step C40; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired and the period of the fraudulent notification has ended, or In the case where the fraudulent notification has not been performed from step (1), a command to end magnet fraudulent notification is prepared (step C41). Further, a magnet invalid flag is prepared as a magnet invalid flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet invalid flag matches the value of the magnet invalid flag area (step C43).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), effect command setting processing is performed (step C45), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing ends. I do.

(Panel radio fraud monitoring processing)
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 serving as a radio wave detector for detecting an abnormal radio wave, and the start and end of fraudulent notification are set.

  In the panel radio wave monitoring process, first, the panel radio sensor is turned on based on the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, That is, it is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). If the panel radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C52).

  Then, a command for informing the radio wave fraudulent information is prepared (step C53), and a fraudulent radio wave occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step C54). It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when abnormal radio waves are detected, unlike the case of magnetic fraud.

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as abnormal state detection control means for detecting occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the panel radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 is configured to determine that an abnormal state has occurred only by detecting the abnormal radio wave once by the board radio wave sensor.

  On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not turned on (step C51; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that specifies the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0" unless the radio wave fraud notification is performed. "1" is subtracted from the timer and updated (step C55). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is “0” (step C56).

  If the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the panel radio frequency irregularity monitoring process ends. When the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired and the period of the fraud notification has ended, or If no illegal notification has been issued from step (1), a command for ending the radio wave fraudulent notification is prepared (step C57), and a fraudulent radio wave release flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step C58). It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area (step C59).

  If the prepared panel radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared panel radio wave illegal flag is saved in the panel radio illegal flag area (step C60), and a production command setting process is performed (step C61). The process ends.

  By performing the above-described magnet fraud monitoring processing and panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing, the occurrence of an abnormal state can be accurately detected. That is, although a gaming machine is provided with a component that generates magnetism such as a solenoid, when the magnetism is detected continuously for a predetermined period, it is determined that the state is abnormal, so that the magnetism generated by the solenoid or the like is determined. The occurrence can be prevented from being erroneously detected as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not provided with a component that emits a radio wave, it is possible to minimize damage by immediately determining an abnormal state when detecting an abnormal radio wave.

  In the first embodiment, the detection of the abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which the magnetism is detected. However, a state in which the magnetism is stronger than the magnetic state in the non-abnormal state may be detected. The state where the magnetism is detected may be regarded as abnormal. Further, in the first embodiment, the detection of the abnormal radio wave is merely a state in which the radio wave is received. However, the detection of the radio wave of an intensity that is not received in the non-abnormal state or the reception of the radio wave in the non-abnormal state is not performed. It may be in a state of receiving radio waves with no frequency. Further, a state where a radio wave whose intensity is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave of a specific frequency is detected may be regarded as abnormal. When the threshold is set based on the strength of the magnetic field, the strength of the radio wave, and the frequency, a signal may be output when the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio sensor 62 exceeds the threshold, or the threshold may be set on the control device side. You may monitor whether it exceeded.

  From the above, the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) for detecting abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (panel radio wave sensor 62) for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector And an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting occurrence of an abnormal state. In the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. In the case of a radio wave detector, however, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only by detecting an abnormal radio wave once.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 98 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

  In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning port switch / state monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio fraud monitoring process (step S133) On the basis of this, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

  In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to an error state or a security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame is set. The ON data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the body frame opening error are output as external information and a test signal.

  On the other hand, if neither the glass frame opening error nor the body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C71). C75), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

  Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not “0”, the security signal control timer is updated to “−1”. (Step C77). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (Step C78).

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security data ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out.

  Magnet fraud (step C80; Y), panel radio fraud (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud (step C82; Y), ordinary fraud (step C83; Y), or grand prize When the illegal operation is occurring (Step C84; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (Step C85), and the gaming machine error state signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

  On the other hand, if none of the illegal magnets, illegal radio waves in the board, illegal radio waves in the frame, illegal in the ordinary telephone, or illegal in the special winning opening (steps C80 to C84; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is tested. The data is saved in the signal output data area (step C87).

  Next, in the external information editing process, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting port signal editing process for editing a winning signal of the starting port (step C89). Perform Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure change display game is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step C90). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step C91).

  When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step C91; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination number signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step C92) and end the external information editing process. If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C91). C93), the external information editing process ends.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Is output to an external device.

  In the main award ball signal editing process, first, if the main award ball signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is “0” (step C103).

  If the main award ball signal output count is not "0" (step C103; N), the main award ball signal output count is updated to "-1" (step C104), and the main award ball signal output control timer area is set to the main award ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the award ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the ON state (eg, high level) time (eg, 128 ms) and the OFF state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. Time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends. If the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is 0 (step C103; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C103). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether or not the main award ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C106; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C106; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

  Through the above processing, information on the planned number of game medium payouts is transmitted to the outside. After the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to complete the payout of the game ball by operating the payout device. From the establishment of the payout condition to the payout of the number of game media to be paid out, information on the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

  That is, the game control device 100 can output information on the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, after the payout condition is satisfied and before the payout of the number of game media to be paid out. External output means.

  However, if the number of generated prize balls is small and this value is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) even if it is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls area, after the actual payout is completed, information on the scheduled number of game medium payouts May be output. By reducing the unit of the number of game medium payouts corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, to “1”), the payout condition is always satisfied and the payout number of game media is paid out. In the meantime, it is possible to output information on the number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside.

  In view of the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and a control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In the gaming machine including the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out after the payout condition is satisfied and before the payout number of game media is paid out. An external output unit (game control device 100) capable of outputting information on the number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside is provided. Note that it is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine by using a game medium as a medal.

  The external output means (game control device 100) includes a storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of planned game medium payouts which have not been output to the outside, based on establishment of a payout condition. An adding means (game control device 100) for adding the planned game medium payout number corresponding to the established payout condition to the game medium storage area, and the planned game medium payout number stored in the game medium storage area reaches a predetermined number. Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of planned game medium payouts to the outside, and subtracting the predetermined number of planned game medium payouts transmitted by the transmission means from the game medium storage area. Subtraction means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) every time a predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media is to be paid out. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from “OFF” to “ON” when the value of the output control timer is “48”, and “ON” to “OFF” when the value of the output control timer is “16”. And keeps “OFF” until the value of the output control timer becomes “0”. That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a pulse signal of 192 ms including an “ON” time of 128 ms and an “OFF” time of 64 ms.

  The payout control device 200, unlike the game control device 100, outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) every time a predetermined number of game media (for example, 10) are paid out. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the external device confirm the match between the game medium payout schedule and the game medium payout result, and can deal with the illegal payout.

  In addition, in the prize during the jackpot period, when the payout of the game medium is delayed due to lack of ball, etc., and the game medium is paid out after the end of the big hit, the external device, only the prize ball signal output by the payout control device 200, It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on winnings during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs an main prize ball signal so that an external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect (determine) information.

(Start signal edit processing)
Next, details of the opening signal editing process (step C89) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the start-up port signal editing processing according to the first embodiment. The starting port signal editing process is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  In the opening signal editing process, first, if the starting signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C111). Note that the minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the starting port signal output control timer is “0” (Step C112). When the value of the starting port signal output control timer is “0” (Step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of starting port signal outputs is “0” (Step C113).

  If the number of times of starting port signal output is not "0" (step C113; N), the number of times of starting port signal output is updated to "-1" (step C114), and the starting port signal output control timer area outputs the starting port signal output. The control timer initial value is saved (step C115). The initial value of the starting port signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the ON state (eg, high level) and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the OFF state (eg, low level) of the starting port signal (eg, 64 ms). For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the start-up port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start-up port signal editing process ends. If the start port signal output count is “0” (step C113; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C113). C118), the start-up signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting port signal output control timer is not “0” (Step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (Step C116). The starting port signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the starting port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C116; Y), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step C116; N), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), end the start-up signal editing process.

  Next, a variation display mode between the special figure 1 and the ordinary figure will be described with reference to FIGS. As described with reference to FIG. 5, the collective display device 50 has 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31, and configures the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 with eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The general symbol display unit 55 is composed of four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. Therefore, the number of LEDs of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is in a relation larger than the number of LEDs of the ordinary symbol display section 55.

  Here, a display mode of the special figure 1 displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display during a change of the special figure 1 in the state 1 of the first embodiment.

  The special figure 1 includes a lighting pattern and a stop pattern. The lighting pattern is a changing display mode of the special figure 1, and is represented by a lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 in the state 1 include the lighting patterns 1 to 8. The stop pattern is a display mode of the fluctuation result of the special figure 1 and is plural (up to 256 patterns).

  The changing display mode of the special figure 1 is as follows: the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 2, the lighting pattern 3, the lighting pattern 4, the lighting pattern 5, the lighting pattern 6, the lighting pattern 7, and the lighting pattern 8 in order of the update interval every 80 ms. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 in the state 1 is 640 ms (= 80 ms × 8).

  The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 1 is “OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 2 is “OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 3 are “OFF, ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 4 are “ON, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 5 is the same as the lighting pattern 3. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 6 is the same as that of the lighting pattern 2. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 7 is the same as that of the lighting pattern 1. In the lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 8, all of the LED_06 to the LED_13 are “OFF”.

  That is, the changing display mode of the special figure 1 has a lighting mode in which some of the changing displays overlap with other changing displays. For example, the lighting pattern 1 and the lighting pattern 7, the lighting pattern 2 and the lighting pattern 6, and the lighting pattern 3 and the lighting pattern 5 have overlapping lighting modes. On the other hand, the changing display mode of the special figure 1 has a different lighting mode in the changing display that is continuous in time series. For example, the lighting pattern 2 has a different lighting mode from the immediately preceding lighting pattern 1, and the lighting pattern 3 also has a different lighting mode from the immediately following lighting pattern 3.

  In such a display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the right to the left in the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 4 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. . In addition, in the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the left to the right in the lighting pattern 4 to the lighting pattern 7 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. In the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_10 to the LED_13 are changed from the left to the right in the lighting pattern 1 to the light pattern 4 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. In addition, in the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the right to the left in the lighting pattern 4 to the lighting pattern 7 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player. For example, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the stop pattern of the special figure 1 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player in the changing display mode of the special figure 1 as described above, the player may change the display of the special figure 1 during the change. By observing the mode, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53.

  Next, a display mode of a general symbol displayed on the general symbol display unit 55 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display during the change of the general figure in the state 1 of the first embodiment.

  Normally, a lighting pattern and a stop pattern are provided. The lighting pattern is a display mode during a change in ordinary drawing, and is represented by the lighting modes of four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. There are lighting patterns from lighting pattern 1 to lighting pattern 4. The stop pattern is a display mode of the fluctuation result of the ordinary figure, and there are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 16 patterns).

  The display mode during the change of the ordinary figure changes from the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 2, the lighting pattern 3, and the lighting pattern 4 in the order of the update interval of 160 ms. That is, one cycle of the ordinary lighting pattern is 640 ms (= 160 ms × 4).

  The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 1 is “OFF, OFF, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 2 is “OFF, OFF, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 3 is “OFF, ON, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 4 is “ON, OFF, OFF, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27.

  That is, the display mode during the change of the ordinary figure has a lighting mode in which some of the display during the change does not overlap with the other display during the change. Naturally, the changing display mode of the ordinary figure has a different lighting mode in the continuous changing display in time series. For example, the lighting pattern 2 has a different lighting mode from the immediately preceding lighting pattern 1, and the lighting pattern 3 also has a different lighting mode from the immediately following lighting pattern 3.

  In such a display mode in which the general figure is changing, the LED_24 to LED_27 in the lighting pattern 1 to the lighting pattern 4 indicate that the lit LED moves from right to left to indicate that the general figure is changing.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the ordinary symbol display section 55 to the player. For example, the ordinary symbol display unit 55 displays the ordinary symbol stop pattern for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the ordinary symbol display unit 55 from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 specifies the area of the general symbol display unit 55 to the player by the display mode during the change of the general figure as described above, the player observes the display mode during the change of the general figure. By doing so, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the ordinary symbol display section 55.

  Next, the coincidence points and differences between the changing display of the special figure 1 in state 1 and the changing display of the ordinary figure will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram illustrating a comparative example of the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the ordinary figure in state 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the comparative example of the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the ordinary figure, the LED_06 to the LED_13 and the LED_24 to the LED_27 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the lighting modes of the changing LEDs are arranged in the time series in the vertical direction. .

  According to this, the changing display of the special figure 1 can be divided into the first half of LED_06 to LED_09, the second half of LED_06 to LED_09, the first half of LED_10 to LED_13, and the second half of LED_10 to LED_13. These divided special figure 1 changing displays are shown in four ranges surrounded by a chain line. Among them, the first half of LED_06 to LED_09 is a special figure 1 changing display (part) which can be compared with the changing display of the ordinary figure.

  In addition, the changing display of the ordinary figure is different from the changing display of the special figure 1 in update timing, but the changing display of the LED_24 and the LED_27 is the same as the first half of the LED_06 to the LED_09. The display during normal figure fluctuation is shown in one range surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

  In other words, the normal-floating display and the special figure 1 fluctuating display (part) have a common fluctuating display (specific fluctuating display). In other words, in other words, the changing display of the ordinary figure is entirely constituted by the specific changing display, and the changing display of the special figure 1 is partially constituted by the specific changing display. With such a configuration, it is easy for the player to compare and contrast the display while the ordinary figure is changing and the display while the special figure 1 is changing (partly).

  At this time, since the update timing of the special figure 1 is different from that of the ordinary figure (80 ms for the special figure 1 and 160 ms for the ordinary figure), the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate to the player that the symbols are different symbols. Further, since the update cycle of Toku-zu 1 matches the update cycle of Toku-zu (both 640 ms), the gaming machine 10 sets the range of one cycle of the lighting pattern of Toku-zu to the range of 1 cycle of lighting pattern of Toku-zu 1 Can be clearly indicated to the player. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can realize the distinction between the special figure 1 and the general figure by changing the number of LEDs and the update interval between the special figure 1 and the general figure.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can not only help the player understand the progress of the game by clearly indicating the special figure 1 and the ordinary figure, but also improve the visibility when the player confirms the progress of the game. improves. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the display mode of the batch display device 50 that tends to be cluttered orderly, and can improve the aesthetic appearance and design of the gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes the display mode of the collective display device 50 orderly, and thus reduces the fatigue when the player checks the progress of the game.

Next, the changing display of the special figure 1 in the state 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display during the change of the special figure 1 in the state 2 of the first embodiment.
The lighting patterns of the special figure 1 in the state 2 include a lighting pattern 11 to a lighting pattern 18. There are multiple (up to 256) stop patterns.

  The changing display mode of the special figure 1 is as follows: the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 12, the lighting pattern 13, the lighting pattern 14, the lighting pattern 15, the lighting pattern 16, the lighting pattern 17, and the lighting pattern 18 in the order of the update interval every 60 ms. Transition with. That is, one cycle of the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 in the state 2 is 480 ms (= 60 ms × 8).

  The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 11 is “ON, ON, ON, OFF, OFF, ON, ON, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 12 are “ON, ON, OFF, ON, ON, OFF, ON, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting modes of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 13 are “ON, OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 14 is “OFF, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_06 to LED_13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 15 is the same as the lighting pattern 13. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 16 is the same as the lighting pattern 12. The lighting mode of the LED in the lighting pattern 17 is the same as the lighting pattern 11. In the lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 18, all of the LEDs_06 to LED_13 are "ON".

  That is, the changing display mode of the special figure 1 in the state 2 differs from the changing display mode of the special figure 1 in the state 1 in the lighting mode of the LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can display the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 instead of or in addition to the state display section 57.

  In such a changing display mode of the special figure 2, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14 so that the LED to be turned off moves from right to left to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. . In addition, in the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the left to the right in the lighting pattern 14 to the lighting pattern 17 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. In the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_10 to the LED_13 are changed from the left to the right in the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing. In addition, in the display mode of the special figure 1 during the change, the LED_06 to the LED_09 are changed from the right to the left in the lighting pattern 14 to the lighting pattern 17 to notify that the special figure 1 is changing.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player even in the state 2. For example, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the stop pattern of the special figure 1 for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 to the player in the changing display mode of the special figure 1 as described above, the player may change the display of the special figure 1 during the change. By observing the mode, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53.

  In the first embodiment, the lighting mode of the changing LED in the special figure 1 and the update timing of the lighting pattern are different so that the state 1 and the state 2 are clearly distinguishable from each other. The state 1 and the state 2 may be clearly distinguishable by one of the lighting mode of the middle LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern.

  Next, a display mode of a general symbol in a state 2 displayed on the general symbol display unit 55 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display during the change of the general figure in the state 2 of the first embodiment.

The lighting patterns of the ordinary figure in the state 2 include the lighting patterns 11 to 14. There are a plurality of stop patterns (up to 16 patterns).
The display mode during the change of the general figure in the state 2 changes from the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 12, the lighting pattern 13, and the lighting pattern 14 in the order of the update interval of 120 ms. That is, one cycle of the ordinary lighting pattern is 480 ms (= 120 ms × 4).

  The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 11 is “ON, ON, ON, OFF” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 12 is “ON, ON, OFF, ON” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 13 is “ON, OFF, ON, ON” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27. The lighting mode of the LEDs in the lighting pattern 14 is “OFF, ON, ON, ON” in the order of LED_24 to LED_27.

  That is, the display mode of the general figure in the state 2 during the change is different from the display mode of the general figure in the state 1 during the change in the lighting mode of the LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can display the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 on the general symbol display section 55 instead of or in addition to the state display section 57.

  In such a display mode during the change of the general figure, the LED_24 to LED_27 in the lighting pattern 11 to the lighting pattern 14 indicate that the LED to be turned off moves from right to left to notify that the general figure is changing.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the area of the ordinary symbol display section 55 to the player. For example, the ordinary symbol display unit 55 displays the ordinary symbol stop pattern for 600 ms, but it is not easy for the player to grasp the area of the ordinary symbol display unit 55 from the stop pattern. However, since the gaming machine 10 specifies the area of the general symbol display unit 55 to the player by the display mode during the change of the general figure as described above, the player observes the display mode during the change of the general figure. By doing so, it is easy to grasp the stop pattern in the area of the ordinary symbol display section 55.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, the lighting mode of the LED and the lighting pattern update timing during the fluctuation of the general figure are different so that the state 1 and the state 2 are clearly distinguishable. The state 1 and the state 2 may be clearly distinguishable from each other by one of the lighting mode of the LED and the update timing of the lighting pattern.

[Modification of First Embodiment]
Next, the points of coincidence and difference between the changing display of the special figure 1 and the changing display of the ordinary figure in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating a comparative example of the display during change (variation example) of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment and the display during change (modification example) of the ordinary figure.

  The collective display device 50 of the modification of the first embodiment is different from the collective display device 50 of the first embodiment in that the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is configured by two LEDs, LED_06 and LED_07, The single symbol display unit 55 is constituted by one LED. Therefore, also in the modification of the first embodiment, the number of LEDs in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is in a relation larger than the number of LEDs in the ordinary symbol display section 55.

  In the comparative example of the changing display (modification) of the special figure 1 and the changing display (modification) of the ordinary figure, LED_06, LED_07, and LED_24 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the lighting mode of each changing LED is time-series. Are arranged vertically.

  According to this, the changing display (variation example) of the special figure 1 can be divided into a changing display of LED_06 and a changing display of LED_07. These divided special figure 1 changing displays are shown in two ranges surrounded by a dashed line. Of these, the changing display of LED_06 is the special figure 1 changing display (part) that can be compared with the changing display of the ordinary figure.

  Further, the display during the change of LED_24 is the same as the display during the change of LED_06, and the update timing of the display during the change is the same (for example, the display during the change is updated every 128 ms). The display during normal figure fluctuation is shown in one range surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

  In other words, the normal-floating display and the special figure 1 fluctuating display (part) have a common fluctuating display (specific fluctuating display). In other words, in other words, the changing display of the ordinary figure is entirely constituted by the specific changing display, and the changing display of the special figure 1 is partially constituted by the specific changing display. With such a configuration, it is easy for the player to compare and contrast the display while the ordinary figure is changing and the display while the special figure 1 is changing (partly). As described above, even when the number of the LEDs in the special figure 1 is two and the number of the LEDs in the general figure is one, the display during the change of the general figure and the display during the change of the special figure 1 (partly) are performed. Can be used to set a common variable display.

  It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 improves the visibility of the player when confirming the progress of the game by setting the common changing display of the special figure 1 and the ordinary figure. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make the display mode of the batch display device 50 that tends to be cluttered orderly, and can improve the aesthetic appearance and design of the gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes the display mode of the collective display device 50 orderly, and thus reduces the fatigue when the player checks the progress of the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a collective display device 50 on the front side. The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (first variable display game display section) and a general symbol display section 55 (second variable display game display section). The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays eight lighting patterns (displaying the result being derived) and stop patterns (displaying the result) of the first special figure variable display game (first variable display game) (first number). ) LED (indicating light). In addition, the general symbol display unit 55 displays the display during the derivation of the result of the general symbol change display game (the second change display game) and the result display, the lighting pattern display (the result derivation display) and the stop pattern display (the result display). Are displayed by four (second number) LEDs (indicating lights).

  Note that the combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is not limited to the first special figure variable display game and the general figure variable display game. For example, the combination of the first variable display game and the second variable display game may be a first special figure variable display game and a second special figure variable display game, a second special figure variable display game and a general figure variable display game, or other combinations. A combination of variable display games may be used.

  (2) The first variable display game display unit updates the display mode of the display during the derivation of the result of the first variable display game (display during change) at the first update interval (for example, 80 ms), and performs the second variable display. The game display unit updates the display mode of the display during derivation of the result of the second variable display game at a second update interval (for example, 160 ms) different from the first update interval.

  (3) The first variable display game display unit sequentially updates the display of the first variable display game during the derivation of the result by a third number (for example, 8 patterns), and the second variable display game display unit The display mode during the result derivation of the second variable display game is sequentially updated with a fourth number (for example, four patterns) different from the third number.

(4) One cycle of updating the display mode of the first variable display game is the same as one cycle of updating the display mode of the second variable display game.
(5) The display during deriving the result of the first variable display game and the display during deriving the result of the second variable display game include a common variable display.

(6) The display during the derivation of the result of the first variable display game and the display during the derivation of the result of the second variable display game are in such a relationship that any one of the display during the change includes the other display during the change.
[Second embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 shown in the second embodiment has two sets of decorative designs. First, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen during variable display on the display device according to the second embodiment.

  The variable display screen 600 is the display content of the display device 41. The variable display screen 600 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 reserved number display 603, a special figure 2 reserved number display 604, a reserved display 605, and a reserved use display 606.

  The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 601 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 602 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 601 is in charge of a game effect for the purpose of enhancing interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is largely displayed at a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 601 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the large symbol group 601 on the variable display screen 600 indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

  The small symbol group 602 is in charge of notification of a variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is displayed small on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to secure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. The small symbol group 602 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 on the variable display screen 600 each indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

  In general, the large symbol group 601 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 602, has a higher degree of freedom in the display position, and the display mode can be greatly changed. Conversely, the small symbol group 602 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 601 and has a lower degree of freedom in display position (for example, fixed position).

  The special figure 1 reservation number display 603 displays the reservation storage number (starting storage number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 reserved number display 604 displays the reserved number of special figure 2 games. The hold display 605 can clearly indicate the number of storages of the special figure change display game by the display mode, and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each storage storage. The number of held storages displayed by the hold display 605 corresponds to the sum of the number of held storages displayed by the special figure 1 held number display 603 and the number of held storages displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 604. The reserved digest display 606 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

  In addition, the small symbol group 602, the special figure 1 reserved number display 603, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 604 are positions where the player does not enter the blind spot of the player even by the operation of the board effect device 44 or the game ball rolling on the front side. At any time, and always shows the variable display state and the number of stored memories to the player.

  In the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 are each composed of three digits, but may be any number as long as it includes one or more symbols. The gaming machine 10 has the same number of digits for the symbols in the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602, but differs in the number of digits for the symbol in the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602. Is also good.

  Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, changes the transparency from 0% to 50%), Regarding the small symbol group 602, the transparency of the symbol can be fixed (for example, the transparency is fixed to 0%). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 602 while securing the variety of display effects with respect to the large symbol group 601 and can easily grasp the gaming state of the player.

  Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the hue of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 (for example, change from red to blue) during the variable display and during the stop display, or during the variable display, but may change the small symbol group. For 602, the hue of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to red). Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the saturation of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 (for example, from 100% to 0%) during the variable display and during the stop display or during the variable display. Also, it is possible to fix the saturation of the symbol for the small symbol group 602 (for example, to fix the saturation to 100%). Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the brightness of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and during the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, the brightness is changed from 100% to 10%), For the small symbol group 602, the brightness of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%). Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the size of the symbols of the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change the size from the standard size to the enlarged (reduced) size). Even if there is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 602. The gaming machine 10 may change the display position of the symbols in the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, from the center of the screen to the upper left of the screen). The display position of the symbols in the small symbol group 602 can be fixed (for example, fixed to the lower right of the screen). Also, the gaming machine 10 can change the design of the large symbol group 601 (for example, from a rectangle to a circle, or from a number to a character) during the variable display, during the stop display, or during the variable display. Even if there is, the design of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to a number) for the small symbol group 602. Further, even when the gaming machine 10 may change the symbol variable display mode for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display (for example, change from vertical scroll to horizontal scroll), the symbol variable display mode for the small symbol group 602 may be used. Can be fixed (for example, fixed to shaft rotation fluctuation).

  These also allow the gaming machine 10 to secure the visibility of the small symbol group 602 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 601 and facilitate the player's understanding of the gaming state.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the variation mode during the variable display for the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602. For example, when the vertical scroll is performed on the large symbol group 601, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish the large symbol group 601 from the small symbol group 602. Further, even when the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 update symbols asynchronously, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

Next, the symbol arrangement of the small symbol group 602 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol array of a small symbol group according to the second embodiment.
The small symbol group 602 is composed of a three-digit symbol of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, and each symbol includes seven symbols. The symbols to be arranged are represented by numbers corresponding to each arrangement. For example, the left symbol of the array "1" is a symbol of the number "1", and the left symbol of the array "2" is a symbol of the number "2". Also, the arranged symbols are given a predetermined color according to the value of the symbols. For example, the symbol "1" and the symbol "5" are green symbols, the symbol "2", the symbol "4" and the symbol "6" are blue symbols, and the symbol "3" The symbol “7” is a red symbol. For example, the symbol group shown in red is the most valuable symbol composed of probable symbols, and the symbol group shown in blue is the second most valuable symbol composed of time saving symbols. Yes, the symbol group shown in green is a symbol that is usually composed of symbols and has a relatively low value. In the small symbol group 602, the symbols arranged may have the same color.

Next, the symbol arrangement of the large symbol group 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol array of a large symbol group according to the second embodiment.
The large symbol group 601 is composed of a three-digit symbol of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, and each symbol includes seven symbols (standard symbols). The standard design is represented by chamfered square frames and numbers in the square frames corresponding to each array. For example, the left symbol of the array "1" is a symbol including the number "1" in the square frame, and the left symbol of the array "2" is a symbol including the number "2" in the square frame. The symbols arranged may have a predetermined color according to the value of the symbols. For example, the symbol "1" and the symbol "5" are green symbols, the symbol "2", the symbol "4" and the symbol "6" are blue symbols, and the symbol "3" The symbol “7” is a red symbol.

  In addition, the large symbol group 601 can include a special symbol separately from the standard symbol. In the large symbol group 601, if a symbol array consisting of only standard symbols is a standard symbol array, a symbol array obtained by adding a special symbol to the standard symbol can be a special symbol array. The large symbol group 601 can switch the standard time symbol array to the special time symbol array, for example, upon notification of a predetermined effect or a predetermined result. Note that the special time symbol array includes one or more special symbols, and the number is not limited to one. In addition, the special time symbol array is not limited to the symbol array in which the exclusive symbol is added to the standard symbol, and one or more symbols among the standard symbols may be replaced with the exclusive symbol.

  For example, in the large symbol group 601, the special time symbol arrangement may be seven standard symbols and one exclusive symbol, seven standard symbols and two exclusive symbols, or six standard symbols and one exclusive symbol. A design may be used, or seven exclusive designs may be used instead of all the standard designs.

  The exclusive symbol is a display mode that can be distinguished from the standard symbol, and is represented by, for example, a chamfered square frame and characters and figures in the square frame. The special symbol includes, for example, “tiger”, “pig”, and “lion” as characters for notifying transition to a predetermined game state in the variable display game. At this time, “tiger” reports the transition to the tiger (tiger) mode (for example, latent probability change), “pig” reports the transition to the pig (pig) mode (for example, gendai support), and “lion” represents the lion. Notify the transition to the (lion) mode (for example, probability fluctuation). In addition, the special symbol may include, for example, “tiger”, “pig”, and “lion” as characters for notifying a predetermined effect in the variable display game. At this time, "tiger" foretells the production with a character like a tiger (tiger), "pig" foretells the production with a character like a pig (pig), and "lion" gives a lion (lion) A performance in which a character like appears.

  In addition, the special symbol is, for example, “?”, “!”, “!!!!”, “chance”, “hot”, or “character” for reporting the reliability of the result (for example, big hit) derived by the variable display game. Sure. " At this time, "?" Reports the jackpot reliability "1%", "!" Reports the jackpot reliability "10%", and "!!" reports the jackpot reliability "20%". , “Chance” reports the reliability of the jackpot “30%”, “Heat Heat” reports the reliability of the jackpot “90%”, and “Probable” reports the reliability of the jackpot “100%”. Further, the special symbol includes, for example, “development” and “continuation” as characters for notifying the progress in the variable display game. At this time, "development" reports the development to super reach, and "continuation" reports the continuation of the pseudo-ream. In addition, the special symbol includes, for example, “hit”, “this 5R”, “this 16R”, “time saving”, and “probable change” as characters that notify the value of the result (hit) derived by the variable display game. At this time, the "hit" reports the hit itself without specifying the magnitude of the value, "5R" reports that the 5R round has been hit, and "this 16R" has the 16R round hit. Informing, "time saving" informs that the hit is accompanied by a time saving (generic power support), and "probable change" informs that the hit is accompanied by a probability change.

  The special symbol includes, for example, "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" as characters for notifying a mode change in the display effect. At this time, “mode A” reports the transition to mode A, “mode B” reports the transition to mode B, and “mode C” reports the transition to mode C. In addition, the special symbol includes, for example, “last 10 times” as a character that reports the number of continuations of a predetermined game state such as a general-purpose support or a probability change. At this time, “last 10 times” indicates that the number of times the probability fluctuation is continued is remaining 10 times. In addition, the special symbol includes, for example, “press!” As characters for notifying the game guidance. At this time, “press!” Notifies the reception timing of the pressing operation of the push button (option setting unit 25).

  Here, the option setting unit 25 described with reference to FIG. 1 will be described again. The option setting unit 25 includes a plurality of (for example, eight) LEDs (push button LEDs), a plurality of (for example, eight) touch sensors, and a push button SW. Each push button LED is a full color LED. The touch sensor can detect a player's touch operation. The push button SW can detect a pressing operation of the option setting unit 25. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of a detection signal of the touch sensor and a detection signal of the push button SW. For example, a state in which the touch sensor detects a touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and a state in which the push button SW detects a pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to an ON state of the selection button switch 25a. The state where the touch sensor detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. Hereinafter, the option setting unit 25 may be referred to as a push button or a PB (Push Button).

  Next, display effects of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect flow according to the second embodiment. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 5) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment.

  [Direction Flow F90] The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols before the start of the change in the change display game. Screen 610 shown in FIG. 112 (F90) shows a state where large symbol group 601 and small symbol group 602 are stopped and displayed. At this time, the reserved digest display 606 indicates by blank display that the special figure variable display game is not in the variable display state. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F91.

  [Production Flow F91] The gaming machine 10 starts the variable display. A screen 611 shown in FIG. 112 (F91) indicates that the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 have started the variable display. At this time, the special figure 2 reserved number display 604 reduces and displays the reserved figure of the special figure 2 game by one, and the reserved display 605 reduces the reserved storage number of the special figure change display game by one. I do. The reserved digest display 606 indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F92 when the reach does not occur, and proceeds to the effect flow F94 when the reach occurs.

  [Effect Flow F92] The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the symbols before the fluctuation stops. The screen 612 shown in FIG. 112 (F92) shows a state in which the large symbol group 601 swings up and down and is temporarily stopped. At this time, the small symbol group 602 shows a state where the small symbol group 602 fluctuates and displays at a uniform speed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate by the small symbol group 602 that the game machine 10 is not yet in the state of fluctuation stop. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F93 when the symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  [Production Flow F93] The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbol. A screen 613 shown in FIG. 112 (F93) shows a state in which the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 stop changing display, and the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 are stopped. At this time, the reserved digest display 606 indicates by blank display that the special figure variable display game is not in the variable display state. Thereby, even if the difference between the temporary stop display and the stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 is ambiguous, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate whether or not the large symbol group 601 is in the stopped state by the small symbol group 602. That is, the small symbol group 602 has a function as a guide display for guiding the variable display state of the large symbol group 601.

  It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 can also check whether or not it is in the state of fluctuation stop by the collective display device 50 or the like. However, in this case, the gaming machine 10 has to force the player to move a large line of sight, and there is a possibility that the effect display may be missed by the player on the display device 41 and the effect of the effect may be reduced. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 can display the small symbol group 602 on the same display device 41 as the large symbol group 601, so that an environment where the player can concentrate on the effect display performed on the display device 41 can be provided.

  In the gaming machine 10, the result derivation mode of the large symbol group 601 and the result derivation mode of the small symbol group 602 are all matched as the left symbol “3”, the middle symbol “6”, and the right symbol “4”. Alternatively, the result deriving mode of the large symbol group 601 may be different from the result deriving mode of the small symbol group 602. For example, the gaming machine 10 sets the result derivation mode of the large symbol group 601 to the left symbol “3”, the middle symbol “6”, the right symbol “4”, and the result derivation mode of the small symbol group 602 to the left symbol “3”. The middle symbol “5” and the right symbol “7” may be used.

  [Production Flow F94] The gaming machine 10 displays symbols in the reach state. A screen 614 shown in FIG. 113 (F94) shows the left and right symbols of the large symbol group 601 swinging up and down to temporarily stop and display the reach state in which the middle symbol is changing. At this time, the small symbol group 602 shows a state where the small symbol group 602 fluctuates and displays at a uniform speed. The screen 614 also indicates the occurrence of the reach by the guidance display 615. When the gaming machine 10 develops into a battle effect after the occurrence of the reach, the process proceeds to the effect flow F95.

  [Effect Flow F95] The gaming machine 10 displays a battle effect. The screen 616 shown in FIG. 113 (F95) displays the battle effect guidance display 617 and characters 618 and 619 without displaying the large symbol group 601. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 informs the player of the start of the battle effect in which the character 618 and the character 619 compete. At this time, the gaming machine 10 improves the effect of the battle effect by hiding the large symbol group 601. In addition, the gaming machine 10 clearly displays that the small symbol group 602 is being changed and displayed without depending on the large symbol group 601 by displaying the small symbol group 602 at a uniform speed. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F96 when the result of the battle effect is lost, proceeds to the effect flow F98 when the result of the battle effect is won, and proceeds to the effect flow F102 when the result of the battle effect is a draw.

  [Production Flow F96] The gaming machine 10 displays the result of losing in the battle production. The screen 620 shown in FIG. 113 (F96) hides the large symbol group 601 and displays characters 618 and 619, a battle effect result guide display 621, a battle display 622, and words 623 and 624. The characters 618 and 619, the battle effect result guidance display 621, the battle display 622, and the words 623 and 624 guide the result of losing in the battle effect according to the display mode. At this time, the gaming machine 10 improves the effect of the battle effect by hiding the large symbol group 601. In addition, the gaming machine 10 clearly displays that the small symbol group 602 is being changed and displayed without depending on the large symbol group 601 by displaying the small symbol group 602 at a uniform speed. For example, the gaming machine 10 can produce a sense of expectation of a reversal effect with respect to the result of the battle effect by guiding the small symbol group 602 during the variable display. When the gaming machine 10 guides the result of losing in the battle effect, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F97.

  [Effect Flow F97] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation display result. On the screen 625 shown in FIG. 113 (F97), the large symbol group 601 swings up and down temporarily in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the small symbol group 602 is stopped in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss. Shows the status of Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can indicate by the small symbol group 602 that the fluctuation display result has been determined, while producing in a period in which the expectation of the re-variation of the large symbol group 601 is maximized. The gaming machine 10 may show a state in which the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 are stopped and displayed as shown in the effect flow F93. Further, the gaming machine 10 may selectively (for example, according to the reliability) display the stopped state shown in the effect flow F97 and the stopped state shown in the effect flow F93.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 may proceed to the effect flow F91 via the effect flow F90, or may proceed to the effect flow F91 without passing through the effect flow F90.
Also, the gaming machine 10 fluctuates and displays the small symbol group 602 at a uniform speed while the large symbol group 601 swings up and down temporarily and displays in the effect flow F97 in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss. After that, the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 may be stopped and displayed.

  [Production Flow F98] The gaming machine 10 displays the result of winning in the battle production. On a screen 626 shown in FIG. 114 (F98), the large symbol group 601 is not displayed, and characters 618 and 619, lines 623 and 624, a battle effect result guide display 627, and a battle display 628 are displayed. The characters 618 and 619, the lines 623 and 624, the battle effect result guide display 627, and the battle display 628 guide the result of the battle effect according to the display mode. At this time, the gaming machine 10 improves the effect of the battle effect by hiding the large symbol group 601. In addition, the gaming machine 10 clearly displays that the small symbol group 602 is being changed and displayed without depending on the large symbol group 601 by displaying the small symbol group 602 at a uniform speed. When the gaming machine 10 guides the result of the battle effect, the process proceeds to the effect flow F99.

  [Effect flow F99] The gaming machine 10 displays the fluctuation display result. On a screen 629 shown in FIG. 114 (F99), the large symbol group 601 swings up and down temporarily in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit, and temporarily stops and is displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a small symbol group 602. Shows the status of Thus, the gaming machine 10 can indicate by the small symbol group 602 that the fluctuation display result has been determined, while producing the expectation of the re-variation of the large symbol group 601 in the maximum period. The gaming machine 10 may show a state in which the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 are stopped and displayed as shown in the effect flow F93.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 may not stop and display the small symbol group 602 while the large symbol group 601 is temporarily stopped. When the small symbol group 602 is not stopped and displayed while the large symbol group 601 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the gaming machine 10 proceeds from the effect flow F98 to the effect flow F100.

  [Effect Flow F100] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation display result. The screen 630 shown in FIG. 114 (F100) shows a state where the large symbol group 601 swings up and down in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit and is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbol group 602 shows a state where the small symbol group 602 fluctuates and displays at a uniform speed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate by the small symbol group 602 that the game machine 10 is not yet in the state of fluctuation stop. When the gaming machine 10 stops changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F101.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may perform the variable display of the small symbol group 602 with the symbols aligned after displaying the result of the battle effect as shown in the effect flow F98. For example, after displaying the result of winning in the battle effect, the gaming machine 10 displays the small symbol group 602 as “1 (left symbol), 1 (middle symbol), 1 (right symbol)”, “2, 2, 2”. , "3, 3, 3",... Are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may improve the visibility by lowering the fluctuation speed than when the fluctuation display is performed at a uniform speed.

  [Production Flow F101] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation display result. A screen 631 shown in FIG. 114 (F101) shows a state where the large symbol group 601 is not displayed and the small symbol group 602 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit. Further, the screen 631 displays a fluctuation display result guide display 632 and a character 633. As a result, the gaming machine 10 determines the fluctuation display result by the small symbol group 602, the fluctuation display result guide display 632, and the character 633 while producing a period in which the expectation of the re- fluctuation of the large symbol group 601 is maximized. Can be shown.

  The gaming machine 10 may hide the special figure 1 reserved number display and the special figure 2 reserved number display on the screen 631. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 displays the special figure 1 hold number display and the special figure 2 hold number display when the small symbol group 602 is being displayed in a variable manner, and when the small symbol group 602 is in a stop display state. The display of the number of reservations in FIG. 1 and the display of the number of reservations in special figure 2 can be hidden. Note that the gaming machine 10 does not display the special figure 1 reserved number display and the special figure 2 reserved number display in which the small symbol group 602 is stopped and displayed only when a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit or the like) is derived. It may be.

  [Effect Flow F102] The gaming machine 10 displays the result of the draw in the battle effect. The screen 634 shown in FIG. 115 (F102) displays the characters 618 and 619, the lines 623 and 624, the battle effect result guide display 635, and the battle display 636 without displaying the large symbol group 601. The characters 618 and 619, the lines 623 and 624, the battle effect result guide display 635, and the battle display 636 guide the result of the draw in the battle effect according to the display mode. At this time, the gaming machine 10 improves the effect of the battle effect by hiding the large symbol group 601. In addition, the gaming machine 10 clearly displays that the small symbol group 602 is being changed and displayed without depending on the large symbol group 601 by displaying the small symbol group 602 at a uniform speed. When the gaming machine 10 guides the result of the draw in the battle effect, the process proceeds to the effect flow F103.

  [Production Flow F103] The gaming machine 10 displays a temporary stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol 638. A screen 637 shown in FIG. 115 (F103) shows a state in which the large symbol group 601 swings up and down in a symbol combination mode including a dedicated symbol 638 (dedicated symbol “tiger”) and is temporarily stopped. At this time, the small symbol group 602 shows a state where the small symbol group 602 fluctuates and displays at a uniform speed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can provide guidance on the game progress, the game result, and the like during the variable display with the special symbol 638. After displaying the temporary symbol display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol 638, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F104.

  [Production Flow F104] The gaming machine 10 displays a game result guided by the exclusive symbol. A screen 639 shown in FIG. 115 (F104) shows a state in which the large symbol group 601 is not displayed, and the small symbol group 602 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a tiger mode (for example, latent probability change) entry. . The screen 639 also displays a game result guide display 640 and a mode-specific background display 641. As a result, the gaming machine 10 displays the fluctuation display result by the small symbol group 602, the game result guide display 640, and the mode-specific background display 641, while producing the expectation of the re-variation of the large symbol group 601 in the maximum period. Is determined.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may hide the special figure 1 reserved number display and the special figure 2 reserved number display on the screen 639. Note that the gaming machine 10 does not display the special figure 1 reserved number display and the special figure 2 reserved number display during which the small symbol group 602 is stopped and displayed only when deriving a specific game state (for example, latent probability change). It may be displayed.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can guide the symbol combination mode of the small symbol group 602 by the exclusive symbol. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can employ a symbol combination that is not easily understood by the player (for example, a symbol combination that is not three-digit aligned) as the symbol combination mode of the small symbol group 602 corresponding to the tiger mode entry. it can. Such a gaming machine 10 does not need to make the symbol arrangement of the small symbol group 602 excessively large in order to prepare an easily understandable symbol combination. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can easily configure the symbol arrangement of the small symbol group 602.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F103 when guiding the result of the battle effect in the effect flow F102, but may proceed to an option different from the effect flow F103. For example, after the effect flow F102, the gaming machine 10 may proceed to the effect flow F105, the effect flow F106, the effect flow F107, and the effect flow F108.

  [Production Flow F105] The gaming machine 10 displays a temporary stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol. A screen 642 shown in FIG. 116 (F105) shows a state in which the large symbol group 601 swings up and down in a symbol combination mode including the exclusive symbol 643 and is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the small symbol group 602 shows a state where the small symbol group 602 fluctuates and displays at a uniform speed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can provide guidance of the development reach by the “development” indicated by the special symbol 643. After displaying the temporary stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to an unillustrated effect flow corresponding to the development reach.

  [Production Flow F106] The gaming machine 10 displays a temporary stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol. The screen 644 shown in FIG. 116 (F106) shows a state in which the large symbol group 601 swings up and down in a symbol combination mode including the exclusive symbol 645 and is temporarily stopped. At this time, the small symbol group 602 shows a state where the small symbol group 602 fluctuates and displays at a uniform speed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide guidance for a 16-round big hit with “this 16R” indicated by the special symbol 645. After displaying the temporary stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow corresponding to the big hit (for example, effect flow F101).

  [Production Flow F107] The gaming machine 10 displays a temporary stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol. A screen 646 shown in FIG. 116 (F107) shows a state in which the large symbol group 601 swings up and down in a symbol combination mode including exclusive symbols 647 and 648 and is temporarily stopped. At this time, the small symbol group 602 shows a state where the small symbol group 602 fluctuates and displays at a uniform speed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can provide guidance of the degree of reliability by the "hot heat" indicated by the special symbol 647. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can guide the operation of the push button 25 by “press!” Indicated by the special symbol 648. After displaying the temporary stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to an unillustrated effect flow corresponding to the reach progress.

  [Production Flow F108] The gaming machine 10 displays a temporary stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol. A screen 649 shown in FIG. 116 (F108) shows a state in which the large symbol group 601 swings up and down in a symbol combination mode including the exclusive symbol 650 and is temporarily stopped. At this time, the small symbol group 602 shows a state where the small symbol group 602 fluctuates and displays at a uniform speed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can provide guidance of development reach by “development” indicated by the special symbol 650. After displaying the temporary stop display mode of the large symbol group 601 including the exclusive symbol, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to an unillustrated effect flow corresponding to the development reach.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can replace one or more symbols (standard symbols) included in the large symbol group 601 with the exclusive symbols. For example, the gaming machine 10 can replace any one of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol included in the large symbol group 601 with a special symbol. The gaming machine 10 can replace any two of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol included in the large symbol group 601 with the exclusive symbol. Further, the gaming machine 10 can replace all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol included in the large symbol group 601 with the exclusive symbol. The gaming machine 10 can provide more detailed game guidance by including two or more special symbols in the large symbol group 601.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 replaces the left symbol and the middle symbol included in the large symbol group 601 with one exclusive symbol, replaces the middle symbol and the right symbol with one exclusive symbol, or changes the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. The symbol can be replaced with one exclusive symbol.

  Next, the symbol replacement timing in the variable display of the small symbol group 602 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating symbol replacement timing in the variable display of the small symbol group according to the second embodiment.

  The game control device 100 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 on the collective display device 50, and fluctuates to the effect control device 300 in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 performed on the collective display device 50. Send commands related to display. The effect control device 300 receives the command related to the variable display from the game control device 100 and performs the variable display of the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602.

  The timing chart TC1 shows a state in which the game control device 100 performs the fluctuation display of the time T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t16 on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and displays the stop of the time T5 from the timing t16 to the timing t17.

  In the timing chart TC2, the effect control device 300 displays the synchronous fluctuation display of the time T2 from the timing t11 to the timing t12 for the small symbol group 602, performs the asynchronous fluctuation display of the time T3 from the timing t12 to the timing t16, and displays the asynchronous fluctuation of the time T3 from the timing t16 to the timing t17. The state in which the stop display of the time T5 is performed until the time is shown.

  In the timing chart TC3, the effect control device 300 displays the synchronous fluctuation display of the time T2 from the timing t11 to the timing t12 for the large symbol group 601, performs the asynchronous fluctuation display of the time T3 from the timing t12 to the timing t16, and displays the asynchronous fluctuation display of the time T3 from the timing t16 to the timing t17. The state in which the stop display of the time T5 is performed until the time is shown. In the asynchronous variable display of the large symbol group 601, for example, the variable display mode (including the variable speed) differs from the timing t12 to the timing t13, the timing t13 to the timing t14, and the timing t14 to the timing t15, and the display effect is improved. ing. In addition, in the asynchronous fluctuation display of the large symbol group 601, a temporary stop display is performed for a time T <b> 4 from timing t <b> 15 to timing t <b> 16, thereby improving expectation for the stop symbol.

  Note that the synchronous fluctuation display of the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601 is a period in which the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601 synchronously perform the fluctuation display. Performing the variable display in synchronization with the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601 means a variable display having a correspondence relationship between the symbol displayed by the small symbol group 602 and the symbol displayed by the large symbol group 601. . In addition, the fluctuation display performed by the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601 in synchronization has the same fluctuation speed.

  In addition, the asynchronous fluctuation display of the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601 is a period in which the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601 perform the fluctuation display without synchronization. Performing the variable display without synchronizing the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601 means that the symbol displayed by the small symbol group 602 and the symbol displayed by the large symbol group 601 do not correspond to each other. is there. Further, in the fluctuation display performed by the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601 without synchronization, the respective fluctuation speeds do not always match.

  When switching from the synchronous variation display to the asynchronous variation display of the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601, the effect control device 300 replaces each symbol at, for example, a timing t12. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 reduces the sense of incongruity due to the difference in the display mode between the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601 at the start of the fluctuation, and the degree of freedom of the display effect of the large symbol group 601 during the fluctuation display and the small symbol. The game state of the group 602 can be easily understood. In addition, the effect control device 300 can prevent the small symbol group 602 from continuing to perform the variable display while maintaining the symbol combination that is the reach or the symbol combination that is the big hit. Further, the effect control device 300 can perform the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern or the stop symbol for the large symbol group 601.

  Further, when the small symbol group 602 is stopped and displayed, the effect control device 300 replaces each symbol at, for example, a timing t16. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can simplify the fluctuation control (for example, uniform fluctuation) during the fluctuation display of the small symbol group 602.

  Note that the effect control device 300 can set the timing at which the stop symbol command is received from the game control device 100 as the timing t11. Since the game control device 100 transmits the stop symbol command, the variation pattern command, and the hold command as a series of commands, the timing at which the effect control device 300 receives the variation pattern command and the hold command may be set as the timing t11.

  In addition, since the game control device 100 transmits the stop symbol command, the variation pattern command, and the hold command as a series of commands, the production control device 300 sets the timing at which some of the series of commands is received as the timing t11. Is also good. For example, effect control device 300 can set the timing at which the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command are received as timing t11.

  Further, the effect control device 300 can set the timing at which the stop command is received from the game control device 100 as the timing t16. Further, effect control device 300 may set the timing specified from the fluctuation pattern command as timing t16.

  Next, the stop display timing of the small symbol group 602 and the temporary stop display timing of the large symbol group 601 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating the temporary stop timing in the variable display of the large symbol group according to the second embodiment.

  The stop display timing of the small symbol group 602 shown in the timing chart TC2 is as shown in FIG. Temporary stop display timings of the large symbol group 601 corresponding to the stop display timings of the small symbol group 602 are shown from the timing chart TC31 to the timing chart TC35. The temporary stop display timing of the large symbol group 601 indicated by the timing chart TC31 is as shown in FIG.

  The timing chart TC31 shows a state where the large symbol group 601 is set to the temporary stop display from the timing t15 before the small symbol group 602 is stopped and displayed, and is stopped and displayed at the timing t16 which is the stop display timing of the small symbol group 602. The timing chart TC31 is an example of a display mode in which a player can easily grasp a gaming state.

  The timing chart TC32 indicates that the large symbol group 601 is temporarily stopped and displayed from the timing t15, and the large symbol group 601 is not displayed at the timing t15a before the stop display timing of the small symbol group 602. Further, the timing chart TC32 indicates that, for example, from the timing t15a to the timing t17 at which the small symbol group 602 performs the stop display, the fluctuation display result guidance display as shown in the effect flow F101 is performed. The timing chart TC32 is an example of a variable display performed without clarifying the correspondence between the stopped symbols of the small symbol group 602 and the large symbol group 601.

  The timing chart TC33 indicates that the large symbol group 601 is temporarily stopped and displayed from the timing t15, and the large symbol group 601 is not displayed at the timing t15a before the stop display timing of the small symbol group 602. Further, the timing chart TC32 indicates that the non-display of the large symbol group 601 is continued until the timing t17 at which the small symbol group 602 performs the stop display. The timing chart TC33 is an example of a variable display performed without clarifying the correspondence between the small symbols 602 and the stopped symbols of the large symbols 601.

  The timing chart TC34 shows that the large symbol group 601 displays the temporary stop from the timing t15 and the temporary stop display of the large symbol group 601 continues until the timing t17 at which the small symbol group 602 performs the stop display. The timing chart TC34 is an example of a fluctuation display for increasing a sense of expectation of a re-change of the stopped symbol of the large symbol group 601.

  The timing chart TC35 indicates that the large symbol group 601 is temporarily stopped and displayed from the timing t15, and the large symbol group 601 is stopped and displayed at the timing t15a before the stop display timing of the small symbol group 602. Further, the timing chart TC35 indicates that the large symbol group 601 continues to be stopped and displayed until the timing t17 when the small symbol group 602 performs the stop display. The timing chart TC35 is an example of a variable display for clarifying the correspondence between the small symbols 602 and the stopped symbols of the large symbols 601.

  As described above, the effect control device 300 can provide various modes for the temporary stop timing in the variable display of the large symbol group. Further, the effect control device 300 can select one of a plurality of temporary stop timing modes according to, for example, the fluctuation display result and the reliability of the fluctuation display result.

  Next, a replacement symbol (first replacement symbol) of the small symbol group 602 to be replaced at the timing t12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an example of a first replacement symbol of the small symbol group according to the second embodiment.

  Effect control device 300 replaces small symbol group 602 with a first replacement symbol at timing t12. The first replacement symbol is set in advance, for example, one pattern is prepared. Pattern 1 is a symbol combination in which the left symbol is “1”, the middle symbol is “2”, and the right symbol is “3”, and does not form a reach or a big hit. The left symbol "1", the middle symbol "2", and the right symbol "3" have different symbol colors, and are one of the symbol combinations that can easily recognize that they do not form a reach or a big hit. It is. Thus, the effect control device 300 prevents the small symbol group 602 during the uniform fluctuation display from appearing as a full-rotation reach and giving a misunderstanding.

In addition, although it is assumed that one pattern is prepared for the first replacement symbol, two or more patterns may be provided and selectively replaced.
Further, effect control device 300 may use the first replacement symbol as the final stop symbol. At this time, the effect control device 300 generates a special result (for example, a latent probability change, a small hit, a small hit, or the like) in order to prevent the small symbol group 602 during the uniform fluctuation display from appearing as a full rotation reach and giving a misunderstanding. The first replacement symbol may be used as the final stop symbol, except when deriving a big hit or the like. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the processing load on the effect control device 300. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can enable the player to predict the final stop symbol by accumulating gaming experience.

  Next, a replacement symbol (second replacement symbol) of the small symbol group 602 to be replaced at the timing t16 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an example of a second replacement symbol of the small symbol group according to the second embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 replaces the small symbol group 602 with the second replacement symbol at timing t16. The second replacement symbol is set in advance, and for example, a plurality of patterns are prepared. In pattern 1, the left symbol is “1”, the middle symbol is “2”, and the right symbol is “3”, which is a symbol combination corresponding to a loss. Further, all of the patterns 2 to 8 are a symbol combination corresponding to a big hit, in which a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol form a cross-match. The big hits corresponding to the symbol combinations of patterns 2 to 8 are big hits having different values depending on the respective symbols. The pattern 9 is a symbol combination corresponding to the latent probability change, in which the left symbol is “1”, the middle symbol is “1”, and the right symbol is “2”.

  In the second replacement symbol, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is one pattern, but a plurality of patterns may be provided. Further, the second replacement symbol may be a stop symbol received by the effect control device 300 from the game control device 100, or may be selected in response to the stop symbol received by the effect control device 300 from the game control device 100. May be used.

Next, a modification of the symbol arrangement of the small symbol group 602 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol array of a small symbol group according to a modification of the second embodiment.
The effect control device 300 can make the small symbol group 602 an irregular symbol array instead of replacing the small symbol group 602 with the first replacement symbol at the timing t12.

  The irregular symbol arrangement of the small symbol group 602 is a different symbol array for the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. In the symbol arrangement of the left symbol, the numbers are arranged in the forward direction in the arrangement order, in the symbol arrangement of the middle symbol, the numerals are arranged in the reverse direction in the arrangement order, and in the symbol arrangement of the right symbol, the numerals are arranged in the arrangement order in a random order set in advance.

  Thus, even if the small symbol group 602 is not replaced with the first replacement symbol at the timing t12, the effect control device 300 gives the misunderstanding that the small symbol group 602 in the uniform variation display looks like a full rotation reach. Can be prevented.

  At the start of the fluctuation of large symbol group 601, effect control device 300 may temporarily change in the reverse direction (return change) and then change in the forward direction (forward change). In such a case, the effect control device 300 may replace the symbol displayed by the small symbol group 602 with the previous symbol in response to the return fluctuation of the large symbol group 601. For example, when the large symbol group 601 displays “1 (left symbol), 2 (middle symbol), 3 (right symbol)”, the effect control device 300 sets one symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the large symbol group 601. It returns by the minute and displays “7, 1, 2”, and then changes sequentially like “1, 2, 3”, “2, 3, 4”,. At this time, the effect control device 300 synchronizes the variable display of the small symbol group 602 with the variable display of the large symbol group 601 to change from “1, 2, 3” to “7, 3, 6”, “1, 2, 2, 3”. After "3", it sequentially changes like "2, 1, 7",. Note that “7, 3, 6” of the small symbol group 602 is in the “−1” direction in the symbol array with respect to “1, 2, 3” of the small symbol group 602, and “2, 3” of the small symbol group 602. “1, 7” is a symbol arrangement in the “+1” direction with respect to “1, 2, 3” of the small symbol group 602 (see FIG. 121). According to this, even when the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 are displayed synchronously, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult for the player to perceive that the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 are displayed synchronously. .

  Note that, when the variation of the large symbol group 601 is less than one symbol, the effect control device 300 rounds up the variation of the small symbol group 602 to one symbol and displays the variation even if it is an offset variation such as a half symbol. May be. According to this, the effect control device 300 can easily control the display of the small symbol group 602 while performing smooth fluctuation display on the large symbol group 601.

  Next, switching of the display mode of the symbols in the large symbol group 601 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a display mode of the large symbol group 601 different from the display mode of the large symbol group 601 shown in FIG. 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of a large symbol group according to the second embodiment.

  The large symbol group 601 can switch the display mode of the large symbol group according to a mode or a game state. For example, when the display mode of the large symbol group 601 shown in FIG. 110 is set to the display mode in the first state (for example, the normal state, the standard effect mode, or the like), the gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 601 shown in FIG. The mode may be a display mode in a second state (for example, a probability fluctuation state, a special effect mode, or the like).

  In the second gaming state, the gaming machine 10 has a standard symbol in a display mode imitating a mahjong tile pin (pins). Further, the gaming machine 10 makes the exclusive symbol different from the first gaming state in the second gaming state. The gaming machine 10 may be configured to increase or decrease the number of exclusive symbols in the second gaming state as compared with the first gaming state. For example, the gaming machine 10 has the special symbol “pig” in the first gaming state, but does not have the special symbol “pig” in the second gaming state.

  Next, switching of the display mode of the symbols of the large symbol group 601 for each state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching of the display mode of the large symbol group for each state according to the second embodiment.

  (1) The symbol pattern by mode indicates a symbol switching pattern by mode. When there are “mode A”, “mode B”, and “mode C” as the display effect modes, the small symbol group 602 has “pattern S” in all of “mode A”, “mode B”, and “mode C”. Fixed. On the other hand, the large symbol group 601 is “pattern A1” in “mode A”, “pattern A2” in “mode B”, and “pattern A3” in “mode C”. For example, “pattern A1” is a display mode of the large symbol group 601 shown in FIG. 110, “pattern A2” is a display mode of the large symbol group 601 shown in FIG. 122, and “pattern A3” is This is a display mode not shown.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 improves the display effect by switching the display mode of the large symbol group 601 according to the mode switching. Further, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to easily grasp the progress of the game by fixing the display mode of the small symbol group 602 regardless of the mode switching.

  (2) The symbol pattern for each gaming state indicates a pattern switching pattern for each gaming state. When the game state includes “normal”, “latency probability change”, and “non-latency probability change”, the small symbol group 602 is fixed at “pattern S” in all of “normal”, “latency probability change”, and “non-latency probability change”. Is done. On the other hand, the large symbol group 601 is “pattern B1” in “normal”, “pattern B2” in “latency probability change”, and “pattern B3” in “non-latency probability change”.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 improves the display effect by switching the display mode of the large symbol group 601 according to the switching of the gaming state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to easily grasp the progress of the game by fixing the display mode of the small symbol group 602 regardless of the switching of the game state.

  Although the large symbol group 601 shown in FIGS. 110 and 122 has a plurality of exclusive symbols, these exclusive symbols may be grouped and the usable group may be switched according to the state. The grouping of the exclusive symbols and the switching of the groups for each state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating an example of switching of the special symbol group of the large symbol group according to the state according to the second embodiment.

  (1) The exclusive symbol group for each mode indicates a switching pattern of the exclusive symbol group for each mode. When there are “mode A”, “mode B”, and “mode C” as the display effect modes, the gaming machine 10 stores the exclusive symbol selected from the exclusive symbol group corresponding to each display effect mode in the large symbol group 601. Can be used. The exclusive symbols that can be used for the large symbol group 601 are exclusive symbols belonging to “group A1” in “mode A”, exclusive symbols belonging to “group A2” in “mode B”, and “mode C” in “mode C”. This is a special symbol belonging to “group A3”. For example, when the special symbols “tiger”, “pig” and “lion” among the special symbols shown in FIG. 110 belong to “group A1” and do not belong to “group A2” and “group A3”, the special symbol “tiger” , "Pig" and "lion" can appear in "mode A" and cannot appear in "mode B" and "mode C". Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can diversify the gaming ability for each display effect mode, and can further enhance the effect of each display effect mode.

  (2) Exclusive symbol group by gaming state indicates a switching pattern of the exclusive symbol group by gaming state. When the game state includes “normal”, “latency probability change”, and “non-latency probability change”, the gaming machine 10 uses the exclusive symbol selected from the exclusive symbol group corresponding to each gaming state for the large symbol group 601. Can be. The exclusive symbol that can be used for the large symbol group 601 is an exclusive symbol belonging to “group B1” in “normal”, an exclusive symbol belonging to “group B2” in “latency probability change”, and a “non-latency probability change” in “non-latency probability change”. This is a special symbol belonging to “group B3”. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can diversify the gaming ability for each gaming state, and can further enhance the effect in each gaming state.

  (3) The change symbol-specific symbol group indicates a switching pattern of the change symbol-specific symbol group. When the fluctuation process includes “normal fluctuation (before occurrence of reach)”, “reach (before occurrence of development reach)”, and “development reach”, the gaming machine 10 has selected from a special symbol group corresponding to each fluctuation process. An exclusive symbol can be used for the large symbol group 601. The exclusive symbols that can be used for the large symbol group 601 are the exclusive symbols belonging to “group C1” in “normal fluctuation”, the exclusive symbols belonging to “group C2” in “reach”, and “ It is a special symbol belonging to "group C3". Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can diversify the gaming characteristics for each variation process, and can further enhance the effect of the effect in each variation process.

  Next, as a modified example of the second embodiment, a gaming machine 10 in which a small symbol group is provided corresponding to each of the special figures 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen during variable display on the display device according to the modification of the second embodiment.

  The variable display screen 651 is the display content of the display device 41. The variable display screen 651 includes three sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 hold number display 653, a special figure 2 hold number display 655, a hold display 656, and a hold digest display 657 in the display contents.

  The three sets of decorative patterns include a large pattern group 601 as a first decorative pattern, a special figure 1 small pattern group 652 as a second decorative pattern, and a special figure 2 small pattern group 654 as a third decorative pattern. The large symbol group 601 is in charge of a game effect for the purpose of enhancing interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is largely displayed at a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 601 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the large symbol group 601 on the variable display screen 600 indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

  The special figure 1 small symbol group 652 is in charge of notifying the fluctuating display state of the special figure 1 for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. The special figure 2 small symbol group 654 is in charge of notifying the change display state of the special figure 2 for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the playing state of the player. The special figure 1 small symbol group 652 and the special figure 2 small symbol group 654 are displayed small on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to secure the visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. The special figure 1 small symbol group 652 and the special figure 2 small symbol group 654 include a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the special figure 1 small symbol group 652 on the variable display screen 651 indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the variable display state. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the special symbol 2 small symbol group 654 on the variable display screen 651 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variable display game is in the stop display state.

  The special figure 1 reserved number display 653 displays the reserved storage number (starting stored number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 1 reservation number display 653 is displayed close to the special figure 1 small symbol group 652. The special figure 2 reservation number display 655 displays the reservation number of special figure 2 games. The special figure 2 reservation number display 655 is displayed close to the special figure 2 small symbol group 654.

  The hold display 656 can clearly indicate the number of storages of the special figure change display game by the display mode, and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage. The reserved digest display 657 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state, and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can distinguish between the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game and indicate that the special figure change display game is in the change display state. The effect control device 300 does not need to arrange the special figure 1 small symbol group 652 and the special figure 2 small symbol group 654 at a position that does not necessarily interfere with the board effect device 44. The effect control device 300 allows interference between the special figure 2 small symbol group 654 and the board effect device 44 when the special figure 1 game is in the variable display state, and when the special figure 2 game is in the variable display state. The interference between the small symbol group 652 in FIG. 1 and the board effect device 44 may be allowed. In other words, the effect control device 300 can make the control pattern of the board effect device 44 different depending on whether the special figure game in the variable display state is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. In this way, the gaming machine 10 restricts the restriction on the board effect device 44 based on the interference between the special figure 1 small symbol group 652 and the special figure 2 small symbol group 654 while clearly indicating the variable display state of the special figure variable display game. Can be reduced.

  Next, as a modified example of the second embodiment, a gaming machine 10 that changes the display position of a small symbol group will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 2) of a screen during variable display on the display device according to the modification of the second embodiment.

  The variable display screen 658 is the display content of the display device 41. The variable display screen 658 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 reserved number display 660, a special figure 2 reserved number display 661, a reserve display 656, and a reserved use display 657.

  The two sets of decorative patterns include a large pattern group 601 as a first decorative pattern and a small pattern group 659 as a second decorative pattern. The large symbol group 601 is in charge of a game effect for the purpose of enhancing interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is largely displayed at a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 601 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the large symbol group 601 on the variable display screen 600 indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

  The small symbol group 659 is in charge of notifying the variable display state of the special figure for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. The small symbol group 659 is displayed small on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to secure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. The small symbol group 659 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. The left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in the small symbol group 659 on the variable display screen 658 indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

  The effect control device 300 does not need to arrange the small symbol group 659 at a position that does not necessarily interfere with the board effect device 44. The effect control device 300 displays the small symbol group 659, the special figure 1 reserved number display 660, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 661 on the right side, for example, when the board rendering device 44c advances from the left side to the front of the display device 41. Go to Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can specify the variable display state of the special figure variable display game while reducing the restriction on the board effect device 44. Further, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the display states of the special figure 1 reserved number display 660 and the special figure 2 reserved number display 661 while reducing the restrictions on the board effect device 44.

  The effect control device 300 may move and display the small symbol group 659 even if the board effect device 44 does not operate due to a failure or the like. The effect control device 300 does not have to move and display the small symbol group 659 even when the small symbol group 659 does not interfere with the board effect device 44 by the operation of the board effect device 44. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can move to a position where the small symbol group 659 can be visually recognized well. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can provide advance notice of the operation of the board effect device 44 by the movement display mode of the small symbol group 659. That is, the gaming machine 10 can notify the advance of the movement of the board effect device 44 to the position before the movement of the small symbol group 659 by moving and displaying the small symbol group 659.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is not limited to the operation of the board effect device 44, and may move and display the small symbol group 659 in a predetermined game state or display state. For example, when there is a possibility that the visibility of small symbol group 659 may be impaired by a predetermined effect, effect control device 300 can move to a position where small symbol group 659 can be viewed well. For example, the effect control device 300 may control the small symbol group 659 when the visibility of the small symbol group 659 may be impaired due to the display content of the display device 41 or the lighting mode of the decoration device around the display device 41. Move to a position where can be visually recognized well. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can provide a preliminary announcement of a predetermined effect by the movement display mode of the small symbol group 659. The predetermined effect here includes an effect in a predetermined game state and an effect in a predetermined mode.

  The effect control device 300 may move the small symbol group 659 continuously or may move discretely. Also, the case where the small symbol group 659 is moved and displayed has been described, but the effect control device 300 can similarly move and display the special figure 1 hold number display and the special figure 2 hold number display. The effect control device 300 can move and display the special figure 1 hold number display and the special figure 2 hold number display together with the small symbol group 659.

  Next, as a modification of the second embodiment, a gaming machine 10 that clearly indicates which of the special figures 1 and 2 is the variable display by the display mode of the small symbol group will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. explain. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a variable display mode of a small symbol group according to a modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of the variable display mode of the small symbol group according to the modified example of the second embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of the variable display mode of the small symbol group according to the modified example of the second embodiment.

  The small symbol group 662 shown in FIG. 127 (1) displays the same background (for example, background color “white”) as the background of the special figure 1 reserved number display 663, so that the special symbol group 662 is fluctuatingly displayed. Specifies that the game is special map 1. At this time, the background of the special figure 2 reserved number display 664 (for example, the background color “black”) is different from the background of the small symbol group 662 and the background of the special figure 1 reserved number display 663.

  The small symbol group 662 shown in FIG. 127 (2) displays the same background (for example, the background color “black”) as the background of the special figure 2 reserved number display 664, so that the special symbol group 662 is displayed in a variable manner. Specifies that the game is Tokuzu 2 At this time, the background of the special figure 1 reserved number display 663 (for example, the background color “white”) is different from the background of the small symbol group 662 and the background of the special figure 2 reserved number display 664.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can distinguish between the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game and indicate that the special figure change display game is in the change display state.
The small symbol group 665 shown in FIG. 128 (1) displays a background (for example, the background color “white”) shared with the special figure 1 reserved number display 666, so that the special symbol game which is being fluctuated in the small symbol group 665 is displayed. Is special figure 1. At this time, the special figure 2 reservation number display 667 does not share the background with the small symbol group 665 and the special figure 1 reservation number display 666.

  Note that the background of the small symbol group 665 and the background of the special figure 1 reserved number display 666 do not necessarily need to be integrated, and may be separated if the display mode is the same. In addition, the background of the small symbol group 665 and the background of the special figure 1 reservation number display 666 do not need to have the same display mode, and if the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game can be distinguished. Some display modes may be the same.

  The small figure group 665 shown in FIG. 128 (2) displays the background (for example, the background color “white”) shared with the special figure 2 reservation number display 667, so that the special figure game variably displayed in the small figure group 665. Is special figure 2. At this time, the special figure 1 reserved number display 666 does not share the background with the small symbol group 665 and the special figure 2 reserved number display 667.

  Note that the background of the small symbol group 665 and the background of the special figure 2 reserved number display 667 do not necessarily need to be integrated, and may be separated if the display mode is the same. In addition, the background of the small symbol group 665 and the background of the special figure 2 reservation number display 667 do not need to have the same display mode, and if the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game can be distinguished. Some display modes may be the same.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can distinguish between the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game and indicate that the special figure change display game is in the change display state.
The small symbol group 668 shown in FIG. 129 (1) is a special symbol game which is being displayed in a variable manner in the small symbol group 668 by changing the symbol display to Arabic numerals similarly to the number-of-retentions display in the special-number-one-retention-number display 669. It is clearly shown in FIG. At this time, the special figure 2 reserved number display 670 sets the reserved number display to Chinese numerals.

  The small symbol group 668 shown in FIG. 129 (2) is a special figure game which is displayed in a variable manner in the small symbol group 668 by changing the symbol display to the Chinese numerals similarly to the reserved number display in the special figure 2 reserved number display 670. It is clearly shown in FIG. At this time, the special figure 1 reserved number display 669 sets the reserved number display to Arabic numerals.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can distinguish between the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game and indicate that the special figure change display game is in the change display state.
Next, as a modified example of the second embodiment, a description will be given of a gaming machine 10 in which a variable display state is clearly indicated by a part of symbols constituting a small symbol group, with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of the variable display mode of the small symbol group according to the modified example of the second embodiment.

  The small symbol group 671 shown in FIG. 130 (1) indicates that the three-digit symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol fluctuates uniformly, and the special figure fluctuation display game is in the fluctuation display state. The small symbol group 672 shown in FIG. 130 (2) indicates that the left symbol is stopped, the two-digit symbol of the middle symbol and the right symbol is changed uniformly, and the special figure change display game is in the change display state. . The small symbol group 673 shown in FIG. 130 (3) indicates that the two symbols of the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped, and the right symbol fluctuates uniformly, and the special figure fluctuating display game is in the fluctuating display state. The small symbol group 674 shown in FIG. 130 (4) indicates that the two symbols of the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped, the middle symbol fluctuates uniformly, and the special figure fluctuating display game is in the fluctuating display state.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state without necessarily displaying all the symbols in the variable display state. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may perform a notice or reliability notification based on the stopped symbols.

  Next, as a modified example of the second embodiment, a gaming machine 10 that clearly indicates a variable display state while changing the number of digits of symbols constituting a small symbol group will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 5) of the variable display mode of the small symbol group according to the modification example of the second embodiment.

  The small symbol group 675 shown in FIG. 131 (1) indicates that the three-digit symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol fluctuates uniformly and the special figure fluctuating display game is in the fluctuating display state. The small symbol group 676 shown in FIG. 131 (2) indicates that the two-digit symbol of the left symbol and the right symbol fluctuate uniformly, and the special figure fluctuating display game is in the fluctuating display state. The small symbol group 677 shown in FIG. 131 (3) indicates that one symbol is uniformly changed and the special figure change display game is in the change display state. The small symbol group 678 shown in FIG. 131 (4) indicates that the four-digit symbol is uniformly changed and the special figure change display game is in the change display state.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state while changing the number of symbols in the symbol without necessarily changing the number of symbols in the symbol and performing variable display. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may perform a notice or reliability notification based on the number of digits of the displayed symbol.

  It should be noted that the small symbol group may include a special symbol as in the large symbol group. For example, in the small symbol group 677, one symbol is variably displayed. At this time, since the visibility of each symbol is improved, the variable display including the exclusive symbol may be performed. For example, the small symbol group 677 can include “7”, “Replay”, “this”, “heat”, etc. in the special symbol when the standard symbol is one letter from “A” to “G”. . For example, “this” of the exclusive symbol “7” indicates a hit, “Replay” of the exclusive symbol indicates a pseudo-ream, and “heat” of the exclusive symbol indicates the degree of expectation. In addition, the small symbol group 677 may be provided with a symbol corresponding to each mode (for example, a tiger mode indicating a latent probability change) or a loss. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can also show the advance notice and the reliability degree notice while indicating that the special figure change display game is in the change display state by the small symbol group 677, thereby further improving the interest.

  In the small symbol group, when reducing the number of digits of the symbol, the symbol may be made larger than before reducing the number of digits of the symbol. For example, one symbol is made larger than the small symbol groups 675, 676, 678. The small symbol group 677 displays one symbol in a variable manner. At this time, the temporary stop display may be performed because the visibility of each symbol is improved.

  Although the large symbol group and the small symbol group are displayed on the display device 41 in the second embodiment, they may be displayed on different display devices. For example, when the gaming machine 10 includes the second display device, the large symbol group displays a large symbol group on the display device 41 (first display device) and a small symbol group on the second display device. be able to. For example, when the gaming machine 10 guides the operation of the push button 25 to the player and the line of sight of the player will move to the push button 25, the second display device is arranged near the push button 25. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state even when the player moves his / her eyes to the push button 25. Note that the gaming machine 10 may include an operation unit such as the push button 25 and the second display device integrally with each other, for example, as a touch panel.

  The gaming machine 10 may be provided with a second display device on the game board 30 or may be provided with the second display device on the front frame 12. The second display device may be a display device smaller than the display device 41 (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, or the like). The gaming machine 10 may move and display the small symbol group between the first display device and the second display device, or may display the small symbol group between the first display device and the second display device. The symbol group may be moved and displayed. For example, when performing the battle effect shown on the screen 616 on the first display device, the gaming machine 10 may move and display both the large symbol group and the small symbol group on the second display device. it can. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can enlarge a display area used for a display effect (for example, a battle effect) on the first display device, or immerse the player in the display effect.

  In the gaming machine 10, the effect display area for effect display and the small symbol group display area for displaying small symbol groups may be clearly divided by background display, section display, isolation, and the like. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the effect of the effect display effect from interfering with the small symbol group and lowering the visibility of the small symbol group.

  When the gaming machine 10 displays the fourth symbol separately from the decorative symbols (the large symbol group and the small symbol group), the gaming machine 10 may display the fourth symbol in the vicinity of the small symbol group. The fourth symbol is a symbol that indicates a variable display state of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in synchronization with the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 in the collective display device 50. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state in cooperation with the small symbol group and the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol is not necessarily displayed on the display device 41 as long as it is visible from the front of the game board 30. For example, the fourth symbol is displayed by a display such as an LED (or a display device such as an LCD) provided on a component of the game board 30 such as the center case 40, the flow path forming member 42, and the board effect device 44. It may be.

  In the gaming machine 10, the small symbol group and the fourth symbol may be arranged so as to sandwich the large symbol group. According to this, even if the player's line of sight concentrates on the large symbol group, or if there is an effect in which the visibility of any of the small symbol group and the fourth symbol is impaired, the gaming machine 10 can display the small symbol group. And the fourth symbol can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first display device (collective display device 50), a second display device (display device 41), a main control unit (game control device 100), and a slave control unit (effect control device 300). ). The main control unit controls the first display device to variably display the first identification information (this special figure: special figure 1 and special figure 2). The slave control unit controls the second display device to variably display the second identification information (large symbol group 601) and the third identification information (small symbol group 602) based on a command received from the main control unit. The slave control unit performs the variable display control of the second identification information and the third identification information in synchronization with the variable display control of the first identification information. The slave control unit switches the second identification information from the first variable display mode (the explicit state: for example, the screen 614) to the second variable display mode (the non-explicit state: for example, the screen 616) and displays the second identification information on the second display device. The variation display mode of the third identification information is displayed uniformly on the second display device.

(2) The first variable display mode of (1) is a display mode in which the second identification information is specified, and the second variable display mode is a display mode in which the second identification information is not specified.
(3) The first variable display mode of (1) is a display mode in which the second identification information is variably displayed at a predetermined speed, and the second variable display mode is a temporary stop display mode of the second identification information (for example, swinging). Dynamic operation).

(4) The second identification information in (1) is identification information that occupies a larger display area than the third identification information.
(5) The third identification information of (1) is identification information located at a peripheral portion of the display area as compared with the second identification information.

(6) The second identification information and the third identification information in (1) are symbol groups each including one or more symbols.
(7) The symbol constituting the second identification information in (6) is displayed larger than the symbol constituting the third identification information.

(8) The symbol constituting the third identification information of (6) is displayed with a fixed size.
(9) The symbol constituting the third identification information of (6) performs the first symbol replacement at a first timing after a lapse of a predetermined time after the start of the variable display, and at a second timing at which the variable display is stopped. Perform the second symbol replacement.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first display device (collective display device 50), a second display device (display device 41), a main control unit (game control device 100), and a slave control unit (effect control device 300). ). The main control unit controls the first display device to variably display the first identification information (this special figure: special figure 1 and special figure 2). The slave control unit controls the second display device to variably display the second identification information (large symbol group 601) and the third identification information (small symbol group 602) based on a command received from the main control unit. The slave control unit performs the variable display control of the second identification information and the third identification information in synchronization with the variable display control of the first identification information. The slave control unit starts the variable display of the second identification information and the third identification information in synchronization with the variable display control of the first identification information, hides the second identification information, and displays the third identification information. Thus, the variable display of the second identification information and the third identification information is ended (for example, screens 631 and 639).

(2) The second identification information and the third identification information of (1) are symbol groups each including one or more symbols.
(3) The secondary control unit of (1) displays a specific symbol (dedicated symbol) displayed only at a specific time before hiding the second identification information and ending the variable display.

(4) The slave control unit of (3) displays the specific symbol in a temporary stop display mode (for example, swing operation).
(5) The specific symbol of (3) is displayed when the first identification information derives a predetermined result mode.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first display device (collective display device 50), a second display device (display device 41), a main control unit (game control device 100), and a slave control unit (effect control device 300). ). The main control unit controls the first display device to variably display the first identification information (this special figure: special figure 1 and special figure 2). The slave control unit controls the second display device to variably display the second identification information (large symbol group 601) and the third identification information (small symbol group 602) based on a command received from the main control unit. The slave control unit performs the variable display control of the second identification information and the third identification information in synchronization with the variable display control of the first identification information. The slave control unit displays the second identification information and the third identification in a synchronous variation display mode in which the second identification information and the third identification information are synchronously varied and displayed (for example, a synchronous variation display at time T2 from timing t11 to timing t12). After the information is displayed on the second display device, the second identification information and the third identification information are displayed in a non-synchronous manner in an asynchronous variation display mode (for example, an asynchronous variation display at time T3 from timing t12 to timing t16). When displaying the second identification information and the third identification information on the second display device, the variation display mode of the second identification information is made non-uniform (for example, fluctuates at an indefinite speed), and the variation display mode of the third identification information is changed. It is displayed uniformly (for example, fluctuating at a constant speed).

(2) In the synchronous fluctuation display mode of (1), the display mode of the second identification information has a correspondence with the display mode of the third identification information.
(3) In the asynchronous fluctuation display mode of (1), the display mode of the second identification information has no correspondence with the display mode of the third identification information.

(4) When the third identification information of (1) displays two or more symbols (for example, left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) in combination, the arrangement of one symbol is different from the array of other symbols.
(5) When the second identification information undergoes the offset variation (fluctuation less than one symbol), the slave control unit of (1) rounds up the variation of the third identification information to one symbol and varies.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a third embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 shown in the third embodiment has a large symbol group and a small symbol group as two sets of decorative symbols, and a variable symbol display control with a movie symbol and a variable symbol display control with a non-movie symbol for the large symbol group. Can be performed. First, a movie symbol and a non-movie symbol in the large symbol group will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol array of a large symbol group according to the third embodiment.

  The movie symbol is a symbol displayed by a moving image reproduced by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 can store a moving image as reproduction content in a memory (for example, the image ROM 325) in advance, read the moving image from the memory (develop as needed), and reproduce the display of the movie symbol. . Therefore, the movie symbol is a symbol displayed by reproducing a moving image stored in the memory in advance.

  The non-movie symbol is a symbol displayed by a moving image generated by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 can store image information in a memory (for example, the image ROM 325) in advance, read out the image information from the memory (develop as needed), and generate a moving image that displays a non-movie symbol. . Therefore, the non-movie symbol is a symbol displayed by a moving image generated from the image information stored in the memory in advance.

  The non-movie symbols include symbols 700, 702, 704, 706, and 708 that can be the symbols constituting the big hit and symbols 701, 703, 705, 707, and 709 that cannot be the symbols that constitute the big hit in the symbol array.

  The symbols 700, 702, 704, 706, and 708 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. Each of the patterns 700, 702, 704, 706, and 708 is formed on a disc-shaped base 700, which is the outer shape of the pattern, by a graphic element (eg, a character) 711 and a character (eg, a number). And a character element 712 having

  The symbols 701, 703, 705, 707, and 709 are blank symbols, each of which cannot be distinguished from other blank symbols by the same display mode. Each of the symbols 701, 703, 705, 707, and 709 has a disc-shaped base 713, which is the outer shape of the symbol, and a graphic element (714) having a graphic element 714 having distinctiveness as a blank symbol.

  The movie symbols include symbols 715, 716, 717, 718, and 719, which can be symbols constituting a big hit, in the symbol array. The symbols 715, 716, 717, 718, and 719 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. Each of the designs 715, 716, 717, 718, and 719 is a graphic element 721 having a distinction as a design by a graphic (for example, a character) on a rectangular base 720 on which an S-shaped design as an external shape of the design is applied. Is attached. Further, the symbols 715, 716, 717, 718, and 719 also have distinctiveness as symbols by the color given to the base 720.

  Next, display effects of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 138. FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example of the production flow of the third embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the third embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the third embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the third embodiment. FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the third embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 5) of a screen displayed by the display device of the third embodiment.

  [Production Flow F110] The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols before the start of the change in the change display game. The screen 730 shown in FIG. 134 (F110) includes a large symbol group 731, a small symbol group 732, a special figure 1 reserved number display 733, a special figure 2 reserved number display 734, a reserved display 735, and a reserved digest display 736. Are included in the display content.

  The screen 730 shows a state where the large symbol group 731 and the small symbol group 732 are stopped and displayed. The large symbol group 731 includes an upper right symbol 731a, a lower left symbol 731b, an upper left symbol 731c, a lower right symbol 731d, and a central symbol 731e. The gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 731 being stopped and displayed in a non-movie symbol.

  The large symbol group 731 is a first effective line that forms a winning symbol combination by a diagonally lower left line formed by an upper right symbol 731a, a lower left symbol 731b, and a central symbol 731e. In addition, the large symbol group 731 is a second effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with a diagonally upward slant line formed by the upper left symbol 731c, the lower right symbol 731d, and the central symbol 731e.

  At this time, the reserved digest display 736 indicates that the special figure variable display game is not in the variable display state by blank display, and the reserved display 735 indicates that the total reserved storage number of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is “8”. Indicates that there is. The total reserved storage number “8” indicated by the reservation display 735 is the reserved storage number “4” of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reservation number display 733 and the special figure 2 game reserved indicated by the special figure 2 reservation number display 734 This is the total number with the storage number “4”. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F111.

  [Production Flow F111] The gaming machine 10 starts the variable display. The gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 731 in the non-movie symbol after the start of the variable display. The screen 738 shown in FIG. 134 (F111) indicates that the large symbol group 731 and the small symbol group 732 have started the variable display. For example, the large symbol group 731 performs a variable display by rotating each symbol counterclockwise on the vertical axis, and the small symbol group 732 performs a variable display by vertically scrolling each symbol from the upper direction to the lower direction. At this time, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group 731 in a semi-transparent state to enhance the visibility of the background display more than the visibility of the large symbol group 731. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 secures visibility that prioritizes background display without making the small symbol group 732 translucent.

  In addition, the special figure 2 reserved number display 734 is displayed by reducing the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game by one, and the reserved display 735 is displayed by subtracting the reserved memory number of the special figure variable display game by one. . The reserved digest display 736 indicates that the special figure change display game is in the change display state. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F112 when "going out" without performing a movie production, proceeds to the production flow F113 when "winning" occurs without performing a movie production, and produces a movie production. Proceed to flow F114.

  [Production Flow F112] The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols. The gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 731 when the symbols are stopped and displayed by non-movie symbols. The screen 740 shown in FIG. 134 (F112) shows a state in which the large symbol group 731 and the small symbol group 732 stop changing display, and the large symbol group 731 and the small symbol group 732 are stopped and displayed in an off state. . At this time, the reserved digest display 736 indicates by a blank display that the special figure variable display game is not in the variable display state.

  [Production Flow F113] The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols. The gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 731 when the symbols are stopped and displayed by non-movie symbols. The screen 742 shown in FIG. 134 (F113) shows a state in which the large symbol group 731 and the small symbol group 732 stop changing display, and the large symbol group 731 and the small symbol group 732 are stopped and displayed in a hit manner. . At this time, the reserved digest display 736 indicates by a blank display that the special figure variable display game is not in the variable display state.

  [Production Flow F114] The gaming machine 10 displays an all blank in the large symbol group 731. The gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol group 731 for displaying all blanks in a non-movie symbol. A screen 744 shown in FIG. 135 (F114) shows a state in which the large symbol group 731 is stopped and displayed with all blanks. The all blank is a display mode in which all of the upper right symbol 731a, the lower left symbol 731b, the upper left symbol 731c, the lower right symbol 731d, and the central symbol 731e that constitute the large symbol group 731 are blank symbols. Note that the all-blank is an example of a display mode that guides the player to enter a movie effect, and another symbol combination in the large symbol group 731 may be used as an opportunity to enter the movie effect. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates that the small symbol group 732 is being displayed in a variable manner, the large symbol group 731 when displaying all blanks may be in a temporary stop display mode or a stop display mode. . After displaying all blanks in the large symbol group 731, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F115.

  [Production Flow F115] The gaming machine 10 starts a movie production (movie 1). The gaming machine 10 switches the large symbol group 731 to a movie symbol and displays it in a movie effect. A screen 746 shown in FIG. 135 (F115) displays a small symbol group 732, a special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 734 superimposed on a movie screen 747. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the variable display state of the special figure variable display game, the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game, and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game even during the movie effect.

  The movie screen 747 is a playback video of a movie (moving image) prepared in advance. The movie screen 747 in the screen 746 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749 and a symbol list display 750 in the display content. The reach configuration symbol 748 is displayed on the upper left of the movie screen 747, and the reach configuration symbol 749 is displayed on the upper right of the movie screen 747. The symbol list display 750 displays a list of movie symbols 750a, 750b, 750c, 750d, and 750e. For example, the symbol list display 750 displays a list of movie symbols 750a, 750b, 750c, 750d, and 750e that are moved and displayed in an arc. After displaying the movie 1, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F116.

  [Production Flow F116] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (movie 2). On a screen 752 shown in FIG. 135 (F116), a small symbol group 732, a special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 734 are superimposed and displayed on a movie screen 747. The movie screen 747 in the screen 752 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749 and a character 753 in the display content. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can display the character 753 only by playing the prepared movie without performing the image generation processing on the character 753, and can reduce the processing load on the effect control device 300. . After displaying the movie 2, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F117.

  [Production Flow F117] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (movie 3). A screen 756 shown in FIG. 135 (F117) displays a small symbol group 732, a special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 734 on the movie screen 747 in a superimposed manner. The movie screen 747 in the screen 756 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749, a character 753, and a symbol list display 757 in the display content. For example, the symbol list display 757 displays five types of movie symbols in two lists. The gaming machine 10 can freely change the display mode such as the position, size, inclination, and the like of the movie symbol on the movie screen 747 simply by playing the prepared movie without excessively increasing the processing load on the effect control device 300. Can be performed. After displaying the movie 3, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F118.

  [Production Flow F118] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (movie 4). The screen 758 shown in FIG. 136 (F118) displays the small symbol group 732, the special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 734 superimposed on the movie screen 747. The movie screen 747 in the screen 758 includes the reach configuration symbols 748 and 749, the character 753, and the symbol group displays 759 and 760 in the display content. For example, the symbol group displays 759 and 760 display nine types of movie symbols each. The symbol group displays 759 and 760 each display the character “?” With a group of movie symbols. The symbol group display 759 displays the character “?” At the correct position, and the symbol group display 760 displays the inverted character “?”. The character “?” Shown in the symbol group displays 759 and 760 corresponds to the display mode (for example, facial expression, attitude, gesture, etc.) of the character 753, and describes the character 753 thinking. That is, the gaming machine 10 realizes the effect explanation function in the movie effect by a display mode in which a group of movie symbols forms. After displaying the movie 4, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F119.

  [Production Flow F119] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (Movie 5). A screen 762 shown in FIG. 136 (F119) displays a small symbol group 732, a special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 734 superimposed on a movie screen 747. The movie screen 747 on the screen 762 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749, a character 753, and a movie symbol 763 in the display content. The movie pattern 763 is displayed at a position corresponding to the mouth of the character 753 such as a pig. After displaying the movie 5, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F120.

  [Production Flow F120] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (movie 6). A screen 764 shown in FIG. 136 (F120) displays a small symbol group 732, a special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 734 superimposed on a movie screen 747. The movie screen 747 in the screen 764 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749, characters 753, 765, 766, a movie symbol 763, and a line 767 in the display content. The characters 765 and 766 function as liveliness in movie production, and the line 767 displays the line “OK” emitted by the character 753. After displaying the movie 6, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F121.

  [Production Flow F121] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (movie 7). The screen 768 shown in FIG. 136 (F121) displays the small symbol group 732, the special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 734 superimposed on the movie screen 747. The movie screen 747 in the screen 768 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749, characters 753, 765, 766, a symbol group display 769, and a line 767 in the display content. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs a sound 770 corresponding to “O” of the dialogue 767 from the speakers 19a and 19b. The symbol group display 769 displays the character "O" using nine movie symbols of one type. At this time, the symbol group display 769 is superimposed on the character 753 to clearly indicate that the speaker of the voice 770 is the character 753. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect by synchronizing the symbol group display 769 displayed on the display device 41 with the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b (audio output devices). In addition, even if the sound 770 output from the speakers 19a and 19b is difficult for the player to hear due to a low volume or the like, the gaming machine 10 can assist the content understanding by the symbol group display 769. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can exhibit a game effect even if a large volume is not set. After displaying the movie 7, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F122.

  [Production Flow F122] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (movie 8). The screen 772 shown in FIG. 137 (F122) superimposes the small symbol group 732, the special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 734 on the movie screen 747. The movie screen 747 on the screen 772 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749, characters 753, 765, 766, a symbol group display 773, and a line 767 as display contents. In addition, the gaming machine 10 outputs a sound 774 corresponding to “K (K)” of the dialogue 767 from the speakers 19a and 19b. The symbol group display 773 displays the character "K" using nine types of movie symbols. At this time, the symbol group display 773 is superimposed on the character 753 to clearly indicate that the speaker of the voice 774 is the character 753. After displaying the movie 8, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F123.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 performs the symbol group display for each syllable in the sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, but may perform the symbol group display for each meaning. In addition, although the gaming machine 10 guides the audio output from the speakers 19a and 19b in alphabets, the audio may be numbers, hiragana, katakana, kanji, symbols, pictograms, or the like. For example, when the speakers 19a and 19b output voice "Nana", the gaming machine 10 can display "Na" and "Na" by displaying two symbol groups, and "7" and "7" by displaying one symbol group. "Seven" can be displayed. In addition, when the speakers 19a and 19b output the sound “maru”, the gaming machine 10 can display “ma” and “ru” by displaying two symbol groups, and “circle” and “ru” by displaying one symbol group. ○ ”can be displayed. When displaying two or more symbol groups, the gaming machine 10 may display them simultaneously on one screen, or may display them with a time difference by switching or scrolling.

  [Production Flow F123] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (Movie 9). A screen 776 shown in FIG. 137 (F123) displays a small symbol group 732, a special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and a special figure 2 reserved number display 734 superimposed on a movie screen 747. The movie screen 747 in the screen 776 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749, a character 753, and a symbol list display 777 in the display content. After displaying the movie 9, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F124.

  [Production Flow F124] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (movie 10). The screen 778 shown in FIG. 137 (F124) displays the small symbol group 732, the special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 734 on the movie screen 747 in a superimposed manner. The movie screen 747 on the screen 778 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749 and a movie symbol 779 in the display content. The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuating state of the movie symbol 779 (for example, whether or not the movie symbol 779 is stopped) by the movie effect. After displaying the movie 10, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F125.

  [Production Flow F125] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production (movie 11). The screen 780 shown in FIG. 137 (F125) displays the small symbol group 732, the special figure 1 reserved number display 733, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 734 on the movie screen 747 in a superimposed manner. The movie screen 747 on the screen 780 includes reach configuration symbols 748 and 749 and a movie symbol 781 in the display content. The gaming machine 10 displays a stopped state of the movie symbol 781 by a movie effect. That is, the movie screen 747 displays a stop mode (for example, a big hit mode) in which the reach configuration symbols 748 and 749 and the movie symbol 781 are aligned. In the gaming machine 10, the small symbol group 732 clearly indicates that the special figure game is still in the variable display state. Further, the movie screen 747 is a movie screen for deriving a hit, but the gaming machine 10 can prepare a movie screen that does not separately derive a hit, that is, a movie screen that is “outside”. When deriving a loss, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the effect flow F112 without shifting to the effect flow F125 after the effect flow F124. When the winning is derived, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F126, the effect flow F127, or the effect flow F128.

  [Production Flow F126] The gaming machine 10 displays a variable display result after the movie production is completed. On the screen 782 shown in FIG. 138 (F126), the large symbol group 731 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit with a non-movie symbol, and the small symbol group 732 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit. Indicates a state in which At this time, the reserved digest display 736 indicates that the special figure variable display game is not in the variable display state by blank display. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can switch from the result display of the special figure variable display game using the movie symbol to the result display of the special figure variable display game using the non-movie symbol when the movie effect ends. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly show the details of the result mode by displaying the result by the non-movie symbol while exhibiting the effect of the movie display.

  [Production Flow F127] The gaming machine 10 continues the movie production and displays the fluctuation display result. A screen 784 shown in FIG. 138 (F127) shows a state where the large symbol group 731 is not displayed and the small symbol group 732 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit. Also, the screen 784 displays a fluctuation display result guide display 785 and a character 786. The fluctuation display result guidance display 785 and the character 786 guide that a win (for example, a big hit) has been derived as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. The screen 784 may be included in the movie effect or may not be included in the movie effect.

  [Effect Flow F128] The gaming machine 10 performs re-variation display after the end of the movie effect. A screen 788 shown in FIG. 138 (F128) redisplays the large symbol group 731 in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit with a non-movie symbol, and clearly indicates that the small symbol group 732 is being displayed in a variable manner.

  [Effect Flow F129] The gaming machine 10 displays the fluctuation display result after the end of the re-variation display. The screen 790 shown in FIG. 138 (F129) stops and displays the large symbol group 731 in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit with a non-movie symbol, and stops and displays the small symbol group 732 in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit. Indicates a state in which In this way, the gaming machine 10 can switch from the result display of the special figure variable display game using the movie symbol to the result display of the special figure variable display game via the re-variable display using the non-movie symbol when the movie effect is completed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly show the details of the result mode by displaying the result by the non-movie symbol while exhibiting the effect of the movie display.

  The gaming machine 10 has been described by dividing the movie display from the movie 1 to the movie 11 for convenience. However, the movie effect may be performed by one playback moving image, or a plurality of playback moving images that are sequentially played back. May be used to produce a movie.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can separate each development process by making the symbol (movie symbol) under the movie effect different from the symbol (non-movie symbol) under the non-movie effect. For example, in the gaming machine 10, even if the display mode or the number of symbols used in the non-movie effect is changed, the moving image used in the movie effect is not affected. Further, the gaming machine 10 can share the moving image used in the movie effect even if the display mode and the number of the symbols used in the non-movie effect differ between the series machines. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can be a gaming machine that can be supplied to the market at low cost by reducing the number of development steps.

  Here, a modified example of the symbol group displays 769 and 773 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating a modification (part 1) of the symbol group display of the third embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating a modified example (part 2) of the symbol group display according to the third embodiment.

  The symbol group display 791 shown in FIG. 139 (1) forms a character “O” with 18 symbols 719 (see FIG. 132). In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily change the number of symbols forming characters. The gaming machine 10 may change the number of symbols forming characters in accordance with the progress of the variable display game and the result derived from the variable display game. For example, when displaying the symbol group corresponding to the character “O”, the gaming machine 10 displays the symbol group display 769 (see FIG. 136) when the jackpot reliability is 10%, and the jackpot reliability is 50%. At the time of%, the symbol group display 791 can be displayed.

  The symbol group display 792 shown in FIG. 139 (2) forms the character “O” with nine symbols 715 (see FIG. 132). As described above, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily change the type of the symbol forming the character. The gaming machine 10 may change the type of the symbol forming the character in accordance with the progress of the variable display game or the result derived from the variable display game. For example, when performing the symbol group display corresponding to the character “O”, the gaming machine 10 displays the symbol group display 769 when the jackpot reliability is 10%, and displays the symbol when the jackpot reliability is 50%. A group display 792 can be displayed.

  In the symbol group display 793 shown in FIG. 139 (3), the character “O” is formed by nine symbols 719 (see FIG. 132), and the symbol layout is different from the symbol group display 769. The symbol group display 793 is different from the symbol group display 769 in the symbol arrangement by half a symbol. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily change the arrangement (aspect) of the symbols forming the characters. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the arrangement of the symbols forming the characters in accordance with the progress of the variable display game and the result derived from the variable display game. For example, when performing the symbol group display corresponding to the character “O”, the gaming machine 10 displays the symbol group display 769 when the jackpot reliability is 10%, and displays the symbol when the jackpot reliability is 50%. A group display 793 can be displayed.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 can perform character display based on a locus of movement of one or two or more symbols, instead of character display with a group of symbols such as symbol group displays 769 and 773.

  The symbol trajectory display 794 shown in FIG. 140 (1) forms the character “O” in the trajectory in which one moving display symbol 794a composed of the symbol 719 is moved and displayed. In the symbol locus display 795 shown in FIG. 140 (2), the character “O” is formed by a locus in which two moving display symbols 795a and 795b composed of the symbol 719 are moved and displayed. Note that the gaming machine 10 may display the afterimage of the moving display symbols 794a, 795a, and 795b by moving and displaying the locus. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the number and type of symbols forming characters based on the trajectory in accordance with the progress of the variable display game and the results derived from the variable display game. For example, when displaying the symbol trajectory corresponding to the character "O", the gaming machine 10 displays the symbol trajectory display 794 when the reliability of the big hit is 10%, and displays the symbol when the reliability of the big hit is 50%. A trajectory display 795 can be displayed.

  The symbol trajectory display 796 shown in FIG. 140 (3) forms the character "K" with the trajectory of one moving display symbol 796a composed of the symbol 719. For example, the movement display symbol 796a moves from the start point 797a to the intermediate end point 797b to display the trajectory, and then moves from the intermediate end point 797c to the end point 797d to display the trajectory. The symbol trajectory display 798 shown in FIG. 140 (4) forms the character "K" with the trajectory in which the two moving display symbols 798a and 798b composed of the symbol 719 are moved and displayed. For example, the moving display symbol 798a moves from the start point 799a to the end point 799b to display a locus, and the moving display symbol 798b moves from the start point 799c to the end point 799d to display a locus. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may change the number and type of symbols forming characters based on the trajectory in accordance with the progress of the variable display game and the results derived from the variable display game. For example, when performing a symbol trajectory display corresponding to the character “K”, the gaming machine 10 displays a symbol trajectory display 796 when the jackpot reliability is 10%, and a symbol when the jackpot reliability is 50%. A trajectory display 798 can be displayed.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 performs the character display corresponding to the sound output from the sound output device in connection with the game effect in the variable display game. May be displayed. The characters to be displayed by the symbol group display or the symbol locus display are not limited to characters in a narrow sense, and may include numbers and pictograms.

  Next, the switching timing between a movie symbol and a non-movie symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a timing chart showing an example of a switching timing between a movie symbol and a non-movie symbol according to the third embodiment.

  The game control device 100 transmits a command (for example, a stop symbol command, a change pattern command, a hold command, a stop command, and the like) related to the fluctuation display to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 receives a command (for example, a stop symbol command, a variation pattern command, a hold command, etc.) relating to the start of variation display from the game control device 100, and starts the variation display of the large symbol group 731 and the small symbol group 732. . Further, effect control device 300 ends the variable display of large symbol group 731 and small symbol group 732 in accordance with a time management based on a command relating to the start of variable display or a command relating to the end of variable display (for example, a stop command).

  The timing chart TC11 shows a state in which the effect control device 300 performs a fluctuating display from the timing t11 to the timing t13 for the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and performs a stop display after the timing t13. After performing variable display (non-movie change) not depending on the movie screen from timing t11 to timing t12, effect control device 300 performs variable display (movie change) on the movie screen from timing t12 to timing t13, and after timing t13. A stop display independent of the movie screen.

  The timing chart TC12 shows the switching timing between the movie symbol and the non-movie symbol in the variable display. The effect control device 300 displays a non-movie symbol in the non-movie variation from the timing t11 to the timing t12, displays a movie symbol in the movie variation from the timing t12 to the timing t13, and displays the non-movie symbol in the stop display after the timing t13. Is displayed.

  For example, the effect control device 300 can set the first half of the variable display to be a non-movie change and the latter half of the variable display to be a movie change. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can distinguish between a variation associated with a reach effect of a large number of development steps and a variation due to a non-movie design related to determining the performance of the gaming machine 10.

  Next, a modification of the switching timing between the movie symbol and the non-movie symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a timing chart showing a modification (part 1) of the switching timing between the movie symbol and the non-movie symbol according to the third embodiment.

  The timing chart TC21 shows a state in which the effect control device 300 performs the fluctuation display from the timing t21 to the timing t24 for the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and performs the stop display after the timing t24. After performing a non-movie change from timing t21 to timing t22, effect control device 300 performs a movie change from timing t22 to timing t23, performs a non-movie change again from timing t23 to timing t24, and performs a movie screen after timing t24. Performs a stop display independent of the above.

  The timing chart TC22 shows the switching timing between the movie symbol and the non-movie symbol in the variable display. The effect control device 300 displays a non-movie symbol in the non-movie variation from the timing t21 to the timing t22, displays a movie symbol in the movie variation from the timing t22 to the timing t23, and displays the non-movie variation and the stop after the timing t23. Displays a non-movie symbol. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can secure the re-variable display period T1 from t23 to timing t24. The gaming machine 10 can easily match the movie fluctuation and the result display by securing the re-fluctuation display period T1, and further strengthens the separation between the fluctuation accompanying the reach effect and the fluctuation due to the non-movie symbol. be able to.

  Note that the effect control device 300 may use a pseudo movie symbol in the re-variation display period T1, as shown in the timing chart TC23. The pseudo movie symbol is equivalent to a movie symbol on display and equivalent to a non-movie symbol on control. That is, the effect control device 300 does not display the pseudo movie symbol by reproducing the moving image, but displays the pseudo movie symbol by the image generated in the same manner as the non-movie symbol.

  Next, another example of the switching timing between the movie symbol and the non-movie symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a timing chart showing a modified example (part 2) of the switching timing between the movie symbol and the non-movie symbol according to the third embodiment.

  The timing chart TC31 shows a state in which the effect control device 300 performs the fluctuation display from the timing t31 to the timing t33 with respect to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and performs the stop display after the timing t33. After performing a non-movie change from timing t31 to timing t32, effect controller 300 performs a movie change from timing t32 to timing t33, and performs stop display on the movie screen after timing t33.

  The timing chart TC32 shows the switching timing between the movie symbol and the non-movie symbol in the variable display. The effect control device 300 displays a non-movie symbol in a non-movie variation from the timing t31 to the timing t32, displays a movie symbol in a movie variation from the timing t32 to the timing t33, and displays a movie symbol and a stop symbol after the timing t33. Hide non-movie symbols.

  The timing chart TC33 shows the display timing of the small symbol group 732 in the variable display. The effect control device 300 displays the small symbol group 732 in the stop display period after the timing t33 in addition to the variable display period from the timing t31 to the timing t33. That is, the effect control device 300 hides the symbol corresponding to the large symbol group and displays the small symbol group 732 in the stop display after the timing t33. This eliminates the need for the gaming machine 10 to display the result mode of the symbol corresponding to the large symbol group, so that it is possible to easily match the movie fluctuation and the result display, and to avoid the fluctuation with the reach effect. It is possible to further strengthen the separation from fluctuations caused by movie symbols.

  Note that the small symbol group 732 does not necessarily need to be displayed in the variable display period from the timing t31 to the timing t33. For example, as shown in timing chart TC34, effect control device 300 may hide small symbol group 732 from timing t31 to timing t32 and display small symbol group 732 after timing t32. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clearly indicate the fluctuating display state during the movie change by the small symbol group 732, so that the degree of freedom of the effect display in the movie change can be improved, and the interest can be further improved.

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes variable display control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), voice control means (effect control device 300), and voice guidance display means (effect control device 300). The variable display control means performs variable display control of the identification information (large symbol group 601) on the display device (display device 41). The sound control means performs a game effect (a game effect related to a change display of identification information) by sound output from a sound output device (speakers 19a and 19b). The voice guidance display means displays a guidance corresponding to the voice output in a display mode of the identification information (symbol).

(2) The voice guidance display means of (1) provides guidance corresponding to voice output using characters including numbers, symbols, or pictograms.
(3) The voice guidance display means of (2) forms a character by a symbol group including two or more symbols.

(4) The voice guidance display means of (2) forms a character based on the locus of movement of one or more symbols.
(5) The voice guidance display means of (1) provides guidance corresponding to voice output in units of syllables.

(6) The voice guidance display means of (1) provides guidance corresponding to voice output in meaning units.
(7) The voice guidance display means of (1) simultaneously displays two or more guidances.
(8) The voice guidance display means of (1) displays two or more guidances with a time difference.

  (9) The voice guidance display means of (2) changes the display mode (type, size, number, arrangement, etc.) of the symbols forming characters in accordance with the progress of the variable display game and the result derived from the variable display game. change.

The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment (including the modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device (display device 41) and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300) that controls the display device to change and display identification information (symbol). The control unit switches between a variable display reproduction control (movie change) for reproducing a moving image including a variable display of identification information and a variable display generation control (non-movie change) for generating a moving image including a variable display of identification information. It is possible. The control unit displays the identification information in the first display mode (movie symbol) in the variable display reproduction control, and displays the identification information in the second display mode (non-movie symbol) in the variable display reproduction control.

(2) The control unit of (1) sets variable display generation control in the first half of variable display and variable display reproduction control in the second half of variable display.
(3) The control unit of (2) sets the identification information to be stopped and displayed after a predetermined variable display period as a second display mode.

  (4) The control unit of (2) switches from the variable display reproduction control to the variable display generation control before the predetermined variable display period elapses, and then displays the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the predetermined variable display period in the second display mode. I do.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is provided with an accessory such that a part of the display area of the display device 41 is hidden, and performs a display effect in a display area hidden by the accessory. First, an overview of the display device 41 and the accessory from a normal viewpoint from a player will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview of the display device and the accessory according to the fourth embodiment.

  The display device 41 performs various displays on the variable display game in the display area 800. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40, and the periphery of the display area is surrounded by the center case 40.

  The display area 800 includes a small symbol group 801, a special figure reserved number display 802, a large symbol group 803, and a reserved display 813 in the display content. The small symbol group 801 is displayed at a position where the player can easily observe the small symbol group 801 to clearly show the variable display state of the special figure game. The special figure reserved number display 802 is displayed at a position that is easy for the player to observe, and specifies the reserved number (starting storage number) of the special figure game. The large symbol group 803 is in charge of a main display effect regarding the variable display of the special figure game. The hold display 813 corresponds to each hold of the special figure game.

  The center case 40 includes the accessory 804 to the accessory 812 and the stage 814. Characters 804 to 812 are arranged so as to overlap a part of the display area 800. In addition, the characters 807 to 809 overlap with the display area 800 via the stage 814. It should be noted that a part or all of the accessory 804 to the accessory 812 may be a movable body whose arrangement state is not fixed (for example, the board rendering device 44) or a fixed body whose arrangement state is fixed. Is also good. In addition, a part or all of the accessory 804 to the accessory 812 may be a decorative body (for example, the board decoration device 46) that includes a light emitting body such as an LED and decorates the game board 30.

  Next, the positional relationship between the display surface of the display device 41 and the accessory 809 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship between the display surface of the display device of the fourth embodiment and the accessory.

  Since the stage 814 is located between the accessory 809 and the display surface 820 of the display device 41, the accessory 809 has a gap w1 between the accessory 809 and the display surface 820. Note that the stage 814 may allow the game ball to enter and allow the game ball to roll on the stage, or may not allow the game ball to enter. When the rolling of the game ball on the stage is allowed, the stage 814 can clearly indicate the existence of the gap w1 between the accessory 809 and the display surface 820 by the game ball rolling on the stage. Note that the gaming machine 10 uses the accessory 809 as a movable accessory, or uses another accessory (for example, the accessory 808) as a movable accessory, and thereby operates the accessory 809 via the operation of the movable accessory. The existence of the gap w1 between the display screen 820 and the display screen 820 may be specified.

  Such a gaming machine 10 enables the normal observer v1 to observe the first observation region R1 and makes it difficult to observe the second observation region R2 where the accessory 809 interferes. However, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to observe the second observation region R2 for an observer v2 who looks down at the display region 800 from below. That is, the gaming machine 10 allows the observer v2 who is interested in the second observation region R2 to observe the second observation region R2.

  Next, the positional relationship between the display element displayed in the display area 800 and the accessory 809 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. 146 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the positional relationship between the effect display element and the accessory according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the positional relationship between the effect display element and the accessory according to the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 146 (1) shows a state in which gaming machine 10 displays effect display element 822 in display area 800. The effect display element 822 is a display element that is in charge of an effect that enlivens the display content (for example, decorates it gorgeously). The accessory 809 includes a semicircular main body portion and a plurality of substantially triangular decorative portions arranged along the periphery of the main body portion, and has a shape reminiscent of “sunflower”. The effect display element 822 also has a function of decorating the accessory 809 by being displayed so as to be in contact with the outer edge of the accessory 809. Further, effect display element 822 is displayed at a position (first observation region R1) that can be observed by a normal observer (observer v1).

  The effect display element 822 is a display element that resembles a leaf. The effect display element 822 decorates the accessory 809 by changing the display mode such as shaking, changing colors, and changing the size. The advance notice of the progress and the result of the variable display game is given by the change. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can evoke the player's interest in the effect display element 822.

  FIG. 146 (2) shows a state in which gaming machine 10 displays effect display element 823 in display area 800. The effect display element 823 is one of different display modes of the effect display element 822. The effect display element 823 is displayed at a position (second observation region R2) hidden by the accessory 809 when observed by a normal observer (observer v1). Therefore, a normal observer (observer v1) cannot observe the effect display element 823.

  However, the gaming machine 10 allows the effect display element 823 to be observed by an observer (observer v2) who looks down on the display area 800 from below. In addition, the gaming machine 10 gives an advance notice of the progress and the result of the variable display game according to the display mode of the effect display element 823, so that the player is motivated to observe the effect display element 823.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can urge the observer (player) who is interested in the effect display element 823 to search for it. Further, the gaming machine 10 can give the player a sense of satisfaction in observing the effect display element 823, and further, a sense of satisfaction in the game by causing the player to take the trouble of moving the observation position. Such a gaming machine 10 can produce a new discovery by the active action of the player and entertain the player for a long period of time.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to display the effect display element 823 at a position hidden by the accessory 809 as long as the position is not observed by a normal observer (observer v1). For example, the gaming machine 10 may display the effect display element 823a at a position hidden by the accessory 810 instead of the accessory 809. The gaming machine 10 may display the effect display element 823a at a position hidden by the accessory 810 in addition to the accessory 809. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the degree of difficulty in observing the effect display element 823a, and can give a high degree of satisfaction to a player having many game experiences.

  Further, when displaying the effect display element 823, the gaming machine 10 may display a notification element 823b for notifying that the effect display element 823 is being displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide a beginner that the effect display element 823 is being displayed, and can provide an entertainment that is not restricted by the amount of gaming experience.

  FIG. 147 (1) shows a state in which gaming machine 10 displays effect display element 824 in display area 800. The effect display element 824 is displayed at a position (first observation region R1) that can be observed by a normal observer (observer v1). The effect display element 824 is a display element that resembles a flower, and is displayed in one of display modes changed from the effect display element 822.

  As described above, when changing the display mode of the effect display element 822, the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to display the effect display element 823 in a position (the second observation region R2) hidden by the accessory 809 as in the effect display element 823. . When changing the display mode of the effect display element 822, the gaming machine 10 may display the effect display element 824 at a position (first observation region R1) where the normal observer (observer v1) can observe. . Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can widely inform the player of the change in the display mode of the effect display element 822.

  FIG. 147 (2) shows a state in which gaming machine 10 displays effect display element 825 in display area 800. The effect display element 825 is one of the different display modes of the effect display element 822. The effect display element 825 is displayed at a position (second observation region R2) that is hidden by the accessory 809 when observed by a normal observer (observer v1), and an observer who looks down at the display region 800 downward ( It is displayed so as to be observable by the observer v2).

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the different display modes of the effect display element 822 at a position where it is difficult for the normal observer (observer v1) to observe, thereby arousing the observer's quest for exploration. The gaming machine 10 may display the effect display element 825a at a position hidden by the accessory 810 instead of the accessory 809. Further, the gaming machine 10 may display the effect display element 825a at a position hidden by the accessory 810 in addition to the accessory 809. Further, when displaying the effect display element 825, the gaming machine 10 may display a notification element 825b for notifying that the effect display element 825 is being displayed.

  Next, a modification of the positional relationship between the display surface of the display device 41 and the accessory 809 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example of a positional relationship between a display surface of a display device according to a modified example of the fourth embodiment and a movable accessory.

  The gaming machine 10 has a movable accessory 809 that can change the size of the gap between the gaming machine 10 and the display surface 820. The gaming machine 10 can change the size of the gap between the movable auditors 809 and the display surface 820 by operating the movable auditors 809 in accordance with a gaming state or in connection with a game effect.

  The movable object 809 shown in FIG. 148 (1) has a gap w2 between itself and the display surface 820. The normal observer v1 can observe the first observation region R1 on the display surface 820, but cannot observe the second observation region R2 due to the interference of the movable auditors 809. In addition, the observer v2 who looks down on the display area 800 can also observe the first observation area R1 on the display surface 820, but is movable because the gap w2 is not sufficiently large (narrow). The accessory 809 interferes and cannot observe the second observation region R2.

  The movable role 809 illustrated in FIG. 148 (2) has a gap w3 between the movable role 809 and the display surface 820. The normal observer v1 can observe the first observation region R1 on the display surface 820, but cannot observe the second observation region R2 due to the interference of the movable auditors 809. Further, the observer v2 who looks down at the display area 800 from the lower side can observe the first observation area R1 on the display surface 820, and the movable wrist is necessary because the gap w2 has a sufficient size (wide). The second observation region R2 can be observed without the interference of the second observation region 809.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can change the observability of the second observation region R2 by operating the movable role object 809. That is, the gaming machine 10 makes the observation of the second observation region R2 difficult by reducing the gap between the movable auditorium 809 and the display surface 820, and makes the observation of the second observation region R2 by increasing the gap. make it easier. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can control the visibility of the effect display element displayed in the second observation region R2 based on the operation state of the movable accessory 809. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest by a game effect in which the operation state of the movable accessory 809 and the display of the effect display element are linked.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device (display device 41), an accessory (accessory 809) that interferes with the display area of the display device, and a control unit (effect control device 300) that displays an effect display element on the display device. ). The control unit controls the first observation region (first observation region R1) that can be observed from the observer (observer v1) observing from the first position and the observer (observer v2) observing from the second position in the display region. ), An effect display element (effect display element 822) is displayed (FIG. 146 (1)), and an observer observing from the first position in the display area makes it difficult to observe from the second position. A second effect state (FIG. 146 (2)) in which an effect display element (effect display element 823) is displayed in a second observation area (second observation area R2) which is easy for the observer to observe.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 shown in the fifth embodiment has a large symbol group and a small symbol group as two sets of decorative symbols, and the large symbol group can be displayed in two modes of a normal symbol and a chance symbol. The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment shields a symbol that is being fluctuated by a chance display (alternative element) included in the chance symbol. First, the normal symbol and the chance symbol in the large symbol group will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol array of a large symbol group according to the fifth embodiment.

  The normal symbols in the large symbol group include symbols 830, 831, 832, 833, and 834 in the symbol array. The symbols 830, 831, 832, 833, and 834 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. The symbols 830, 831, 832, 833, and 834 are each provided on a disc-shaped base 835, which is the outer shape of the symbol, with a graphic element (eg, a character) 836 having a distinctiveness as a symbol and a character (eg, a numeral). And a character element 837 having

  The chance symbols in the large symbol group include symbols 840, 841, 842, 843, and 844 in the symbol array. The symbols 840, 841, 842, 843, and 844 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. The symbols 840, 841, 842, 843, and 844 are respectively provided on a disc-shaped base 835, which is the outer shape of the symbol, a graphic element 836 having a distinctiveness as a symbol by a graphic (eg, a character), a substitute element 845, and a concealment element. 846.

  The substitute element 845 is a display element that substitutes for the character element 837 included in the symbols 830, 831, 832, 833, and 834, and has a discriminating power that can identify the symbols 840, 841, 842, 843, and 844 as the same symbol. Have. That is, the patterns 840, 841, 842, 843, and 844 have the discriminating power of the character element 837 while retaining the discriminating power of the graphic element 836 among the discriminating powers of the patterns 830, 831, 832, 833, and 834. It is lost and replaced with the discriminating power of the substitute element 845. Note that the symbols 840, 841, 842, 843, and 844 all function as an almighty symbol because they each display an alternative element 845 having the same display mode (for example, “chance !!”). The substitute element 845 may be any element as long as it is displayed instead of the character element 837, and may take a form such as replacement, overwrite, or paste. The concealment element 846 conceals the character element 837. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 reliably hides the character element 837 while expanding the degree of freedom of the display mode (size, shape, and the like) of the alternative element 845, and the discriminating power of the alternative element 845 increases the discriminating power of the character element 837. Can be replaced.

  Next, display effects of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of the production flow of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example (Part 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fifth embodiment.

  [Production Flow F130] The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols before the start of the change in the change display game. A screen 850 shown in FIG. 151 (F130) includes a large symbol group 851, a small symbol group 852, a special figure 1 reserved number display 853, a special figure 2 reserved number display 854, a reserved display 855, and a reserved digest display 856. Are included in the display content.

  The screen 850 shows a state where the large symbol group 851 and the small symbol group 852 are stopped and displayed. The large symbol group 851 includes an upper right symbol 851a, a lower left symbol 851b, an upper left symbol 851c, a lower right symbol 851d, and a center symbol 851e. The large symbol group 851 is a first effective line that forms a winning symbol combination by a diagonally lower left line formed by an upper right symbol 851a, a lower left symbol 851b, and a center symbol 851e. In addition, the large symbol group 851 is a second effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with an upper left diagonal line formed by an upper left symbol 851c, a lower right symbol 851d, and a central symbol 851e.

  At this time, the reserved use display 856 indicates that the special figure change display game is not in the variable display state by blank display, and the hold display 855 indicates that the total reserved storage number of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is “8”. Indicates that there is. The total reserved storage number “8” indicated by the reservation display 855 is the reserved storage number “4” of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reservation number display 853 and the special figure 2 game reserved indicated by the special figure 2 reservation number display 854. This is the total number with the storage number “4”. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F131.

  [Production Flow F131] The gaming machine 10 starts variable display. A screen 858 shown in FIG. 151 (F131) indicates that the large symbol group 851 and the small symbol group 852 have started the variable display. For example, the large symbol group 851 performs variable display by rotating each symbol counterclockwise on the vertical axis, and the small symbol group 852 performs variable display by vertically scrolling each symbol from above to below. At this time, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group 851 in a semi-transparent state to increase the visibility of the background display more than the visibility of the large symbol group 851. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 secures visibility that prioritizes background display without making the small symbol group 852 translucent.

  In addition, the special figure 2 reserved number display 854 is displayed by decrementing the reserved storage number of the special figure 2 game by one, and the reserved display 855 is displayed by subtracting the reserved storage number of the special figure change display game by one. . The reserved digest display 856 indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F132.

  [Production Flow F132] The gaming machine 10 performs a fluctuation stop in the first step (1st step). In the first-stage fluctuation stop, the upper right symbol 851a and the lower left symbol 851b forming the first activated line in the large symbol group 851 are stopped, and the presence or absence of the reach in the first activated line is produced. On the screen 860 shown in FIG. 151 (F132), since the upper right symbol 851a and the lower left symbol 851b are different symbols, the occurrence of the reach on the first activated line is denied. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F133 when the upper right symbol 851a and the lower left symbol 851b are replaced with a chance symbol, and derives "losing" without replacing the upper right symbol 851a and the lower left symbol 851b with a chance symbol. The process proceeds to production flow F143. The description of the case where the “hit” is derived without replacing the upper right symbol 851a and the lower left symbol 851b with a chance symbol will be omitted.

  [Production Flow F133] The gaming machine 10 substitutes the upper right symbol 851a and the lower left symbol 851b with a chance symbol. On the screen 862 shown in FIG. 151 (F133), the alternative element 863 is attached to the upper right symbol 851a, and the alternative element 864 is attached to the lower left symbol 851b. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F134.

  [Production Flow F134] The gaming machine 10 performs a fluctuation stop in the second stage (2nd step). The fluctuation stop of the second stage stops the lower right symbol 851d forming the second effective line in the large symbol group 851. The screen 866 shown in FIG. 152 (F134) waits for the stop of the upper left symbol 851c and waits for the occurrence of the reach on the second activated line. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F135 when the lower right symbol 851d is replaced with a chance symbol, and proceeds to the effect flow F143 when deriving “losing” without replacing the lower right symbol 851d with a chance symbol. The description of the case where the “hit” is derived without substituting the lower right symbol 851d with the chance symbol will be omitted.

  [Production Flow F135] The gaming machine 10 replaces the lower right symbol 851d with a chance symbol. A screen 868 shown in FIG. 152 (F135) shows a state in which an alternative element 869 is attached to a lower right symbol 851d, and three symbols of an upper right symbol 851a, a lower left symbol 851b, and a lower right symbol 851d are replaced with a chance symbol. Note that the gaming machine 10 denies the occurrence of the reach on the second activated line without waiting for the stop of the upper left symbol 851c by attaching the substitute element 869 to the lower right symbol 851d. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F136.

  [Production Flow F136] The gaming machine 10 stops the fluctuation in the third stage (3rd step). The third-stage fluctuation stop stops the upper left symbol 851c that forms the second activated line in the large symbol group 851. The screen 870 shown in FIG. 152 (F136) produces a chance symbol replacement wait for the upper left symbol 851c. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F137 when replacing the upper left symbol 851c with a chance symbol, and proceeds to the effect flow F143 when deriving “losing” without replacing the upper left symbol 851c with a chance symbol.

  [Production Flow F137] The gaming machine 10 replaces the upper left symbol 851c with a chance symbol. A screen 87 shown in FIG. 152 (F137) has an alternative element 873 attached to an upper left symbol 851c, and four symbols of an upper right symbol 851a, a lower left symbol 851b, a lower right symbol 851d, and an upper left symbol 851c are replaced with a chance symbol. Is shown. The screen 872 shows the occurrence of the reach of the all-chance symbol in which the center symbol 851e, which is the final stop symbol, is replaced with a chance symbol, although the occurrence of the reach by the first activated line and the second activated line is denied. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F138.

  [Production Flow F138] The gaming machine 10 performs a chance symbol blocking variation 1 corresponding to the former stage of the reach variation of the all chance symbol. A screen 874 shown in FIG. 153 (F138) shows a state in which the success or failure of attaching the alternative element 875 to the center symbol 851e is produced. The substitute element 875 shown on the screen 874 is enlarged and displayed so as to hide the entire central design 851e. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can continue the variable display of the central symbol 851e hidden by the enlarged alternative element 875. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F139.

  [Production Flow F139] The gaming machine 10 performs a chance symbol shielding variation 2 corresponding to the middle stage of the reach variation of the all chance symbol. A screen 876 shown in FIG. 153 (F139) shows a state in which the success or failure of attaching the alternative element 875 to the center symbol 851e is produced. An alternative element 875 shown on the screen 876 reduces the enlargement ratio of the enlarged display that is designed to hide the entire central symbol 851e. At this time, the gaming machine 10 causes a part of the central symbol 851e to be variably displayed to face the back of the substitute element 875 being displayed in an enlarged manner. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F140.

  [Production Flow F140] The gaming machine 10 performs a chance symbol shielding variation 3 corresponding to the latter stage of the reach variation of the all chance symbol. A screen 878 shown in FIG. 153 (F140) shows a state in which the success or failure of attaching the alternative element 875 to the center symbol 851e is produced. The center symbol 851e shown on the screen 878 is stopped and displayed, and waits until the replacement element 875 is successfully pasted. At this time, the gaming machine 10 causes a part of the central symbol 851e to be stopped and displayed to face the back surface of the alternative element 875. Note that the gaming machine 10 may notify the success rate of pasting the alternative element 875 by the stop display mode of the central symbol 851e facing the back of the alternative element 875 or the variable display mode before the stop display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may notify the success rate of the attachment of the replacement element 875 by the attachment mode of the replacement element 875 (for example, the color and size of the replacement element 875, rotation, movement, and the like). The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F141 when the attachment of the substitute element 875 succeeds, and proceeds to the effect flow F143 when the attachment of the substitute element 875 fails.

  [Production Flow F141] The gaming machine 10 displays an all chance symbol. A screen 879 shown in FIG. 153 (F141) shows a state in which the substitute element is attached to all the symbols in the large symbol group 851. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F142.

  [Production Flow F142] The gaming machine 10 displays a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display. Screen 880 shown in FIG. 154 (F142) shows a state where large symbol group 851 is not displayed and small symbol group 852 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit. Further, screen 880 displays a fluctuation display result guide display 881 and a character 882. The fluctuation display result guidance display 881 and the character 882 guide that a win (for example, a big hit) has been derived as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. Note that the screen 880 displays a special figure 1 reserved number display 853 and a special figure 2 reserved number display 854, but the non-pattern is stopped when the small symbol group 852 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit. It may be displayed.

Although the gaming machine 10 has shown a case of a big hit by displaying the all chance symbol, it may be a game machine that derives a specific gaming state such as a latent change or a small hit.
[Production Flow F143] The gaming machine 10 displays “outside” as a result of the fluctuation display. The screen 884 shown in FIG. 154 (F143) shows a state in which the large symbol group 851 and the small symbol group 852 are stopped and displayed in a “missing” mode. The gaming machine 10 may stop and display the symbol replaced with the chance symbol, or may return the symbol replaced with the chance symbol to the original (normal symbol) and display it.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can display a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit by replacing each symbol with an alternative element regardless of the stop mode of each symbol in the large symbol group 851. That is, the gaming machine 10 can easily change the variable display mode corresponding to the loss to the variable display mode corresponding to the big hit by displaying the alternative element. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can realize various variable display modes without excessively increasing the processing load for diversifying the variable display modes.

  In the gaming machine 10, the special symbol as described in the second embodiment is in charge of reporting a special jackpot such as a sudden hit, and the chance symbol described in the fifth embodiment is in charge of reporting a normal jackpot. May be. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish the player from a special jackpot such as a sudden hit and a normal jackpot.

Next, a modified example of the screen displayed by the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the screen displayed by the display device of the fifth embodiment.
On the screen 886 shown in FIG. 155 (1), of the large symbol group 851, the alternative element 887 is attached to the upper right symbol 851a, the alternative element 888 is attached to the lower left symbol 851b, and the alternative element 889 is attached to the upper left symbol 851c. , Shows a state in which the substitute element 890 is attached to the lower right symbol 851d. The screen 886 shows a state in which the center symbol 851e of the large symbol group 851 is still displayed while being fluctuated.

  The alternative element 887 displays the character "hot !!!!", the alternative element 888 displays the character "???", the alternative element 889 displays the character "reach", and the alternative element 890 displays the character "chance!" !! ”is displayed. As described above, the gaming machine 10 may display the alternative element with a different character for each alternative element.

  On the screen 892 shown in FIG. 155 (2), of the large symbol group 851, the alternative element 893 is attached to the upper right symbol 851a, the alternative element 894 is attached to the lower left symbol 851b, and the alternative element 895 is attached to the upper left symbol 851c. , The alternative element 896 is attached to the lower right symbol 851d. The screen 892 shows a state in which the central symbol 851e of the large symbol group 851 is still being displayed in a fluctuating manner.

  The alternative element 893 and the alternative element 894 display the character "chance !!" in a standard size, and the alternative elements 895 and 896 display the character "chance !!" in an enlarged size. As described above, the gaming machine 10 may display the alternative element in a different size for each alternative element. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may notify the possibility of deriving the specific variable display result by the size, the number, the combination of the sizes, and the like of the alternative elements.

  On the screen 898 shown in FIG. 155 (3), of the large symbol group 851, the alternative element 899 is attached to the upper right symbol 851a, the alternative element 900 is attached to the lower left symbol 851b, and the alternative element 901 is attached to the upper left symbol 851c. , The alternative element 902 is attached to the lower right symbol 851d. The screen 898 shows a state in which the center symbol 851e of the large symbol group 851 is still being displayed in a fluctuating manner.

  The alternative element 899 and the alternative element 900 display the character “chance !!” at the normal position (horizontal direction), and the alternative element 901 and the alternative element 902 display the character “chance !!” at the non-normal position (with inclination). To display. As described above, the gaming machine 10 may display the alternative element at a different position and orientation for each alternative element. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may notify the possibility of deriving a specific variable display result based on the position, inclination, or the like of the substitute element.

  The screen 904 shown in FIG. 155 (4) is such that, in the large symbol group 851, the alternative element 905 is attached to the upper right symbol 851a, the alternative element 906 is attached to the lower left symbol 851b, and the alternative elements 907 and 908 are attached to the upper left symbol 851c. This shows that the alternative elements 909, 910, and 911 are attached to the lower right symbol 851d. The screen 904 shows a state in which the center symbol 851e of the large symbol group 851 is still being displayed in a fluctuating manner.

  The upper right symbol 851a and the lower left symbol 851b each display one alternative element, the upper left symbol 851c displays two alternative elements, and the lower right symbol 851d displays three alternative elements. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 may display a different number of alternative elements for each symbol constituting the large symbol group 851.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify the derivability (reliability) of a specific variable display result based on the display mode (character content, size, position, orientation, number, etc.) of the alternative element. Further, the gaming machine 10 may determine the display mode of the substitute element in relation to the stop order of the symbols constituting the large symbol group 851. According to this, the gaming machine 10 can give a notice (for example, a step-up notice or the like) using an alternative element in accordance with the stop order of the symbols constituting the large symbol group 851.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment has a large symbol group and a small symbol group as two sets of decorative symbols. The large symbol group includes a character symbol and a non-character symbol. In the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a symbol (figure element) included in a character symbol is used to block a symbol being displayed while being fluctuated. First, a character symbol and a non-character symbol in the large symbol group will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol array of a large symbol group according to the sixth embodiment.

  The character design and the non-character design in the large design group constitute the same design arrangement. The large symbol group includes symbols 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, and 926 in a symbol array, of which symbols 920, 921, 922, 923, and 924 correspond to character symbols, and symbols 925 and 926 are non-character symbols. It corresponds to a design.

  The gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot by combining the same character symbols, and derives a jackpot when all symbols are character symbols, even if the symbols are different, that is, when the symbol combination does not include a non-character symbol. . Also, the gaming machine 10 derives a big hit for a part of the non-character symbols by a combination of the same symbols, but does not derive a big hit for the rest of the non-character symbols by a combination of the same symbols. Also, the gaming machine 10 does not derive a big hit even if all the symbols are non-character symbols with different symbols.

  The symbols 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, and 926 can be distinguished from other character symbols and non-character symbols by different display modes. Each of the symbols 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, and 926 is provided with a graphic element 928 having a distinctiveness as a symbol by a graphic (for example, a character) on a rectangular base 927 which is an outer shape of the symbol.

  The character designs (designs 920, 921, 922, 923, and 924) display people (for example, boys and girls), animals (for example, tigers and lions), objects (for example, rockets), and the like as graphic elements 928. The non-character designs 925 and 926 display characters (for example, “S”) and pictograms (for example, “heart mark”) as graphic elements 928. The non-character symbol 925 is a symbol from which a big hit can be derived by a combination of the same symbols, and the non-character symbol 926 is a symbol from which a big hit cannot be derived by a combination of the same symbols (blank symbol).

  Next, the display of the large symbol group on the display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of display of a large symbol group on the display device according to the sixth embodiment. The display device 41 displays the large symbol group 930 with three-digit symbols arranged in a horizontal line. The display device 41 displays three cubic symbol display bodies 931L, 931C, and 931R in a horizontal row. The symbol display bodies 931L, 931C, and 931R rotate vertically with a rotation axis penetrating the side surface, and display symbols 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, and 926 on each surface that appears during rotation. The gaming machine 10 performs a variable display of a large symbol group by sequentially switching symbols 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926 displayed on each surface of the symbol display body.

  The symbol display bodies 931L, 931C, 931R include stop symbol display surfaces 932L, 932C, 932R and next symbol display surfaces 933L, 933C, 933R. The stop symbol display surfaces 932L, 932C, and 932R are surfaces for displaying a stop symbol when the stop display is performed, and the next symbol display surfaces 933L, 933C, and 933R are symbols that are displayed on the stop symbol display surfaces 932L, 932C, and 932R. This is the surface that displays the next symbol. The symbol display bodies 931L, 931C, 931R switch the next symbol display surfaces 933L, 933C, 933R facing the front due to rotation fluctuation to the stop symbol display surfaces 932L, 932C, 932R, and change the newly displayed surface to the next symbol display surface. 933L, 933C, and 933R. The stop symbol display surfaces 932L, 932C, 932R and the next symbol display surfaces 933L, 933C, 933R display any of the symbols 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926.

  For example, the symbol display body 931L displays the symbol 926 on the stop symbol display surface 932L, and displays the symbol 925 on the next symbol display surface 933L. Further, the symbol display body 931C displays the symbol 920 on the stop symbol display surface 932C, and displays the symbol 926 on the next symbol display surface 933C. The symbol display body 931R displays the symbol 925 on the stop symbol display surface 932R, and displays the symbol 921 on the next symbol display surface 933L. At this time, the next symbol display surfaces 933L, 933C, 933R guide the type of the symbol by the amount of protrusion from the display surface. The symbol 925 displayed on the next symbol display surface 933L protrudes by the height h from the next symbol display surface 933L, and the symbol 926 displayed on the next symbol display surface 933C is depressed by the depth d from the next symbol display surface 933C. (I.e., protruding by height "-d"). As a result, the gaming machine 10 guides the non-character symbol in such a manner that the symbol that can derive the big hit and the symbol that cannot derive the big hit can be easily distinguished. Also, the gaming machine 10 may guide the type of the symbol based on the amount of protrusion from the display surface in the character symbol. The gaming machine 10 may notify the expected value of the symbol stop or the expected value for the derived result instead of guiding the type of the symbol based on the amount of protrusion from the display surface.

  Next, display effects of the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect flow of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the sixth embodiment.

  [Production Flow F150] The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols before the start of the change in the change display game. A screen 950 shown in FIG. 159 (F150) includes a large symbol group 930, a small symbol group 952, a special figure 1 reserved number display 953, a special figure 2 reserved number display 954, a reserved display 955, and a reserved digest display 956. Are included in the display content.

  The screen 950 shows a state where the large symbol group 930 and the small symbol group 952 are stopped and displayed. The large symbol group 930 includes a symbol indicator 931L (left symbol), a symbol indicator 931C (middle symbol), and a symbol indicator 931R (right symbol). The large symbol group 930 sets a horizontal line formed by three symbols as an effective line that forms a winning symbol combination.

  At this time, the reserved digest display 956 indicates that the special figure change display game is not in the variable display state by blank display, and the hold display 955 indicates that the total reserved storage number of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is “8”. Indicates that there is. The total reserved storage number “8” indicated by the reservation display 955 is the reserved storage number “4” of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reservation number display 953 and the special figure 2 game reserved indicated by the special figure 2 reservation number display 954. This is the total number with the storage number “4”. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F151.

  [Production Flow F151] The gaming machine 10 starts the variable display. A screen 958 shown in FIG. 159 (F151) indicates that the large symbol group 930 and the small symbol group 952 have started the variable display. For example, in the large symbol group 930, each symbol fluctuates and displays by rotating the horizontal axis vertically, and in the small symbol group 952, each symbol fluctuates and displays by vertical scrolling from the upper direction to the lower direction. At this time, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group 930 in a semi-transparent state to enhance the visibility of the background display more than the visibility of the large symbol group 930. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 secures visibility that prioritizes background display without making the small symbol group 952 translucent.

  In addition, the special figure 2 reservation number display 954 is displayed by reducing the storage number of the special figure 2 game by one, and the reservation display 955 is displayed by reducing the reservation storage number of the special figure change display game by one. . The reserved digest display 956 indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F152 when the game reaches the reach, and proceeds to the effect flow F157 when the game machine 10 does not reach the reach and becomes “losing”.

  [Direction Flow F152] The gaming machine 10 develops to reach. On the screen 960 shown in FIG. 159 (F152), the symbol display 931L displays the character symbol (the symbol 920), the symbol display 931R displays the character symbol (the symbol 922), and the symbol indicator 931C rotates and fluctuates. The state during the display is shown. That is, the screen 960 indicates a reach state of a symbol combination (all character symbols) in which all symbols become character symbols when the symbol display object 931C is stopped and displayed with a character symbol. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F153.

  [Effect Flow F153] The gaming machine 10 performs a character pattern shielding variation 1 corresponding to the former stage of the reach variation of the all-character design. A screen 962 shown in FIG. 159 (F153) shows a state in which the success or failure of attaching the character 963 (graphic element 928) to the stop symbol display surface 932C of the symbol display body 931C is produced. The character 963 shown on the screen 962 is enlarged and displayed so as to hide the entire symbol display 931C. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can continue the variable display of the symbol display body 931C hidden by the enlarged character 963. Note that the gaming machine 10 may display the character 963 in a semi-transparent manner in order to clearly indicate that the symbol display body 931C is in a variable display state. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can produce a success or failure of attaching the character 963 to the stop symbol display surface 932C, while clearly indicating that the symbol display body 931C is in the variable display. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F154.

  [Production Flow F154] The gaming machine 10 performs a character design shielding variation 2 corresponding to the latter stage of the reach variation of the all-character design. A screen 964 shown in FIG. 160 (F154) shows a state in which the success or failure of attaching the character 963 to the stop symbol display surface 932C of the symbol display body 931C is produced. The symbol display body 931C shown in the screen 962 shows a state of waiting for the successful attachment of the character 963 to the stop symbol display surface 932C while performing variable display. The enlarged display of the character 963 is gradually released, and a part of the symbol display body 931C comes to face from the back side.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may notify the success rate of pasting of the character 963 by the variable display mode of the symbol display body 931C facing the back of the character 963. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify the success rate of the pasting of the character 963 by the pasting mode of the character 963 (for example, the color and size of the character 963, rotation, pulsation, and the like). The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F155 when the attachment of the character 963 is successful, and proceeds to the effect flow F157 when the attachment of the character 963 fails.

  [Production Flow F155] The gaming machine 10 displays an all-character design. A screen 966 shown in FIG. 160 (F155) shows a state where all the symbols in the large symbol group 930 are character symbols. The character 963 affixed to the symbol display body 931C overwrites the stop display (graphic element 928) of the symbol display body 931C, and thus functions as a substitute graphic element that replaces the stopped and displayed graphic element. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F156.

  [Production Flow F156] The gaming machine 10 displays a hit (big hit) as a result of the fluctuation display. The screen 968 shown in FIG. 160 (F156) shows a state where the large symbol group 930 is not displayed and the small symbol group 952 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit. The screen 968 also displays a fluctuation display result guide display 969 and a character 970. The fluctuation display result guidance display 969 and the character 970 guide that a win (for example, a big hit) has been derived as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. Note that the screen 968 displays a special figure 1 reserved number display 953 and a special figure 2 reserved number display 954, but when the small symbol group 952 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit, a non-display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Although the gaming machine 10 has shown a case in which a big hit is displayed by displaying the all-character design, the gaming machine 10 may derive a specific gaming state such as a latent probability change or a small hit.
[Production Flow F157] The gaming machine 10 displays “out” as a result of the fluctuation display. The screen 972 shown in FIG. 160 (F157) shows a state in which the large symbol group 930 and the small symbol group 952 are stopped and displayed in the “missing” mode. The gaming machine 10 displays the “missing” mode of the large symbol group 930 by displaying, for example, a blank symbol 926 (see FIG. 156), which is a non-character symbol, on the stop symbol display surface 932C.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can display a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit by overwriting the stop symbol display surface 932C with the character 963 regardless of the stop mode of the stop symbol display surface 932C of the large symbol group 930. That is, the gaming machine 10 can easily change the variable display mode corresponding to the loss to the variable display mode corresponding to the big hit by overwriting with the character 970. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can realize various variable display modes without excessively increasing the processing load for diversifying the variable display modes.

  In the gaming machine 10, the special symbol as described in the second embodiment is in charge of reporting a special jackpot such as a sudden hit, and the character symbol described in the sixth embodiment is in charge of reporting a normal jackpot. May be. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish the player from a special jackpot such as a sudden hit and a normal jackpot.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the modification) and the sixth embodiment has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). When the identification information (large symbol groups 851 and 930) is variably displayed including the first identification element (the character element 837 and the graphic element 928), the control unit replaces the first identification element with the second identification element (alternative). A specific display result (almighty symbol: all chance symbol, all character symbol) is derived by substituting with element 845, alternative graphic element.

(2) The control means of (1) hides the first identification element and displays the second identification element.
(3) The control means of (2) superimposes the second identification element on the first identification element.

(4) The control means of (2) updates the first identification element with the second identification element.
(5) In the process of substituting the first identification element with the second identification element, the control means of (1) superimposes and displays the second identification element on the first identification element during the variable display.

(6) The control means of (5) displays the second identification element, which is displayed by being superimposed on the first identification element, in a translucent manner, and displays the first identification element and the second identification element. .
(7) The control means of (1) reports the possibility of deriving a specific variable display result by the display mode (character content, size, position, direction, number, etc.) of the second identification element.

(8) When the identification information is represented by two or more symbol combinations, the control means of (7) determines the display mode of the second identification element in relation to the stop sequence of the symbols.
[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment has a small hit and a big hit as hits. Also, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment has two big winning openings, one big winning opening is opened in the first round of the big hit and the small hit, and the other is opened after the second round of the big hit. Open the special winning opening.

First, a gaming board according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the seventh embodiment.
The gaming board 1000 is provided in the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. In addition, about the same structure as the game board 1000 and the game board 30 of 1st Embodiment, the code | symbol is the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The game board 1000 is provided with a general-purpose starting gate 34 on the right side of the center area 40 in the game area 32. The game ball that has won the general-purpose starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3). In the gaming board 1000, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, the gaming board 1000 is provided with a start winning port 36 (first start winning port, start winning area) below the center case 40 in the game area 32. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3). Further, the gaming board 1000 is provided with an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) immediately below the starting winning opening 36. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

  Further, the gaming board 1000 has a first special variable winning device (first large winning opening) 1001 on the left side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 and above the starting winning opening 36. Further, the gaming board 1000 has a second special variable winning device (second large winning opening) 38 disposed below the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 and to the right of the starting winning opening 36.

  In addition, the game board 1000 includes, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, board effect devices 44 (44L, 44R) that perform a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 161 toward the center of the display device 41.

  The first special fluctuation winning device 1001 has a wing-shaped movable piece 1002 that can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the left, and as a result of a special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. As a result, the first special variable winning device 1001 is converted from a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 1001 is opened and closed by a movable piece 1002 driven by, for example, a special winning opening solenoid (not shown) as a driving device similar to the special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3). Equipped with one big winning opening, during the special gaming state and the small hitting gaming state, the first big winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, so that the game balls can easily flow into the first big winning opening. And a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 1001 is detected by a first special winning opening switch (not shown because it is the same as the special winning opening switch 38a).

  The second special fluctuation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling to the front side, and is a result of a special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on the situation, the closed state of the second special winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state. That is, the second special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a second special winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing door 38c driven by a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3). By converting the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of game balls into the second special winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value is given to the player. Note that the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening are exclusively opened.

  The first special variable winning device 1001 is a winning opening that is opened in the first round of the big hit and the small hit, and the second special variable winning device 38 is a winning opening that is opened in the second round and the subsequent of the big hit. . The first special variable winning device 1001 is distinguished from another large winning device (the second special variable winning device 38) by designing the first special variable winning device 1001 to also serve as a small winning winning port, like a starting winning port. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player of the value of the first special variable winning device 1001 and the value of the second special variable winning device 38. Further, the gaming machine 10 can restrain the player from having excessive expectation for the value of the first special variable winning device 1001.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the left area of the center case 40 is defined as the left gaming area in the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, and the right area of the center case 40 is defined as the right gaming area. It is a game area. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), whereby the first special variable winning device 1001 and the starting winning port 36 can be aimed at winning, and the right game can be achieved. By firing the game ball to the area (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize to the general-purpose starting gate 34, the normal variable prize device 37, and the second special variable prize device 38.

  The gaming machine 10 arranges the first special variable winning device 1001 in the left game area, so that when the first big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the opened state, the player does not change the way of hitting. The game balls can easily flow into the first big winning opening. In addition, the gaming machine 10 arranges the first special variable winning device 1001 adjacent to the display device 41 so that the player can understand the game effect in which the first special variable winning device 1001 and the display device 41 cooperate. It can be done easily.

  Next, display effects of the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 175. FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of an effect flow of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 163 is a view showing an example (part 2) of an effect flow of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 164 is a view showing an example (part 3) of an effect flow of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 165 is a view showing an example (part 4) of an effect flow of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 5) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 171 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 6) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 7) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 8) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 9) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 10) of a screen displayed by the display device of the seventh embodiment.

  [Production Flow F160] The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols before the start of the change in the change display game. A screen 1100 shown in FIG. 166 (F160) includes a large symbol group 1101, a small symbol group 1102, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1103, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1104, a reserved display 1105, and a reserved digest display 1106. Are included in the display content.

  The screen 1100 shows a state where the large symbol group 1101 and the small symbol group 1102 are stopped and displayed. The large symbol group 1101 includes a left symbol 1101L, a middle symbol 1101C, and a right symbol 1101R. The large symbol group 1101 is a line of horizontal lines formed by the left symbol 1101L, the middle symbol 1101C, and the right symbol 1101R, as an effective line for forming a winning symbol combination.

  At this time, the reserved use display 1106 indicates that the special figure change display game is not in the variable display state by blank display, and the hold display 1105 indicates that the total reserved storage number of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is “8”. Indicates that there is. The total reserved storage number “8” indicated by the reservation display 1105 is the reserved storage number “4” of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reservation number display 1103 and the special figure 2 game reserved indicated by the special figure 2 reservation number display 1104 This is the total number with the storage number “4”. When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F161.

  [Production Flow F161] The gaming machine 10 starts the variable display. A screen 1108 shown in FIG. 166 (F161) indicates that the large symbol group 1101 and the small symbol group 1102 have started the variable display. For example, the large symbol group 1101 performs a variable display by vertically scrolling each symbol from an upper direction to a lower direction. In the small symbol group 1102, each symbol is fluctuated by vertical scrolling from upward to downward. At this time, the gaming machine 10 sets the large symbol group 1101 in a semi-transparent state so that the visibility of the background display is higher than the visibility of the large symbol group 1101. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 secures visibility that prioritizes background display without making the small symbol group 1102 translucent.

  In addition, the special figure 2 reserved number display 1104 is displayed by reducing the reserved number of the special figure 2 game by one, and the reserved display 1105 is displayed by subtracting the reserved number of the special figure change display game by one. . The reserved digest display 1106 indicates that the special figure change display game is in the change display state. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F162 when deriving a loss, and proceeds to the effect flow F163 when deriving a hit. Further, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F164 when deriving the small hit or a part of the big hit.

  [Production Flow F162] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation display result. On the screen 1110 shown in FIG. 166 (F162), the large symbol group 1101 swings up and down temporarily in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, and temporarily stops and is displayed, and the small symbol group 1102 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss. Shows the status of The large symbol group 1101 may be stopped and displayed like the small symbol group 1102.

  [Effect Flow F163] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation display result. On a screen 1112 shown in FIG. 166 (F163), the large symbol group 1101 swings up and down temporarily in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a hit, and temporarily stops and is displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to the small symbol group 1102 as a hit. Shows the status of The large symbol group 1101 may be stopped and displayed like the small symbol group 1102.

  [Production Flow F164] The gaming machine 10 displays symbols in the reach state. A screen 1114 shown in FIG. 167 (F164) shows the left symbol 1101L and the right symbol 1101R of the large symbol group 1101 swinging up and down to temporarily stop and display the reach state in which the middle symbol 1101C is changing. At this time, the small symbol group 1102 shows a state where the small symbol group 1102 fluctuates at a uniform speed. In addition, the screen 1114 clearly indicates occurrence of the reach by the guidance display 1115. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F165.

  [Production Flow F165] The gaming machine 10 displays a stop display mode of the large symbol group 1101 including the exclusive symbol. The screen 1116 shown in FIG. 167 (F165) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1101 is stopped and displayed in the symbol combination mode including the special symbol “pole chance” on the middle symbol 1101C.

  At this time, the small symbol group 1102 shows a state in which the small symbol group 1102 is stopped and displayed with a symbol combination that becomes a big hit or a symbol combination that becomes a small hit. Note that the exclusive symbol "extra chance" is an exclusive symbol in the seventh embodiment, and is a symbol having a guide function for guiding the progress of the game of the variable display game, similarly to the exclusive symbol described in the second embodiment. It is one form. In other words, the special symbol "extra chance" guides the start of the display effect "extreme opportunity" performed when deriving the small hit or a part of the big hit. Thereby, the player can feel that the result of the special figure variable display game is a small hit or a big hit.

  Further, the exclusive symbol “pole opening chance” is a symbol having a design based on the first special variable winning device 1001. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 has a function of guiding the operation of the first special variable winning device 1001 to the player by the stop display of the special symbol “pole start chance”. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can provide guidance on the progress of the game, the game result, and the like during the variable display using the special symbol. However, the special symbol “extreme chance” has a different point from the design of the first special variable prize winning device 1001 because the design as a symbol is emphasized. For example, the special symbol “extra chance” displays the characters “extreme” and the character “chance”, but the first special variable prize winning device 1001 does not have such a character display.

  The screen 1116 displays a normal symbol "3", a special symbol "extreme chance", and a normal symbol "3" in the large symbol group 1101 in the order of a left symbol 1101L, a middle symbol 1101C, and a right symbol 1101R. The group 1102 displays a stop mode (for example, “2”, “4”, “1”) from the left corresponding to a small hit or a part of a big hit.

  The gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the special symbol “extreme chance”. A screen 1118 shown in FIG. 167 (F165a) displays a guide display 1119 obtained by converting the exclusive symbol "pole start chance" into a design substantially similar to that of the first special variable winning device 1001. That is, the gaming machine 10 removes the character “chance” from the special symbol “pole start chance”, removes the character “pole” from the character “pole start”, and changes the display mode of the character “start” to the first special. The design is the same as that of the variable winning device 1001. The screen 1118 continues the display by moving the characters “pole” and “chance” to the corners in the display area.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 displays on the display device 41 a guidance display 1119 similar to the first special variable prize winning device 1001 located on the left side of the display device 41. At this time, the gaming machine 10 synchronizes the light emission mode of the first special variable prize winning device 1001 with the display mode of the guide display 1119 in order to clarify the correspondence between the first special variable prize winning device 1001 and the guidance display 1119. May be changed. For example, when the gaming machine 10 decorates the first special variable winning device 1001 with an LED that emits red light, the gaming display 10 displays the guidance display 1119 in red, and decorates the first special variable winning device 1001 with an LED that emits blue light. At this time, the guidance display 1119 is displayed in blue. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily notify the player of the correspondence between the first special variable winning device 1001 and the guidance display 1119.

  The gaming machine 10 may display a screen 1120 shown in FIG. 167 (F165b) on the display device 41 in order to more reliably guide the player of the correspondence between the first special variable winning device 1001 and the guidance display 1119. it can. The screen 1120 shows a state in which the guidance display 1119 is moved and displayed in a direction approaching the first special fluctuation winning device 1001. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can more reliably notify the player of the correspondence between the first special variable winning device 1001 and the guidance display 1115.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 moves and displays the guidance display 1119 in a direction approaching the first special variable prize winning device 1001 and then performs a display effect (assimilation display rendering) in which the guidance display 1119 is assimilated with the first special variable prize winning device 1001. ) May be performed. For example, as an assimilation display effect, the gaming machine 10 scrolls out the guidance display 1119 out of the display area of the display device 41, and then performs flash display in a display area close to the first special variable winning device 1001. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may perform not only the display effect on the display device 41, but also a decorative effect for decorating the first special variable winning device 1001 and a sound effect by sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 realizes a guide display function of guiding a player how to hit by the guide display 1119 or the moving display of the guide display 1119. In particular, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player how to hit with continuity with the special figure variation display by realizing the guidance display function in a display mode based on the exclusive symbol “pole opening chance”. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays a special symbol “extreme start chance” in the temporary symbol display mode of the large symbol group 1101, thereby opening the first special winning opening device 1001 for opening the first special variable winning device 1001 (first special winning opening). It is possible to notify (suggest) the execution of the effect that guides the possibility of opening the variable winning device 1001). Note that, in one aspect, such a gaming machine 10 realizes a multi-stage notification function by using the execution of the first special winning opening opening effect as a first-stage notification and realizing a guidance display function as a second-stage notification. The multi-stage notification function realized by the gaming machine 10 is not limited to two stages, and may be configured by three or more stages. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the guidance of how to hit the player more reliable, and can make the player feel the interest in multiple stages. After moving and displaying the guidance display 1119, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F166.

  [Production Flow F166] The gaming machine 10 executes a pole chance production. The effect display in the pole chance effect is shown after the effect flow F167. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F167.

  [Production Flow F167] The gaming machine 10 displays the title character “pole chance”. The screen 1122 shown in FIG. 168 (F167) forms the title character 1123 indicating the production name by moving the characters "pole" and the character "chance" displayed at the corner in the display area to the center. To display. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F168.

  [Production Flow F168] The gaming machine 10 displays a cup as the background of the title character “Koku Chance”. A screen 1124 shown in FIG. 168 (F168) displays a background 1125 of the title character 1123. The screen 1124 displays a background 1125 indicating that the cup is rising and expanding. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F169.

  [Production Flow F169] The gaming machine 10 switches the display content of the display device 41 from the title display of the extreme chance production to the production content display (cup / crown switching display). The screen 1126 shown in FIG. 168 (F169) fades out the title display 1123 and fades in the content display while switching the background 1125 (cup display). For example, the screen 1126 spreads ripples on the surface of the cup to disturb and erase the title character "Koku Chance", and displays a cloon inside the cup instead of the title character "Koku Chance". The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F170.

  [Effect Flow F170] The gaming machine 10 switches the display content of the display device 41 to the effect content display (Clown display). The screen 1128 shown in FIG. 168 (F170) displays the clown 1129 as the effect content display. The clune 1129 has three holes 1130, 1131, and 1132 in which a game ball can enter a dish-shaped concave surface, and distributes a game ball rolling on the concave surface to one of the three holes 1130, 1131, 1132. The clune 1129 has one hole 1130 located on the near side as a hit hole, and the two holes 1131 and 1132 located on the far side as detached holes. Therefore, the clune 1129 can produce a lottery process and notify the lottery result. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F171.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may notify the expected degree of the lottery result by the display mode of the clune 1129. For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify that the expected value is low (for example, 33%) when the color of the clune 1129 is red, and report that the expected value is high (for example, 90%) when the clune 1129 has a cherry pattern. it can. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify the expectation degree of the lottery result by the display mode of the holes 1130, 1131, 1132 (for example, the position, number, size, etc. of the hit holes).

  [Production Flow F171] The gaming machine 10 performs a description display (game description display 1) for explaining a success (big hit) mode of the extreme chance production. A screen 1134 shown in FIG. 169 (F171) displays a character explanation 1135 and an operation explanation 1136. The screen 1134 displays the character "Big hit if it gets closer to V!" As the character description 1135, and indicates that a big hit if the game ball enters the hole 1130 in front. The screen 1134 displays, as an operation explanation 1136, an animation of how the game ball rolls on the concave surface of the clune 1129 and enters the hole 1130 which is a hit hole. The screen 1134 may repeatedly display the operation explanation 1136. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F172.

  [Effect Flow F172] The gaming machine 10 performs an explanation display (game explanation display 2) for explaining a gaming procedure of a pole chance effect. A screen 1138 shown in FIG. 169 (F172) displays a character 1139 and game procedure explanations 1140, 1141, 1142. The screen 1138 guides the player to a target place according to the display mode of the character 1139 (for example, the direction of the face or the line of sight). The screen 1138 displays the characters “Aim for the beginning!” As the game procedure explanations 1140 and 1141. At this time, the game procedure description 1140 makes the character “start” the same as a part of the design of the first special variable winning device 1001 to facilitate the understanding of the player. Also, the screen 1138 shows the position of the first special variable winning device 1001 according to the game procedure description 1142. Further, the gaming machine 10 illuminates the first special variable winning device 1001. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can further facilitate the player's understanding of the gaming procedure of the extreme chance production.

  The gaming machine 10 realizes a guidance display function for guiding a player to how to play by displaying the game procedure description 1140, 1141, 1142. In particular, the gaming machine 10 realizes a high guidance effect by guiding the player how to hit after the explanation of the success (big hit) mode of the extreme chance production.

  Further, when the gaming machine 10 realizes the guidance display function by displaying the game procedure explanation 1140, 1141, 1142, the gaming machine 10 may operate the board production device 44R to the left to notify the player that the player is aiming. Good. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 can operate the board effect device 44L in the right direction when notifying the player that the player is aiming in the right direction. In order to make the player aim in the left direction, the gaming machine 10 operates the board effect device 44R in the left direction (push operation), and moves the board effect device 44R that has been operating in the left direction in advance in the right direction. An operation (pull-in operation) may be performed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of the effect and further surely guide the player how to hit.

  The gaming machine 10 converts the first special variable winning device 1001 to the open state after or while displaying the explanation for explaining the gaming procedure of the pole chance effect. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F173 when detecting the winning of the game ball to the first special variable winning device 1001 in the predetermined period, and detects the winning of the game ball to the first special variable winning device 1001 in the predetermined period. If not, the flow proceeds to effect flow F186.

  [Effect Flow F173] The gaming machine 10 executes an effect at the time of the very first winning. The pole start winning presentation is a pole chance presentation that is executed when a winning of a game ball to the first special variable winning device 1001 is detected during a predetermined period. The effect display in the effect at the very beginning of the prize is shown after the effect flow F174. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F174.

  [Effect Flow F174] The gaming machine 10 displays the cloon effect display 1 and starts an effect at the time of the first win. A screen 1144 shown in FIG. 169 (F174) displays a clean 1129. The screen 1144 displays a game ball 1137 that jumps into the screen from the upper left of the screen and rolls on the concave surface of the clune 1129 (Clune effect display 1). Note that the gaming machine 10 may notify the degree of expectation of the lottery result by the display mode of the gaming ball 1137. For example, the gaming machine 10 reports that the expected value is low (for example, 33%) when the color of the gaming ball 1137 is silver, and that the expected value is high (for example, 90%) when the color of the gaming ball 1137 is gold. Can be informed. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F175.

  [Production Flow F175] The gaming machine 10 displays a clown production display 2. A screen 1146 shown in FIG. 169 (F175) displays a game ball 1137 rolling the clune 1129 clockwise. The screen 1146 displays a game ball 1137 that slowly rolls the clune 1129 at a reduced speed. The game ball 1137 moves toward the center of the clune 1129 by decreasing the radius of rotation as the speed decreases. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F176.

  [Effect Flow F176] The gaming machine 10 displays a V-hole winning incitement effect. Screen 1148 shown in FIG. 170 (F176) is a display screen of a V-hole winning stir effect. The screen 1148 enlarges and displays the clune 1129 together with the effect, and inspires whether or not the game ball 1137 wins a hole 1130 (V hole). On the screen 1150 shown in FIG. 170 (F176a), the game ball 1137 is displayed in a stationary manner, and it is further inspired whether or not the game ball 1137 wins a hole 1130 (V hole). The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F177 when the gaming ball 1137 does not win the hole 1130 (V hole), and proceeds to the effect flow F180 when the gaming ball 1137 wins the hole 1130 (V hole).

  [Production Flow F177] The gaming machine 10 displays a V-hole winning failure production. A screen 1152 shown in FIG. 170 (F177) shows a state where the game ball 1137 is kicking the hole 1130 (V-hole) and heading to the hole 1132 (missing hole). A screen 1154 shown in FIG. 170 (F177a) shows a state in which the game ball 1137 is swallowed by the hole 1132 (a hole) and becomes “out”. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F178 when the cloon effect fails (out), and proceeds to the effect flow F182 when the gaming ball 1137 kicks the hole 1132 (out hole) and heads again to the hole 1130 (V hole). move on.

  [Production Flow F178] The gaming machine 10 makes a disappointment display. The screen 1156 shown in FIG. 171 (F178) fades out the clune 1129 and displays a pole chance effect failure message 1157. The pole chance production failure message 1157 displays the character “sorry”. Note that the gaming machine 10 notifies that the result of the special figure change display game has been a small hit due to the extreme chance effect failure. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F179.

  [Production Flow F179] The gaming machine 10 returns to the normal screen. Screen 1158 shown in FIG. 171 (F179) is a normal screen switched from screen 1156 by crossfading. When there is a hold storage, the gaming machine 10 performs the following change display.

  [Effect Flow F180] The gaming machine 10 displays a V-hole winning success effect. A screen 1160 shown in FIG. 171 (F180) shows a state where the game ball 1137 wins a hole 1130 (V hole). After displaying the V-hole winning success effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F181.

  [Production Flow F181] The gaming machine 10 performs a great success display. The screen 1162 shown in FIG. 171 (F181) fades out the clune 1129 and displays a pole chance effect success message 1163 and a character 1164. The pole chance production success message 1163 displays the character “great success”. In addition, the character 1164 guides the extreme chance production success by the display mode (for example, facial expression, gesture, etc.). In this way, the gaming machine 10 guides the player to the pole chance production success using the pole chance production success message 1163 and the character 1164. In addition, the gaming machine 10 notifies that the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit due to the success of the extreme chance effect. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the production flow F183 after guiding the pole chance production success.

  [Effect Flow F182] The gaming machine 10 displays a V-hole winning revival effect. A screen 1166 shown in FIG. 172 (F182) shows a state where the gaming ball 1137 goes to the hole 1130 (V hole) by kicking the hole 1132 (out hole). After displaying the V-hole winning revival effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F180. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 produces a failed production (production flow F177), a successful production (production flow F180), and a successful production through the resurrection production (production flow F177 through the production flow F182 to the production flow F180) in the Kroon production. Prepare

  [Production Flow F183] The gaming machine 10 performs a fanfare production display. The screen 1168 shown in FIG. 172 (F183) fades out the great success display and displays the big hit message 1169 and the character 1170. The big hit message 1169 displays the character “big hit”. In addition, the character 1170 guides a big hit according to a display mode (for example, a facial expression or a gesture). In this manner, the gaming machine 10 guides the player to the big hit with the big hit message 1169 and the character 1170. After guiding the big hit, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F184.

  [Production Flow F184] The gaming machine 10 performs a big hit production display. The screen 1172 shown in FIG. 172 (F184) displays the number of prize balls to be acquired as the big hit effect 1173. The big hit effect 1173 indicates that the number of prize balls to be acquired is 1000 by, for example, the character “1000 get”. After performing the big hit effect display, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F185.

  [Production Flow F185] The gaming machine 10 performs a right-handed instruction production display. A screen 1174 shown in FIG. 172 (F185) displays game procedure explanations 1175 and 1176. The screen 1174 displays, as a game procedure explanation 1175, an image showing a state where a game ball is driven into the right game area. Also, the screen 1174 displays the character “Aim at the right” as the game procedure explanation 1176. Further, the gaming machine 10 illuminates the second special variable winning device 38. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the understanding of the player of the big hit game. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 continues the big hit operation until a predetermined round.

  [Effect Flow F186] The gaming machine 10 executes an effect at the time of non-winning at the very beginning. The pole start non-prize-producing effect is a pole chance effect executed when a winning of a game ball to the first special variable winning device 1001 is not detected in a predetermined period. The production display in the production at the time of the very first non-winning prize is shown after the production flow F187. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F187.

  [Effect Flow F187] The gaming machine 10 displays the non-winning rescue effect display 1 and starts the non-winning effect at the very beginning. The screen 1178 shown in FIG. 173 (F187) displays the character 1179 by fading out the clune 1129 (non-winning rescue effect display 1). The character 1179 notifies that the prize has failed in the first special variable prize-winning device 1001 by a display mode (for example, a disappointing expression, a look down, an sigh, etc.). The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F188.

  [Effect Flow F188] The gaming machine 10 displays the non-winning rescue effect display 2 and continues the non-winning effect at the very beginning. Screen 1180 shown in FIG. 173 (F188) displays effect guide display 1181 and character 1179. The screen 1180 displays the character "Nara ..." as the effect guidance display 1181 and displays a character 1179 that suggests the continuation of the non-prize-winning relief effect display in a display mode (for example, a thought expression). The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F189.

  [Production Flow F189] The gaming machine 10 displays the roulette production display 1 and starts a roulette production. The screen 1182 shown in FIG. 173 (F189) displays the effect name 1183, roulette 1184, sword 1185, and character 1179. The screen 1182 displays the character “roulette game” as the production name 1183, and displays the roulette 1184, the sword 1185, and the character 1179. To do so. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F190.

  [Effect Flow F190] The gaming machine 10 displays the roulette effect display 2 and continues the roulette effect. Screen 1186 shown in FIG. 173 (F190) displays sword 1185 and character 1179. The screen 1188 is displayed as a crossfade from the screen 1182, and displays an action in which the character 1179 throws a sword 1185. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F191.

  [Effect Flow F191] The gaming machine 10 displays the roulette effect display 3 and continues the roulette effect. On the screen 1188 shown in FIG. 174 (F191), after displaying the action of the character 1179 throwing the sword 1185 toward the user, the effect line 1189 is displayed from the right side of the screen, and the character 1179 is wiped to the left side of the screen. On the screen 1188, a roulette 1184 appears from the right side of the screen in place of the character 1179. The screen 1188 displays a rotating roulette 1184. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F192.

  [Production Flow F192] The gaming machine 10 starts displaying roulette expectation degree information. Screen 1190 shown in FIG. 174 (F192) shows a state where sword 1185 thrown by character 1179 is heading to roulette 1184. The screen 1190 displays the roulette 1184 in a large size, and clearly indicates the position and the number of the hit areas (“this” is displayed) arranged on the roulette 1184. Note that the gaming machine 10 may notify the degree of expectation of the lottery result by the display mode of the roulette 1184 (for example, the color of the roulette 1184, the position, the number, the size of the hit area arranged on the roulette 1184). Good. For example, the gaming machine 10 can notify the expected value of 20% to 100% by arranging one to five hit areas in the area obtained by dividing the roulette 1184 into five equal parts. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F193.

  [Effect Flow F193] The gaming machine 10 displays a roulette fanning effect. A screen 1192 shown in FIG. 174 (F193) is a display screen of a roulette-pumping effect. The screen 1192 enlarges and displays the roulette 1184 together with the effect, statically displays the sword 1185 at the boundary of the hit area and the off area, and urges the sword 1185 to stab in any of the hit area and the off area. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F194 when the sword 1185 does not stab in the hit area, and proceeds to the effect flow F195 when the sword 1185 stabs in the hit area.

  [Production Flow F194] The gaming machine 10 displays a roulette failure production. The screen 1194 shown in FIG. 174 (F194) includes, in the display content, an area name 1195 and a sword 1185 stabbed in an area displaying the area name 1195. The screen 1194 displays the character "losing" as the area name 1195, thereby showing a state in which the sword 1185 stabs in the missing area and the roulette effect has failed. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F178.

  [Production Flow F195] The gaming machine 10 displays a roulette success production. The screen 1196 shown in FIG. 175 (F195) includes, in the display content, an area name 1197 and a sword 1185 stabbed in the area displaying the area name 1197. The screen 1196 displays the character "this" as the area name 1197, thereby indicating that the sword 1185 stabbed the area and succeeded in the roulette effect. The gaming machine 10 proceeds to an effect flow F181.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs a pole chance effect in response to the opening operation of the first special variable winning device 1001 that is common to the first round of the big hit and the small hit. Here, an operation mode of the first special variable prize winning device 1001 for the gaming machine 10 to secure the production time of the pole chance production will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177. FIG. 176 is a timing chart showing an example (part 1) of the switching timing of the opening mode of the special winning opening according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 177 is a timing chart showing an example (part 2) of the switching timing of the opening mode of the special winning opening of the seventh embodiment.

  The timing chart TC10 is a timing chart showing the display timing of the display effect at the time of the small hit. The timing chart TC11 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first special variable winning device 1001 (upper left big winning port) at the time of a small hit. The timing chart TC20 is a timing chart showing the display timing of the display effect at the time of the big hit. The timing chart TC21 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first special fluctuation winning device 1001 (big left winning opening) at the time of a big hit. The timing chart TC22 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the second special variable winning device 38 (lower right big winning opening) at the time of a big hit.

First, the display effect at the time of the small hit and the opening operation of the big winning port (upper left winning port) will be described using the timing chart TC10 and the timing chart TC11.
The gaming machine 10 opens the first special variable prize winning device 1001 for a small hit (opens before a small hit) for a period TS2 (for example, 0.1 second) from timing t11 to timing t12. Next, the gaming machine 10 closes the first special fluctuation winning device 1001 for a period TS3 (for example, 7.4 seconds) from timing t12 to timing t13, and thereafter, a period TS4 (for example, 1.5 seconds) from timing t13 to timing t14. The first special variable prize winning device 1001 is released for a small hit (small hit full release) for only seconds). Further, the gaming machine 10 closes the first special variable winning device 1001 for a period TS5 (for example, 9.9 seconds) from timing t14 to timing t15, and thereafter, for a period TS6 (for example, 0.1 seconds) from timing t15 to timing t16. ), The first special variable prize-winning device 1001 is opened for small hits (open after the small hits).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 divides the opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) allowed for a small hit into three, and provides a small hit opening, a small hit main opening, and a small hit rear opening to provide a small hit opening. The time (including the halfway closing time) is extended from timing t11 to timing t16. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 secures the very first chance chance production time during the small hit. The gaming machine 10 sets the main open period (period TS4) to the maximum by setting the pre-small hit open stage (period TS2) and the post-small rear open period (period TS6) to the minimum open period (eg, 0.1 second). Become

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 displays the pole chance display (effect flow F167) for the period TS1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the timing t10 to the timing t11. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs effects related to the first special variable winning device 1001 before opening (full opening) and during opening during the period TS2 to TS4 (for example, 9.0 seconds) from timing t11 to timing t14 (effect flow F168 to effect). F172) is displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays an effect related to the state after the first special variable prize winning device 1001 is opened (fully opened) for a period TS5 to TS7 (for example, 16.9 seconds) from timing t14 to timing t17.

  When there is a winning of a game ball at the opening (full opening) of the first special variable winning device 1001, the gaming machine 10 performs an extremely first winning effect (effect flow F173) in the periods TS5 and TS6 (for example, 10.0 seconds). To F176), and the effects at the time of the very first win (production flows F177, F178) are displayed in the period TS7 (for example, 6.9 seconds). When no game ball is won in opening the first special variable winning device 1001 (final opening), the gaming machine 10 displays an effect at the time of the very first win in the periods TS5 to TS7 (effect flows F187 to F194 and F178). I do. The gaming machine 10 displays a normal screen display (effect flow F179) after the timing t17.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 is provided with a small hit front opening and a small hit rear opening one before and after the main opening, but one of the small hit front opening and the small hit rear opening is provided. Alternatively, two or more small-hit first-stage openings or two or more small-hit second-stage openings may be provided. The gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily set a combination of the small-hit first-stage opening, the small-hit main opening, and the small-hit second-stage opening in accordance with the production time to be prepared before and after the main opening.

  Next, the display effect at the time of the big hit and the opening operation of the big winning opening (the upper left big winning opening and the lower right big winning opening) will be described using the timing chart TC20, the timing chart TC21, and the timing chart TC22.

  The gaming machine 10 opens the first special variable winning device 1001 by 1R (opens the first stage of the big hit first round) for a period TS2 (for example, 0.1 second) from timing t11 to timing t12. Next, the gaming machine 10 closes the first special fluctuation winning device 1001 for a period TS3 (for example, 7.4 seconds) from timing t12 to timing t13, and thereafter, a period TS4 (for example, 1.5 seconds) from timing t13 to timing t14. The first special variable prize winning device 1001 is opened for 1 second (the first round of the big hit). Further, the gaming machine 10 closes the first special variable winning device 1001 for a period TS5 (for example, 9.9 seconds) from timing t14 to timing t15, and thereafter, for a period TS6 (for example, 0.1 seconds) from timing t15 to timing t16. ), The first special variable prize winning device 1001 is opened for 1R (after the first round of the big hit, the first stage is opened). Further, after the gaming machine 10 closes the first special variable winning device 1001 for a period TS7 (for example, 6.9 seconds) from timing t16 to timing t17, the gaming machine 10 performs a period TS8 (for example, 0.1 second) for timing t17 to timing t18. ), The first special variable prize winning device 1001 is opened for 1R (the second stage after the first round of the big hit).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 has the 1R opening (first big hit first round and first big hit round) starting in the same opening manner as the small hit opening mode (small hit first opening, small hit full opening, and small hit rear opening). The main opening and the opening of the big hit after the first round (first time) are performed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs an additional opening (second-stage opening of the first round of the big hit) in addition to the 1R opening that starts in the same opening manner as the small hit opening mode. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the big hit and the small hit in the same manner as the big hit opening mode and the small hit opening mode until the big hit is determined. Further, the gaming machine 10 secures an effect time after the large hit and the small hit can be distinguished by providing an additional opening in addition to the 1R opening which starts in the same opening mode as the small hit opening mode.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 displays the pole chance display (effect flow F167) for the period TS1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the timing t10 to the timing t11. In addition, the gaming machine 10 performs effects related to the first special variable winning device 1001 before opening (full opening) and during opening during the period TS2 to TS4 (for example, 9.0 seconds) from timing t11 to timing t14 (effect flow F168 to effect). F172) is displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays an effect related to the state after the first special variable prize winning device 1001 is opened (fully opened) for a period TS5 to TS7 (for example, 16.9 seconds) from timing t14 to timing t17.

  When there is a winning of a game ball at the opening (full opening) of the first special variable winning device 1001, the gaming machine 10 performs an extremely first winning effect (effect flow F173) in the periods TS5 and TS6 (for example, 10.0 seconds). To F176), and the effects (effect flows F180, F181, F182) at the time of the first win in the period TS7 (for example, 6.9 seconds). The gaming machine 10, when there is no winning of the game ball in the opening (full opening) of the first special variable winning device 1001, at the time of the first win in the period TS5 to TS7 (production flow F187 to F193, F195, F181). Is displayed.

  The gaming machine 10 displays the fanfare effects (effect flows F183 and F184) in the periods TS8 and TS9 (for example, 8.0 seconds) up to the timing t19 starting from the timing t17 when the additional opening is performed. In this way, the gaming machine 10 secures the fanfare effect time by providing the additional opening. In the gaming machine 10, the period TS9 is an interval period in the game control, but by performing the effect display as in the fanfare period, it is possible to produce an effect such that a big hit starts at the very beginning chance.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 opens the second special variable winning device 38 by 2R (opens the first stage of the second round of the big hit) for a period TS10 (for example, 0.1 second) from timing t19 to timing t20. Next, after the gaming machine 10 closes the second special variable winning device 38 for a period TS11 (for example, 3.9 seconds) from timing t20 to timing t21, the second special variable winning device 38 is fully opened 2R from timing t21. (Open the second round of the big hit). In the third and subsequent rounds of the big hit, the gaming machine 10 does not provide a front opening or a rear opening, and makes the second special variable winning device 38 fully open (open within a maximum time).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 divides the 2R opening into the first-stage opening of the second round of the big hit where the winning of the game ball is not easy and the second round full opening of the big hit where the winning of the game ball is easy. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can secure the production time for the second round of the big hit while securing the time for the second round of the big hit. The gaming machine 10 switches the large winning opening to be opened from the first special variable winning device 1001 to the second special variable winning device 38 when shifting from the first big hit round to the second big hit round. That is, the gaming machine 10 changes the hitting direction of the player who is hitting the big hit from the left game area to the right game area. The gaming machine 10 can secure a guide time associated with the conversion of the hitting direction (switching of the game operation) and a preparation time for the player associated with the conversion of the hitting direction.

  The gaming machine 10 is provided with one big hit first round opening and two big hit first round opening before the big hit first round full opening. Either one of the round opening and the round opening may be provided, or one or more big hit first round opening and one or more big hit first round opening may be provided. The gaming machine 10 may arbitrarily set a combination of the first big hit first round opening, the first big hit full round opening, and the first big hit second round opening according to the production time to be prepared before and after the first big hit round opening. Can be. Also, the gaming machine 10 has provided the first big hit second round opening before the big hit second round full opening, but it is not always necessary to provide the big hit second round first opening, and if necessary, the second big hit second round opening is provided. The above-mentioned opening of the big hit second round first stage and the opening of one or more big hit second round second stage may be provided. The gaming machine 10 may arbitrarily set a combination of the first big hit second round opening, the second big hit full round opening, and the second big hit second round opening in accordance with the production time to be prepared before and after the second big hit big round opening. Can be.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the seventh embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment in that the gaming machine 10 has two big winning ports in the right gaming area.

First, a game board according to a first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the first modification of the seventh embodiment.
The gaming board 1010 is provided in a gaming machine 10 of a first modification of the seventh embodiment. Note that the same components in the game board 1010 and the game board 1000 of the seventh embodiment have the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  The game board 1010 is located below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and to the right of the starting winning port 36, and has a first special variable winning device (first large winning port) 1011 and a second special variable winning device (first (Two major winning openings) 38 will be provided. The first special fluctuation winning device 1011 is located above the second special fluctuation winning device 38.

  The first special fluctuation winning device 1011 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 1012 which can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls down to the near side, and is a result of a special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. The first big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state depending on the situation. That is, the first special variable winning device 1011 is provided with, for example, a first special winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing door 1012 driven by a special winning opening solenoid (not shown). By converting the mouth from the closed state to the opened state, the inflow of the game ball into the first big winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value is given to the player.

  The door 1012 has a smaller width than the door 38c. Note that the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening are exclusively opened. The first special variable winning device 1011 is a winning opening opened in the first round of the big hit and the small hit, and the second special variable winning device 38 is a winning opening opened in the second round and the subsequent of the big hit. .

As described above, the gaming machine 10 may be configured such that the first special variable winning device 1011 and the second special variable winning device 38 are arranged close to each other.
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a modification 2 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 according to Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment includes a partition member that partitions the display area of the display device 41. FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device according to the modification 2 of the seventh embodiment.

  A screen 1200 shown in FIG. 179 (1) is displayed on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 includes a partition member 1201 on the front surface of the display device 41. The partition member 1201 is an L-shaped rod-shaped or plate-shaped member. The partition member 1201 divides the display area of the display device 41 into a first display area 1202 and a second display area 1203. Note that the partition member 1201 may be a fixed member fixed to the front surface of the display device 41, or may be a movable member that can advance to the front surface of the display device 41 and retreat outside the display area. .

  The first display area 1202 is an area for mainly displaying the contents of the effect, and displays, for example, a clown 1129. The first display area 1202 has a shape obtained by removing the second display area 1203 from the display area of the display device 41, and is, for example, L-shaped. The first display area 1202 is a display area larger than the second display area 1203. The second display area 1203 is an area for displaying the effect contents as a subordinate, and displays, for example, a game guide 1204.

  The game guide 1204 includes characters and images for guiding the user to aim at the first special variable winning device 1001. For example, the game guide 1204 guides that a game ball can be won based on an image in which a movable piece included in the first special variable winning device 1001 is opened. In addition, the game guide 1204 guides the player to right-hand with the characters “Aim” and a pictogram (arrow). The game guide 1204 may be always displayed, or may be displayed for a predetermined time by an event trigger to guide the player in the hitting direction (for example, left hit or right hit).

  At this time, the display mode of the image of the first special variable winning device 1001 can be changed in synchronization with the operation mode of the movable piece included in the first special variable winning device 1001. Further, the game guide 1204 may indicate that a game ball is won by the image of the first special variable winning device 1001, and the winning ball is detected by a detecting device (for example, a switch) provided in the first special variable winning device 1001. May be shown in synchronization with the detection of the game ball. Further, the game guide 1204 may indicate a state in which a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings for one round or the number of winnings for one opening) wins, independently of the detection of the game balls by the detection device. . Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can receive information (for example, the possibility of winning, the operating status, the winning status, the expected status, etc.) regarding the winning in the first special variable winning device 1001 without hindering the player from concentrating on the game effect. The number of winnings, etc.) to the player.

  A screen 1206 shown in FIG. 179 (2) is displayed on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 includes a partition member 1207 on the front surface of the display device 41. The partition member 1207 is a linear rod-shaped or plate-shaped member. The partition member 1207 divides the display area of the display device 41 into a first display area 1208 and a second display area 1209. The partition member 1207 is a movable member that can operate on the front surface of the display device 41. Note that the partition member 1207 may be one that can be retracted outside the display area.

  The partitioning member 1207 shown in FIG. 179 (2) is directed obliquely downward to the left, and divides the display area of the display device 41 by making the second display area 1209 larger than the first display area 1208. The first display area 1208 is an area mainly for displaying the contents of the effect, and displays, for example, a clown 1129. The second display area 1209 is an area for displaying the effect contents as a subordinate, and displays, for example, a game guide 1210. The game guide 1210 includes characters and images for guiding the user to aim at the first special variable winning device 1001. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays the game guide 1210 in the second display area 1209, so that the player can easily perceive the game guide to the first special variable winning device 1001 close to the second display area 1209. It is assumed. Note that the gaming machine 10 may move the partition member 1207 from the right to the left as a game guiding operation to alert the player to the left game area. Note that the partition member 1207 may include a light emitting member, and may enhance the alerting effect according to the light emitting mode of the light emitting member.

  A screen 1212 shown in FIG. 179 (3) is displayed on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 can switch between the screen 1206 and the screen 1212, and can change the position of the partition member 1207 at the same time.

  The partitioning member 1207 shown in FIG. 179 (3) is directed obliquely downward to the right, and divides the display area of the display device 41 by making the second display area 1209 smaller than the first display area 1208. The first display area 1208 is an area for displaying the effect contents as a subordinate, and displays, for example, a game guide 1210. The second display area 1209 is an area for mainly displaying the contents of the effect, and displays, for example, a clune 1129 and a game ball 1137.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can change the size of the first display area 1208 and the second display area 1209 according to the effect content, and can switch the display content. The gaming machine 10 can improve the interest by moving the partition member 1207 in accordance with the operation of the gaming ball 1137 rolling the crew 1129. For example, in the gaming machine 10, when the game ball 1137 is on the left side, the second display area 1209 is mainly used as an area for displaying effect contents, and when the game ball 1137 is on the right side, the effect is mainly displayed on the first display area 1208. It can be a display area.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may change the size of the first display area 1208 and the second display area 1209 according to the game guidance instead of the effect content, and may switch the display content. For example, the gaming machine 10 may display a game guidance for guiding right-handed instead of the game guidance 1210 on the screen 1212. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may alert the player to the right game area by moving the partition member 1207 from left to right as a game guiding operation.

  Note that the game guide 1210 is in charge of a game guide (a game guide before winning) until a game ball wins in the first special variable winning device 1001 on the screen 1206 shown in FIG. 179 (2), and FIG. 179 (3). On the screen 1212 shown, the game guide after the game ball has won the first special variable winning device 1001 (game guide after winning) is in charge. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the risk of a player losing a winning opportunity by continuing the game guidance after the game ball has won, not limited to the game guide before winning.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a third modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the seventh embodiment includes two display devices. FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by two display devices according to Modification 3 of the seventh embodiment.

  The screen 1220 shown in FIG. 180 (1) is displayed on the display device (main liquid crystal display device, first display device) 41. The gaming machine 10 includes a sub liquid crystal display device (second display device) 1221 separately from the display device 41. The sub liquid crystal display device 1221 is provided so as to overlap a part of the front surface of the display device 41 and displays a screen 1222. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can display the screen 1220 and the screen 1222 to the player so as to be simultaneously observable without forcing the player to move a large line of sight.

  The screen 1220 displayed by the display device 41 is an area for mainly displaying the contents of the effect, and displays, for example, the screen 1129. The screen 1222 displayed by the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 is an area for displaying the effect contents as a subordinate, and displays, for example, a game guide 1223. The game guide 1204 includes characters and images for guiding the user to aim at the first special variable winning device 1001.

  Note that the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 may be fixed to the front surface of the display device 41, advance to the front surface of the display device 41, retreat outside the display area, and change the position on the front surface of the display device 41. May be configured.

  A screen 1224 shown in FIG. 180 (2) is displayed on the display device 41. The screen 1224 displays a game ball 1137 rolling on the clune 1129. The sub liquid crystal display device 1221 changes the position according to the display position of the game ball 1137. For example, the position of the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 shown in FIG. 180 (2) is changed to the left side of the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 shown in FIG. 180 (1).

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 can change the positional relationship between the display device 41 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 according to the effect contents, and can switch the display contents. The gaming machine 10 can improve the interest by moving the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 in accordance with the operation of the gaming ball 1137 rolling the clune 1129.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may change the positional relationship between the display device 41 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 according to the game guidance instead of the effect content, and may switch the display content. For example, the gaming machine 10 improves the game guidance effect by displaying the game guidance 1223 while the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 moves to the left. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 may display a game guidance for guiding the right-handing while the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 moves to the right.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a modification 4 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the fourth modification of the seventh embodiment can display various information on the sub liquid crystal display device 1221. FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device according to Modification 4 of the seventh embodiment.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 1221 illustrated in FIG. 181 (1) displays a screen 1226. The screen 1226 displays a guidance display 1223 and a supplementary guidance display 1227. The guidance display 1223 includes characters and images for guiding the user to aim at the first special variable winning device 1001. The supplementary guidance display 1227 supplementarily describes the guidance display 1223. For example, in the supplementary guidance display 1227, the character "Aim while opening three times" indicates that the first special variable prize winning device 1001 is to be opened three times and that the timing when the first special variable prize winning device 1001 is to be opened three times. To the player.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can provide a detailed game guidance to the player by performing the game guidance including the supplementary explanation by the sub liquid crystal display device 1221. Further, since the gaming machine 10 can separate the game guidance from the effect display, it is possible to perform the game guidance that is easy for the player to understand, and to perform the effect display in which the player can be immersed.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 1221 illustrated in FIG. 181 (2) displays a screen 1228. Screen 1228 includes guidance display 1223, large symbol group 1101, and small symbol group 1102. The large symbol group 1101 shows a state in which the middle symbol 1101C is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode including the exclusive symbol “extra chance”, and the small symbol group 1102 is a symbol combination that becomes a big hit or a symbol combination that becomes a small hit. Indicates the state of stop display. Note that the gaming machine 10 displays a large symbol group 1101 and a small symbol group 1102 as an example of game information to be disclosed to a player. A guide of the operation method or the like may be displayed as game information.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can disclose detailed game information to the player using the sub liquid crystal display device 1221. In addition, since the gaming machine 10 can separate the game information and the effect display, it is possible to disclose the game information that is easy for the player to understand, and to perform the effect display in which the player can be immersed.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 1221 illustrated in FIG. 181 (3) displays the screen 1230. The screen 1230 displays a guidance display 1223 and a game state display 1231. The game state display 1231 is a display indicating that the gaming machine 10 is in a predetermined game state, for example, a timing at which the first special variable winning device 1001 is aimed at (a game state corresponding to a small hit or a first round of a big hit). (A game state). The game state display 1231 informs the player of the timing of aiming at the first special variable prize device 1001 by the character “chance time”, and displays the first special variable prize device 1001 by the countdown display “05:00”. Guide that the target timing is 5 seconds.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can provide a detailed game guidance to the player by performing the game guidance by the sub liquid crystal display device 1221. Further, since the gaming machine 10 can separate the game guidance from the effect display, it is possible to perform the game guidance that is easy for the player to understand, and to perform the effect display in which the player can be immersed.

  The gaming machine 10 may display the gaming state display 1231 so that the gaming state corresponding to the small hit and the gaming state corresponding to the first round of the big hit can be distinguished. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 obtains from the display device 41 an interest to estimate whether the current gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to the small hit or the gaming state corresponding to the first round of the big hit, and answers to the estimation. Interest in matching can be obtained from the sub liquid crystal display device 1221. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can give a player who does not need to answer the estimation an option to be immersed in the effect display performed on the display device 41.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 displays the supplementary guidance display 1227, the game information display such as the large symbol group 1101 and the small symbol group 1102, or the game state display 1231 on the sub liquid crystal display device 1221, but in the seventh embodiment. It may be displayed in one of the display areas divided by the partition member described in Modification 2 (the area for displaying the effect contents).

  Next, a gaming machine 10 of a fifth modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 according to Modification 5 of the seventh embodiment includes two display devices, and can perform display across two display devices. FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by two display devices according to Modification Example 5 of the seventh embodiment.

  A screen 1232 shown in FIG. 182 (1) is displayed on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 includes a sub liquid crystal display device 1221 separately from the display device 41. The sub liquid crystal display device 1221 is provided so as to overlap a part of the front surface of the display device 41 and displays a screen 1233. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can display the screen 1232 and the screen 1233 to the player so as to be simultaneously observable without forcing the player to move a large line of sight.

  The screen 1232 displayed by the display device 41 is an area mainly displaying the contents of the effect, and displays, for example, a main part of the clune 1129 and a partial game guide 1234. The screen 1233 displayed by the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 is a region for displaying the effect contents as subordinates, and displays, for example, a part of the game guide 1235, the game guides 1236 and 1237, and the periphery of the clune 1129. The game guide 1236 guides the player to left-hand by using the character “left-hand” and the pictogram “arrow”. The game guide 1237 guides the player in the game state by the characters “chance time”, and indicates that the duration of the game state is 5 seconds by the countdown display “05:00”. The peripheral part of the clune 1129 complements the main part of the clune 1129 displayed on the screen 1232.

  The gaming machine 10 guides the player to aim at the first special variable winning device 1001 with the partial game guide 1234 and the partial game guide 1235. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the degree of freedom of the display position and the size of the display content restricted by the display area, and can improve the game guidance effect.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the game guidance in an integrated manner with the partial game guidance 1234 displayed on the display device 41 and the partial game guidance 1235 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1221, so that the screen 1232 and the screen 1233 are displayed. The player can be encouraged to perform seamless gaze movement between them. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of alerting the game guides 1236 and 1237 during the effect display.

  A screen 1238 shown in FIG. 182 (2) is displayed on the display device 41. The sub liquid crystal display device 1221 is provided so as to overlap a part of the front surface of the display device 41, and displays a screen 1239. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can display the screen 1238 and the screen 1239 to the player so as to be simultaneously observable without forcing the player to move a large line of sight.

  The screen 1238 displayed by the display device 41 is an area mainly for displaying the effect contents, and displays a character 1243 and a partial state guide 1240. The screen 1239 displayed by the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 is a region for displaying the effect contents as a subordinate, and displays, for example, a partial state guide 1240 and a game guide 1242. The game guide 1242 guides the player to right-hand using characters “right-hand” and a pictogram “arrow”.

  The gaming machine 10 displays the character "great success" with the partial state guide 1240 and the partial state guide 1241 to guide the gaming state in which the very first chance has been achieved. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the degree of freedom of the display position and the size of the display content restricted by the display area, and can improve the game guidance effect.

  Also, the gaming machine 10 displays the game state by integrally displaying the gaming state with the partial state guide 1240 displayed on the display device 41 and the partial state guide 1241 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1221, thereby displaying the screens 1238 and 1239. The player can be encouraged to perform seamless gaze movement between them. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of alerting the game guide 1242 during the effect display.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 may display a part or all of the display content of the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 at a position on the display device 41 that overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display device 1221. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays, on the display device 41, display contents (for example, game guides 1236, 1237, 1242, and the like) of the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 superimposed on the display device 41. Further, the gaming machine 10 displays on the display device 41 the display content of the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 that does not overlap with the display device 41 (for example, a partial game guide 1235 and a partial status guide 1241). At this time, the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode of the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 (for example, change the position and size, summarize the message, and the like). In such a gaming machine 10, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 cannot be moved to a position overlapping a part of the front surface of the display device 41 due to a failure or malfunction, a certain game guidance effect or alert for the player is provided. The effect can be guaranteed.

  The screen 1244 shown in FIG. 182 (3) is displayed on the display device 41. The partition member 1201 is provided so as to overlap a part of the front surface of the display device 41, and divides a display area for displaying the screen 1244 into a display area 1245 and a display area 1246. The display area 1245 is an area mainly for displaying the effect contents, and displays the character 1243 and the partial state guidance 1247. The display area 1246 displays the contents of the effect as a subordinate, and displays, for example, a partial state guide 1248 and a game guide 1249. The game guide 1249 guides the player to right-hand using characters “right-hand” and a pictogram “arrow”.

  The gaming machine 10 displays the character "great success" with the partial state guide 1247 and the partial state guide 1248, and guides the gaming state in which the very first chance has been achieved. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the degree of freedom of the display position and the size of the display content restricted by the display area partitioned by the partition member 1201, and can improve the game guidance effect.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays the game state integrally with the partial state guide 1247 and the partial state guide 1248, thereby enabling the player to seamlessly move his / her line of sight between the display area 1245 and the display area 1246. Can be encouraged. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect of alerting the game guide 1249 during the effect display.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can change the display ratio of the partial game guide 1234 displayed on the display device 41 and the partial game guide 1235 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1221 according to the game state and the game progress. Is also good. Thus, for example, the gaming machine 10 can perform the reliability notification and the advance notification based on the display ratio of the partial game guide 1234 and the partial game guide 1235. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 changes the display ratio of the partial state guide 1240 and the partial state guide 1241 and the display ratio of the partial state guide 1247 and the partial state guide 1248 according to the gaming state and the game progress. You may make it changeable.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a sixth modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of Modification 6 of the seventh embodiment has an effect device capable of executing a real ball effect in synchronization with a display effect. FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an operation mode of the rendering device according to Modification 6 of the seventh embodiment and an example of a screen displayed by the display device.

  The screen 1138 shown in FIG. 183 (1) is the one shown in FIG. 169 (F172). The gaming machine 10 has a guide passage 1252 for guiding the gaming ball 1250 won from the first special variable winning device 1001 opened by the operation of the movable piece 1002 to the effect device 1251. The guide passage 1252 may be visually recognized by the player, or may not be visually recognized. The effect device 1251 has a stop device 1253 for stopping the game ball 1250, and a window 1254 for allowing the player to visually recognize the game ball 1250 on which the stop device 1253 stops. The stopping device 1253 can stop the game ball 1250 flowing down the guide passage 1252 by allowing the movable piece 1253a to enter the guide passage 1252 and cause the movable piece 1253a to retreat from the guide passage 1252 and flow downstream. Can be. Note that the stop device 1253 may use a sprocket, a magnet, or the like without using the movable piece 1253a as long as it can control the stop and release of the game ball 1250.

  Screen 1256 shown in FIG. 183 (2) shows a state in which effect device 1251 stops game ball 1250 by stopping device 1253. The screen 1256 includes a rendering device display 1257 and a game ball (image) 1137 in the display content. At this time, the effect device 1251 stops the game ball 1250 by the stopping device 1253. The gaming machine 10 can determine whether or not the effect device 1251 is parked with the gaming ball 1250, based on winning detection by a switch included in the first special variable winning device 1001.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can synchronize the stopped state of the game ball 1250 in the effect device 1251 with the effect device display 1257 on the display device 41 and the display state of the game ball 1137. In such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to multiplex confirmation occasions in which the state of winning in the first special variable winning device 1001 can be confirmed by both the effect device 1251 and the display device 41. Further, in such a gaming machine 10, both the effect device 1251 and the display device 41 can achieve multiplexing of amusement acquisition opportunities obtained by the player from the game effect.

  The screen 1144 shown in FIG. 183 (3) is the one shown in FIG. 169 (F174). The screen 1144 displays a game ball 1137 that jumps into the screen from the upper left of the screen and rolls on the concave surface of the clune 1129. Immediately before this, the rendering device 1251 releases the stopping of the game ball 1250 by the stopping device 1253. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may show on the display device 41 that the rendering device 1251 releases the stop of the gaming ball 1250 by the stop device 1253.

  The gaming machine 10 displays, on the display device 41, the game ball 1137 rolling on the concave surface of the clune 1129 at a timing at which the game ball 1250 flows down to a position where the game ball 1250 cannot be visually recognized from the window 1254 due to the stoppage. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can synchronize the stop release state of the gaming ball 1250 in the effect device 1251 with the effect display on the display device 41. Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a game effect with a sense of unity by the effect device 1251 and the display device 41.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 may cause the stopping device 1253 to stop only one game ball 1250 by providing a bypass passage in the effect device 1251 or stop the two or more game balls 1250. Is also good. In the gaming machine 10, the gaming ball 1250 parked on the parking device 1253 may be a winning ball that has won the first special variable winning device 1001, or may be a ball that uses a different ball from the winning ball. In the gaming machine 10, a clown may be provided in the rendering device 1251, and a clown 1129 displayed by the display device 41 and a clune provided in the rendering device 1251 may cooperate to perform a gaming effect.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a seventh modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 according to a seventh modification of the seventh embodiment is provided with a hitting direction guidance display for guiding a player on how to make a hit or a hit without switching. FIG. 184 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hit ball direction indication display of Modification 7 of the seventh embodiment.

  The game board 1260 shown in FIG. 184 (1) displays a hitting direction guidance display 1262 in the cell 1261. The hit ball direction guide display 1262 guides the hit ball direction by an arrow-shaped display. The hitting direction guided by the hitting direction guide display 1262 is a point that can be won in both the first special variable winning device 1001 and the second special variable winning device 38. That is, the hitting ball direction indication display 1262 guides the player on how to make it unnecessary to switch between left hitting and right hitting according to the game state.

  The game board 1264 shown in FIG. 184 (2) displays a hitting direction guide display 1265 on the center case 40. The hitting direction guide display 1265 guides the hitting direction by an arrow-shaped display, similarly to the hitting direction guide display 1262.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 determines how to hit by the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the speakers 19a and 19b instead of or in addition to the hitting direction guidance displays 1262 and 1265. You may be made to guide to. For example, the gaming machine 10 can guide the target of the hit ball by moving and displaying the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 toward the target of the hit ball. More specifically, the game machine 10 moves and displays the LED from the lower right to the upper left when aiming at the point (upper left) guided by the hitting ball direction display 1262, 1265. Note that the gaming machine 10 may enhance the guide effect of the LEDs to be moved and displayed by reducing the luminance of the LEDs not used for the moving display. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can guide the target of the hit ball by moving the sound image toward the target of the hit ball by using the sound image localization technology with the volume output by the speakers 19a and 19b.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described seventh embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first prize device (first special variable prize device 1001, 1011), a second prize device (second special variable prize device 38), and first value providing means (game control device 100, The first special variable winning device 1001, 1011), the second value providing means (game control device 100, the first special variable winning device 1001, 1011, the second special variable winning device 38), and the prize producing means (game control) Device 100, effect control device 300, and display device 41). The first prize device and the second prize device can convert between an easy winning state where the game ball can easily win (open state of the large winning opening) and a difficult winning state where the game ball cannot easily win (the closed state of the large winning opening). . The first value assigning means assigns a first value (small hit) by converting the first winning device from a difficult winning state to an easy winning state at a first opportunity (small hit). The second value providing means converts the first prize winning device from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state in the first opportunity (the first round of the big hit) at the second opportunity (big hit winning), and from the later state (the second and subsequent rounds of the big hit). The second winning device is converted from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state and a second value (big hit) larger than the first value is given. The prize producing means converts the winning state of the first prize device by the first value providing means when the first value providing means or the second value providing means converts the winning state of the first prize device (by a small hit). The distinction between the opening (opening) and the conversion of the winning state of the first winning device by the second value providing means (opening due to a big hit) is clearly indicated by the effect (success or failure of the first chance chance effect).

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) further includes common effect means (game control device 100, effect control device 300, display device 41). The common effect means includes a case where the first value providing means converts the first winning device from a difficult winning state to an easy winning state and a case where the second value providing means converts the first winning device from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state. In addition, the distinction between the state conversion of the first prize device by the first value providing unit and the state conversion of the first prize device by the second value providing unit is implicitly indicated by a common effect (effect flows F167 to F176).

  (3) The gaming machine 10 of (2) further includes prize-time production means (game control device 100, production control device 300, display device 41). The prize-producing means is configured to determine whether the first value-adding means has detected a prize in the first prize device or the second value-adding means has detected a prize in the first prize device. The distinction from the prize by the two-value giving means is clearly indicated by the effect (the effect at the time of the very first prize).

  (4) The gaming machine 10 of (2) or (3) further includes non-winning-time production means (game control device 100, production control device 300, display device 41). The non-winning-state effecting means is configured to determine whether the first value-adding means does not detect a winning in the first winning device or the second value-adding means does not detect a winning in the first winning device. The distinction from the prize by the second value providing means is clarified by the effect (the effect at the time of non-winning at the very beginning).

The gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment (including the modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first prize device (first special variable prize device 1001, 1011), a second prize device (second special variable prize device 38), and a first value providing means (game control device 100). , First special variable winning device 1001, 1011), second value providing means (game control device 100, first special variable winning device 1001, 1011, second special variable winning device 38), and guiding means (game control device). 100, an effect control device 300, and a display device 41). The first prize device has an easy-to-win state in which a game ball hit into one side of the game area is easily won (the open state of the large winning opening) and a difficult-to-win state in which the game ball is difficult to win (the closed state of the large winning opening). And can be converted. The second prize winning device can convert between a prize-winning state in which the game balls hit on the other side of the game area can easily win and a prize-hard state in which the game balls cannot easily win. The first value assigning means assigns a first value (small hit) by converting the first winning device from a difficult winning state to an easy winning state at a first opportunity (small hit). The second value providing means converts the first prize device from the difficult prize state to the easy prize state at the second opportunity (big hit prize), and thereafter changes the second prize device from the difficult prize state to the easy prize state. Convert to give a second value greater than the first value. The guidance means provides a guidance period (a big hit second round first stage opening period, a big hit second round first stage opening and a big hit second round full opening full closing period) during the state conversion of the second winning device, and a game during the guidance period. To the player in the direction of the ball.

[Eighth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, an out sensor capable of detecting an out ball and a safe ball is provided in a back channel configuration unit provided on a lower back surface.

  First, an overview and mounting positions of the back flow path constituting unit provided in the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 185 is an exploded perspective view showing an example of the appearance and mounting positions of the back flow path constituting unit of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment.

  In the gaming machine 10, an outer frame 11 is fixed to a game island which is a game arcade facility, and the back surface of the front frame 12 faces the game island. The front frame 12 has a back channel forming unit 1300 disposed on the lower back surface. The back channel forming unit 1300 receives the safe ball and the out ball below the game board 30 accommodated by the front frame 12 and discharged by the game board 30 and sends the safe ball and the out ball to the pulse tank installed on the game island. Can be discharged.

  The back channel configuration unit 1300 includes a channel configuration body 1310, a front lid member 1320, and a rear lid member 1330, and has a triple structure (sandwich structure) in which the front lid member 1320 and the rear lid member 1330 sandwich the channel configuration body 1310. It is. The flow path configuration main body 1310 forms a flow path forming partition wall in the base material. The flow path constituting body 1310 forms a flow path of the game ball by closing the open surface by the front cover member 1320 and the rear cover member 1330.

  The rear cover member 1330 has a control device assembly on which a control device is disposed with a noise prevention plate or an insulating plate interposed therebetween, mounted on the rear surface side. The rear cover member 1330 facilitates inspection of the flow passage of the back flow passage forming unit 1300 through the control device assembly by a hinge mechanism and a fastener. In addition, by attaching the control device assembly to the back channel configuration unit 1300, the channel of the game ball can be protected from external impact and unauthorized operation.

  The back channel forming unit 1300 is provided with an overflow channel for causing game balls discharged as prize balls to overflow from the upper plate 21 to the lower plate 23, in addition to the safe ball and the out ball discharge channels. There may be.

  Next, the discharge flow path provided in the back flow path forming unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187. First, an overview of the back channel forming unit as viewed from above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a plan view showing the discharge flow path of the safe sphere and the out sphere of the back flow path constituting unit of the eighth embodiment.

  The back channel configuration unit 1300 is configured to transfer a game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 30 from a plurality of outlets provided in the gaming machine 10 from the upper surface side of the channel configuration main body 1310, the front cover member 1320, and the rear cover member 1330. accept. The game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 30 are received by the game ball receiving port (winning port or out port) of the game board 30 and discharged below the game board 30 from the discharge port corresponding to the game ball receiving port. You. In the description of the eighth embodiment, game balls discharged from the discharge port are collectively referred to as discharge balls. In addition, game balls discharged after winning in the winning opening are called safe discharging balls or simply safe balls, and game balls discharged from the out opening without winning any of the winning openings are out discharging balls or simply out. Called a sphere.

  The front cover member 1320 includes a front-side collecting gutter 1321 on the upper surface. The front-side collecting gutter 1321 is a plate-like member inclined toward the flow path configuration main body 1310. The front-side collecting gutter 1321 guides the discharge sphere that has fallen on the upper surface of the front-side collecting gutter 1321 to the flow path configuration main body 1310, and also prevents the ball from spilling out of the flow path configuration main body 1310.

  The rear cover member 1330 includes a rear-side collecting gutter 1331 on the upper surface. The rear-side collecting gutter 1331 is a plate-like member inclined toward the flow path configuration main body 1310. The rear-side collecting gutter 1331 guides the discharge sphere that has fallen on the upper surface of the rear-side collecting gutter 1331 to the flow path constituent body 1310, and prevents spilling of the ball from the flow path constituent body 1310 main body.

  The channel configuration main body 1310 includes a receiving gutter 1311, a receiving basin 1312, and a receiving gutter 1313. The receiving gutters 1311 and 1313 guide the discharge spheres dropped on the upper surface or the discharge spheres guided from the front-side collecting gutter 1321 and the rear-side collecting gutter 1331 in a line to the receiving tub 1312. The receiving basin 1312 has a capacity capable of receiving a predetermined amount of discharge spheres, and guides the received discharge spheres to the out sensor 1340 in a line. The channel configuration main body 1310 arranges the receiving gutter 1311 on one side of the receiving cell 1312 and arranges the receiving gutter 1313 on the other side of the receiving cell 1312 to prevent the discharge sphere from spilling from both sides of the receiving cell 1312. . The receiving gutters 1311 and 1313 are one form of a receiving basin having a small depth.

  The out sensor 1340 can detect ejected balls one by one. The out sensor 1340 is connected to the game control device 100, and a detection signal of the out sensor 1340 is input to the game control device 100, and is used for calculation of the accessory ratio, calculation of the base, and the like. Further, the out sensor 1340 may be connected to the payout control device 200, and a detection signal of the out sensor 1340 may be input to the payout control device 200 and used for calculation of an accessory ratio, calculation of a base, and the like. . Further, the out sensor 1340 may be connected to the effect control device 300, and a detection signal of the out sensor 1340 may be input to the effect control device 300. In this case, the detection signal of the out sensor 1340 may be used for determining an operation state that is a trigger for switching to a game effect or a customer waiting screen display.

  In addition, the channel configuration main body 1310 may include two out sensors 1340. For example, one out sensor 1340 is connected to the game control device 100, and the other out sensor 1340 is connected to the effect control. It can be connected to the device 300. At this time, it is desirable that the flow path configuration main body 1310 is provided with two out sensors 1340 in series on one discharge path so that the outputs of the two out sensors 1340 do not differ. Further, it is desirable that the game control device 100 detects a discharged ball with a small time lag by inputting a detection signal from the upstream out sensor 1340 of the two out sensors 1340 provided on the discharge path.

  The receiving gutters 1311, 1313, the front-side collecting gutter 1321, and the rear-side collecting gutter 1331 have widths W1, W2, and W3, respectively. The width W2 has a width of approximately one game ball, and the receiving gutters 1311 and 1313 allow the discharging ball to flow down in the direction of the receiving basin 1312. The width W1 is larger than the width W2. As a result, the front-side collecting gutter 1321 receives the discharged ball dropped from the game board 30 and guides the discharged ball to the flow path constituting body 1310 while buffering the drop impact. In addition, the discharge ball from the game board 30 does not necessarily fall on the front-side collecting gutter 1321, but may fall on the flow path configuration main body 1310. The width W3 is smaller than the width W2, making it difficult for the game machine 10 to stop on the rear-side collecting gutter 1331 even when the gaming machine 10 is inclined.

  The receiving gutter 1311, the receiving basin 1312, and the receiving gutter 1313 have lengths L1, L2, and L3, respectively, that can be observed when the bird's-eye view is viewed. That is, the receiving gutter 1311 can receive the discharge sphere in the range of the length L1, the receiving tub 1312 can receive the discharge sphere in the range of the length L2, and the receiving gutter 1313 has the range of the length L3. Can accept discharge balls. The length L3 is extremely smaller than the lengths L1 and L2. In this way, the flow path configuration main body 1310 secures a uniform size for the lengths L1 and L2 by making the sizes of the receiving gutters 1311 and 1313 asymmetric. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the outlet on the receiving gutter 1311 and the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the outlet on the receiving pit 1312. Such a gaming machine 10 can flexibly cope with the arrangement of the outlets even when the gaming board 30 is replaced.

  Next, an outline of a cross section of the back channel constituting unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 187 is a cross-sectional view showing a discharge path of the safe sphere and the out sphere of the back flow path constituting unit of the eighth embodiment. The cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 187 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the back channel forming unit 1300 shown in FIG. 186.

  The receiving gutter 1311 is inclined to guide the received discharge sphere to the receiving basin 1312. The receiving gutter 1311 has a depth D1 at a position where the depth from the upper end of the back channel forming unit 1300 to the receiving surface (gutter surface) is far from the receiving tub 1312 and a depth D2 at a position near the receiving tub 1312 (however, D1 <D2). Note that the receiving gutter 1311 has a smaller depth than the receiving basin 1312, so that the alignment of the discharge spheres is given priority over the prevention of the spillage of the discharge spheres. For example, the receiving gutter 1311 can prevent two game balls from stacking vertically by making the depth D1 and the depth D2 smaller than twice the size of the game balls. In addition, the receiving gutter 1311 makes the depth D1 and the depth D2 larger than the radius of the game ball and smaller than the diameter, so that the game ball flowing down causes the game ball from the front side gathering gutter 1321 or the rear side gathering gutter 1331 to flow. Can restrict entry. The receiving gutter 1313 has the same configuration as the receiving gutter 1311.

  The receiving basin 1312 has a capacity capable of receiving gaming balls stacked in two or more stages, and has a guide path 1315 on the bottom surface. The guide path 1315 is inclined so as to guide the received discharge sphere to the out sensor 1340. The receiving basin 1312 has a depth D3 at a position where the depth from the upper end of the back channel forming unit 1300 to the guide path 1315 is far from the out sensor 1340, and has a depth D4 at a position close to the out sensor 1340 (where D3 <D4). ). The receiving basin 1312 has a greater depth than the receiving gutters 1311 and 1313, thereby giving priority to the receiving ability of the discharging spheres over the alignment of the discharging spheres. For example, the receiving gutter 1311 has a depth D3 and a depth D4 that are at least twice as large as the size of the game ball.

  Note that the receiving basin 1312 has a size that extends to below the receiving gutters 1311 and 1313. The receiving gutter 1311 has a collapsing margin space 1316 below the receiving gutter 1311 as a collapsing margin for the discharged ball received. In addition, there is a collapsing margin space 1317 below the receiving gutter 1313 as a collapsing margin of the discharged ball received. Thus, even when the ball stops in the receiving basin 1312, the gaming machine 10 can facilitate the collapse of the ejected ball and prompt the release of the ball stop.

  For example, the fall allowance space 1316 facilitates the collapse of the discharge ball on the downstream side of the guide path 1315 in the receiving basin 1312 and promotes the release of the ball stop. Further, the fall allowance space 1317 facilitates the fall of the discharge ball on the upstream side of the guide path 1315 in the receiving basin 1312, and promotes the release of the ball stop. In the gaming machine 10, the discharge ball can be prevented from stopping at the receiving basin 1312 by one of the room 1313 and the room 1317.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 can further suppress the stopping of the ball by providing both the room 1316 and the space 1317. In the receiving basin 1312, a space 1313 is provided on the upstream side of the guide path 1315, and a space 1316 is provided on the downstream side of the guide path 1315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the eave portion 1311 a of the receiving gutter 1311 serves as a roof of the room 1316 to collapse. The eaves section 1311a is located immediately above the collapse room 1316. Thus, the eaves 1311a can prevent the discharge spheres from being piled up immediately below the eaves 1311a in the receiving basin 1312, and can form a collapsing space 1316 in the receiving basin 1312. The collapse allowance space 1316 is located immediately above the out sensor 1340 and prevents the discharge ball from directly falling on the out sensor 1340. Therefore, the fall allowance space 1316 has at least the length L4 of the receiving gutter 1311 as a roof. However, the length L4 is a value larger than the length L5 when the width of the out sensor 1340 is the length L5. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can protect the out sensor 1340 from the falling impact of the ejected ball. Further, the gaming machine 10 can prevent erroneous detection of a discharged ball by the out sensor 1340.

  In the gaming machine 10, the eave portion 1313 a of the receiving gutter 1313 serves as a roof of the fall-apart space 1317. The eaves portion 1313a is located immediately above the collapse room 1317. Thus, the eaves 1313a can prevent the discharge spheres from being piled up immediately below the eaves 1313a in the receiving basin 1312, and can form the collapse room 1317 in the receiving basin 1312.

  The eaves portion 1311a functions as a direct flow inhibition portion that prevents the discharge sphere from flowing directly down to the out sensor 1340 by being located directly above the out sensor 1340. Further, since the eaves portion 1311a is located immediately above the out sensor 1340, the eave portion 1311a functions as a down flow path extending section that extends a down flow path through which the discharge ball flows down to the out sensor 1340. The gaming machine 10 can appropriately rectify the discharged balls by extending the flow path of the discharged balls, thereby contributing to prevention of erroneous detection of the discharged balls by the out sensor 1340. Such a direct flow inhibition part and a flow path extension part can be realized not only by eaves-like members but also by ribs, bosses, members of other shapes, and the like.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 has the receiving gutters 1311, 1313 immediately above the fall-over space 1316, 1317 as roofs of the fall-over space 1316, 1317, so that the discharge balls from the game board 30 fall into the fall-over space 1316, 1317. Prevent stacking directly.

  The receiving basin 1312 includes a guide wall 1314 at one end on the discharge side. The receiving basin 1312 includes a discharge path 1341 having the guide wall 1314 as one side, and an out sensor 1340 is disposed in the discharge path 1341.

Next, the receiving port of the game ball discharged from the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the eighth embodiment.
The game board 30 has a safe ball receiving port and an out ball receiving port. Note that the safe ball receiving port and the out ball receiving port are forms of a receiving unit that can receive game balls. The safe ball receiving port and the out ball receiving port may have a fixed opening size or may have a variation (for example, change the size of the opening or switch the presence or absence of the opening). You may.

  The launched game ball enters either the safe ball receiving port or the out ball receiving port. The gaming board 30 has three general winning openings 35 on the lower left side of the center case 40 and one general winning opening 35 on the lower right side of the center case 40. The general winning opening 35 is one of the safe ball entrances. The general winning opening 35 is an entrance for a safe ball having a width W4.

  The game board 30 has a start winning port 36 below the center case 40. The starting winning port 36 is one of the safe ball receiving ports. The starting winning opening 36 is a receiving opening for a safe ball having a width W5. In addition, the game board 30 has a normal variable winning device 37 immediately below the starting winning port 36. The normal variable prize winning device 37 is one of the safe ball receiving ports. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is an entrance for a safe ball having a width W6. The game board 30 has a special variable winning device 38 below the center case 40 and to the right of the starting winning port 36. The special variable winning device 38 is one of the safe ball receiving ports. The special fluctuation prize winning device 38 is a receiving port for a safe ball having a width W8. Generally, the size of the safe ball receiving port is larger in the order of width W4, width W5, width W6, and width W8. The receiving ability of the game ball at the safe ball receiving port increases as the size of the safe ball receiving port increases.

  In addition, the game board 30 has an out port 30 a below the ordinary variable prize device 37. The out port 30a is one of receiving ports for out balls. The out port 30a is a receiving port for an out ball having a width W7. The special variable prize winning device 38 and the out port 30a are capable of receiving a large amount of game balls as compared with other receiving ports.

  Next, the position and size of the discharge port of the game ball received from the reception port will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating an example of the position and the size of the discharge port with respect to the back channel constituting unit according to the eighth embodiment.

  The game board 30 is provided with a discharge port 1350 to a discharge port 1355, and discharges a game ball entering either the safe ball receiving port or the out ball receiving port from the discharge port 1350 to the discharge port 1355.

  In addition, the discharge port 1350 to the discharge port 1355 are one form of a discharge unit capable of discharging game balls. The outlets 1350 to 1355 are not necessarily limited to a flow path having a closed periphery (for example, a tubular flow path having a circular or rectangular cross section) and a flow path not having a closed periphery (for example, having a semi-circular cross section or It may be provided in a gutter-like flow path having a character shape or the like.

  The outlets 1350, 1351, 1354, 1355 have a width W9, for example, a size that allows one game ball to pass through. The discharge port 1352 has a width W10, and has a size that allows two or more game balls to pass through, for example. The discharge port 1353 has a width W11 and is, for example, a size that allows two or more game balls to pass.

  Therefore, the discharge ports 1352, 1353 are discharge ports having a higher discharging ability of the game ball than the discharge ports 1350, 1351, 1354, 1355. Therefore, the discharge ports 1352, 1353 are disposed immediately above the receiving pit 1312 (position L2 in the figure) having a high discharge ball receiving capacity. In addition, the outlets 1352 and 1353 are arranged on the side closer to the out sensor 1340 in the receiving cavities 1312 so that the discharge ball quickly reaches the out sensor 1340.

  The outlets requiring high discharge capacity include an outlet corresponding to the out port 30a and an outlet corresponding to the special variable winning device 38. The discharge port corresponding to the out port 30a discharges game balls that do not pass through the game ball detection sensor, and the discharge port corresponding to the special variable winning device 38 passes through the game ball detection sensor (large winning port switch 38a). Eject the ball. Therefore, the discharge port corresponding to the out port 30a is required to have a higher discharge capacity than the discharge port corresponding to the special variable winning device 38. Therefore, when the outlet 1352 is an outlet corresponding to the outlet 30a and the outlet 1353 is an outlet corresponding to the special variable winning device 38, the width W10 is preferably larger than the width W11.

  Outlets that do not require as high a discharge capacity as the out port 30a and the special variable winning device 38 correspond to a general winning port 35, a discharging port corresponding to the starting winning port 36, and a normal variable winning device 37. There is an outlet. The outlet corresponding to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, when converted to a state in which game balls easily flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an outlet corresponding to the general winning opening 35 and an outlet corresponding to the starting winning opening 36. Higher emission capacity is required as compared to. On the other hand, the outlet corresponding to the ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to the outlet corresponding to the general winning opening 35 and the starting winning opening 36 when the game ball is converted into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the ordinary variable winning device 37. A low discharge capacity is sufficient compared to a discharge port that does. Therefore, the discharge port 1354 is a discharge port corresponding to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and is disposed immediately above the receiving basin 1312 having a high discharge ball receiving capacity. Note that the outlet 1354 is disposed at a position farther from the out sensor 1340 than the outlets 1352 and 1353 since the outlet 30a and the special variable prize winning device 38 do not require a high discharging ability.

  The discharge port corresponding to the start winning port 36 has a higher discharge frequency than the discharge port corresponding to the general winning port 35, but does not require a high discharge capacity. Therefore, the discharge port corresponding to the start winning port 36 is the discharge port 1351 disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1311 (at the position L1 in the figure) with an emphasis on the alignment ability because the possibility of ball spilling is small. The discharge port 1351 is provided on the side of the receiving gutter 1311 that is closer to the out sensor 1340 so that the discharge ball quickly reaches the out sensor 1340.

  The outlets corresponding to the general winning opening 35 are located in the respective game areas since the general winning opening 35 is disposed on the left side (the left game area) of the game area 32 and on the right side (the right game area) of the game area 32. There are two corresponding. The outlet 1350 is an outlet corresponding to the right game area, and the outlet 1355 is an outlet corresponding to the left game area. The outlet corresponding to the general winning opening 35 has a lower discharging frequency than the outlet corresponding to the starting winning opening 36, and does not require a high discharging ability. For this reason, the discharge port corresponding to the general winning opening 35 has a small risk of spilling, so the discharge port 1350 disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1311 or the discharge port 1350 immediately above the receiving gutter 1313 (the position of L3 in the figure). A discharge port 1355 provided. Note that the discharge ports 1350 and 1355 are provided on the side far from the out sensor 1340 because the discharge frequency is low.

  In addition, according to one viewpoint, the outlet corresponding to the entrance (general winning opening 35) having the width W4 is a position where the depth of the receiving gutter 1311 or 1313 or the receiving basin 1312 is equal to or more than the width W4. The discharge port corresponding to the entrance having the width W5 (start winning opening 36) is a position where the depth of the reception gutters 1311 and 1313 or the reception basin 1312 is equal to or more than the width W5. The discharge port corresponding to the entrance having the width W6 (the normal fluctuation winning device 37) is a position where the depth of the reception gutters 1311 and 1313 or the reception basin 1312 is equal to or more than the width W6. The discharge port corresponding to the reception port (out port 30a) having the width W7 is a position where the depth of the reception gutters 1311 and 1313 or the reception basin 1312 is equal to or more than the width W7. The discharge port corresponding to the entrance having the width W8 (the special variable winning device 38) is a position where the depth of the reception gutters 1311 and 1313 or the reception basin 1312 is equal to or greater than the width W8. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can have a margin against a ball spill. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can efficiently discharge the game ball from the discharge port.

  According to another aspect, the outlets 1350, 1351, 1354, and 1355 having the width W9 are positions where the depth of the receiving cell 1312 is equal to or greater than the width W9. The outlet 1352 having the width W10 is a position where the depth of the receiving basin 1312 is equal to or greater than the width W10. The outlet 1353 having the width W11 is a position where the depth of the receiving basin 1312 is equal to or greater than the width W11. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can have a margin against a ball spill. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can efficiently discharge the game ball from the discharge port.

Here, the outlet assignment rules will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating an example of an outlet assignment rule according to the eighth embodiment.
The outlet assignment rule 1360 is a rule for assigning a discharge position to the back channel forming unit 1300 to an outlet. First, outlets are evaluated in terms of emission opportunities and emission densities. The evaluation is made by comparing the outlets. The emission opportunity evaluation is an index for evaluating the size of the emission opportunity, and is “large” when the emission opportunity is relatively large, and “small” when the emission opportunity is relatively small. The discharge opportunity may be evaluated by setting a threshold value, or may be based on whether or not a winning opportunity is restricted depending on a game state. For example, the evaluation of the discharge opportunity is “large” when the discharge opportunity is expected to be five or more times per minute, and “small” when the discharge opportunity is not expected to be five or more times per minute.

  Emission density evaluation is an index for evaluating the magnitude of emission density, which is "large" when the emission density is relatively high and "small" when the emission amount per emission opportunity is relatively small . The emission density may be evaluated by setting a threshold value, or may be evaluated based on the size of the reception port. For example, the evaluation of the discharge density is “large” when the size of the reception port is equal to or larger than a predetermined value, and is “small” when the size of the reception port is not equal to or larger than the predetermined value.

  For example, the discharge port corresponding to the general winning opening 35 has a discharge opportunity of “small” because the discharge opportunity is not large, and has a discharge density of “small” because the size of the reception port is small. In addition, the discharge port corresponding to the start winning port 36 has a large discharge opportunity and therefore has a large discharge opportunity, and the small size of the reception port has a small discharge density. In addition, the discharge port corresponding to the out port 30a has a large discharge opportunity and thus has a large discharge opportunity, and the large size of the reception port has a large discharge density. In addition, the discharge port corresponding to the special variable winning device 38 has a small discharge opportunity because the discharge opportunity is small, and has a large discharge density because the size of the receiving port is large. Further, the discharge port corresponding to the normal variable winning device 37 has a small discharge opportunity because of a small discharge opportunity, and has a large discharge density because the size of the receiving port is large.

  Emissions evaluated in terms of emission opportunities and emission densities in this way are assigned as emission outlets in principle. The discharge ports evaluated as “small discharge” and “small discharge density” are arranged on a gutter (the receiving gutter 1311 or the receiving gutter 1313), and are basically arranged at a position far from the out sensor 1340. In addition, the discharge ports evaluated as “large” and “small” discharge density are arranged on a gutter and are arranged in a position close to the out sensor 1340 in principle. In addition, the outlets evaluated as “small” and “high” in the discharge opportunity are arranged on the basin (the receiving basin 1312) and arranged in a position far from the out sensor 1340 in principle. In addition, the discharge ports evaluated as “large” and “high” in the discharge opportunity are arranged on a basin and arranged in a position close to the out sensor 1340 in principle. The outlets 1350 to 1355 shown in FIG. 189 are arranged based on the positions in accordance with the outlet assignment rule 1360 in principle.

  When it is difficult to satisfy the outlet assignment rule 1360 for all outlets due to various restrictions, a priority rule may be provided such that outlets having a large emission density are preferentially arranged. Further, it is not always necessary to apply the outlet assignment rule 1360 to all outlets. The discharge port allocation rule 1360 may be applied only to a part of the discharge ports which is a main cause of the ball stopping. Some of the outlets that are the main causes of stopping the ball include, for example, an outlet corresponding to the out port 30a and an outlet corresponding to the special variable winning device 38, and an outlet corresponding to the starting winning port 36, Further, it may include an outlet corresponding to the normal variable winning device 37.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can guide the ejected ball from the game board 30 to the out sensor 1340 while reducing the risk of spilling the ball and the risk of stopping the ball. That is, the gaming machine 10 can count discharged balls (out balls or safe balls) while reducing the risk of clogging of the game balls.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the eighth embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment in that the outlet is more objectively evaluated. FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example of an outlet assignment rule according to the first modification of the eighth embodiment.

  The outlet assignment rule 1361 shown in FIG. 191 (1) is one of the modified examples of the outlet assignment rule 1360. The outlet assignment rule 1361 is a rule for assigning an outlet position to the back channel forming unit 1300 to an outlet based on the number of sensors and the amount of discharge. The number of sensors is the number of sensors provided in the discharge channel until the game ball received from the reception port is discharged from the discharge port. For example, the discharge port corresponding to the out port 30a discharges the game balls received from the out port 30a without counting them, so that the number of sensors is "0". The discharge port corresponding to the start winning port 36 is the number of sensors "1" because the game balls received from the start winning port 36 are counted and discharged by the start port 1 switch 36a.

  A sensor for counting game balls becomes a bottleneck in the flow path. Therefore, since it is considered that the discharge port having the number of sensors “0” can discharge many game balls without a bottleneck, the discharge position is set to the cell and its priority is set high (“top of cell”). Since the discharge port having the number of sensors “1” is considered to have a bottleneck, the discharge position is set to the gutter (“gutter priority”). Since it is considered that the bottleneck is considered to be alleviated for the discharge ports having the number of sensors “2 or more”, the discharge position is set to the basin (“basis priority”).

  The distance between the discharge port and the out sensor 1340 is defined by the magnitude of the discharge amount among discharge ports arranged in a gutter or a basin. The discharge port having a small discharge amount among the discharge ports disposed in the gutter or the basin is disposed at a far position by the out sensor 1340. In addition, a discharge port having a large discharge amount among discharge ports disposed in a gutter or a basin is disposed at a position closer to the out sensor 1340.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can guide the ejected ball from the game board 30 to the out sensor 1340 while reducing the risk of spilling the ball and the risk of stopping the ball. That is, the gaming machine 10 can count discharged balls (out balls or safe balls) while reducing the risk of clogging of the game balls.

  The outlet assignment rule 1362 shown in FIG. 191 (2) is one of modified examples of the outlet assignment rule 1360. The discharge port allocation rule 1362 is a rule for allocating a discharge position to the back channel forming unit 1300 to a discharge port based on a discharge port size and a discharge amount. The outlet size is the width of the outlet. For example, the outlets 1352 and 1353 shown in FIG. 189 have a large outlet size. The outlets 1350, 1351, 1354, and 1355 shown in FIG. 189 have a small outlet size.

  The size of the outlet size for discharging the game ball becomes a bottleneck in the flow path. For this reason, it is considered that the bottleneck is reduced in the outlet having a large outlet size, so that the discharge position is set to the cell (“cell priority”). Since the discharge port having a small discharge port size is considered to have a bottleneck, the discharge position is set to a gutter ("pipe priority").

  The distance between the discharge port and the out sensor 1340 is defined by the magnitude of the discharge amount among discharge ports arranged in a gutter or a basin. The discharge port having a small discharge amount among the discharge ports disposed in the gutter or the basin is disposed at a far position by the out sensor 1340. In addition, a discharge port having a large discharge amount among discharge ports disposed in a gutter or a basin is disposed at a position closer to the out sensor 1340.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can guide the ejected ball from the game board 30 to the out sensor 1340 while reducing the risk of spilling the ball and the risk of stopping the ball. That is, the gaming machine 10 can count discharged balls (out balls or safe balls) while reducing the risk of clogging of the game balls.

  The outlet assignment rule 1363 shown in FIG. 191 (3) is one of the modified examples of the outlet assignment rule 1360. The discharge port allocation rule 1363 is a rule for allocating a discharge position to the back channel forming unit 1300 to a discharge port based on the number of prize balls and the discharge amount. The number of prize balls is designed so as to realize required game properties, and can be regarded as information reflecting a chance of receiving game balls at a reception entrance, a reception amount, and the like.

  For example, the number of award balls corresponding to the out mouth 30a is “0”. The number of prize balls corresponding to the special fluctuation winning device 38 is “10 or more”. The number of prize balls corresponding to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the starting winning opening 36, and the general winning opening 35 is "other".

  The reception port with the number of prize balls “0” is considered to receive the most game balls because it is the out port 30 a, and the reception port with the number of prize balls “10 or more” will be the special variable winning device 38. It is considered that many game balls are accepted. The reception port for the number of prize balls “other” is considered to be a reception port that contributes to the base, and is not considered to receive many game balls.

  Therefore, the outlet corresponding to the receiving port having the number of prize balls of “0” is set to have a high priority (“top priority of cell”) with the discharge position as a cell. The discharge position corresponding to the reception port having the number of prize balls of “10 or more” is set to the discharge position of the measure (“measure priority”). The discharge position corresponding to the receiving port for the number of prize balls “other” sets the discharge position to a gutter (“gutter priority”).

  The distance between the discharge port and the out sensor 1340 is defined by the magnitude of the discharge amount among discharge ports arranged in a gutter or a basin. The discharge port having a small discharge amount among the discharge ports disposed in the gutter or the basin is disposed at a far position by the out sensor 1340. In addition, a discharge port having a large discharge amount among discharge ports disposed in a gutter or a basin is disposed at a position closer to the out sensor 1340.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can guide the ejected ball from the game board 30 to the out sensor 1340 while reducing the risk of spilling the ball and the risk of stopping the ball. That is, the gaming machine 10 can count discharged balls (out balls or safe balls) while reducing the risk of clogging of the game balls.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a modification 2 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in that two or more outlets are regarded as one outlet and a discharge position with respect to the back channel configuration unit 1300 is assigned. Different from 10. FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating an example of a position and a size of a discharge port with respect to the back channel configuration unit according to Modification Example 2 of the eighth embodiment.

  In the gaming machine 10, there is a case where the receiving amount of the game ball of another receiving port becomes smaller by increasing the receiving amount of the game ball of a certain receiving port. As the correspondence depending on the position of the entrance, for example, there is a correspondence between the special fluctuation winning device 38 and the out mouth 30a. When the game ball is converted into a state in which the game ball easily flows into the special variable winning device 38, the amount of the game ball accepted by the special variable winning device 38 increases, and the amount of the game ball accepted through the out port 30a decreases. Further, when the game ball is converted into a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the special variable winning device 38, the accepted amount of the game ball of the special variable winning device 38 decreases, and the accepted amount of the game ball of the out port 30a increases.

  Further, as a correspondence relationship depending on the game state, for example, there is a correspondence relationship between the normal variable prize device 37 and the special variable prize device 38. The chance of the game state during the normal power winning support being converted to a state in which game balls easily flow into the normal variable prize winning device 37 increases, and the opportunity to be converted into a state in which game balls easily flow into the special variable prize winning device 38 increase. Absent. Also, the gaming state during the big hit increases the chance of being converted into a state in which game balls easily flow into the special variable prize apparatus 38, and has an opportunity to be converted into a state in which game balls easily flow into the normal variable prize apparatus 37. Absent. Therefore, in the gaming state during the normal power support, the amount of game balls received by the normal variable prize device 37 increases, and the amount of game balls received by the special variable prize device 38 decreases. In the gaming state during the big hit, the amount of game balls accepted by the normal variable prize device 37 decreases and the amount of game balls accepted by the special variable prize device 38 increases.

  Such outlets that have a corresponding relationship that depends on the position of the receiving port or a gaming state depend on the gaming state, and have a small risk of spilling even if they are regarded as one outlet when arranged adjacently. .

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the discharge port 1352 corresponding to the out port 30a having a correspondence relationship depending on the position of the reception port and the discharge port 1353 corresponding to the special variable winning device 38 are arranged adjacent to each other, so that the ball spills. Risk can be reduced. Such an outlet 1352 and an outlet 1353 form an outlet group 1356. The outlet group 1356 can be regarded as one outlet. Since the outlet group 1356 can be regarded as an outlet having a width W12, it is desirable that the outlet group 1356 be disposed immediately above the receiving basin 1312 and at a position having a depth equal to or greater than the width W12.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 has a ball 1353 which is disposed adjacent to a discharge port 1353 corresponding to the special variable prize device 38 and a discharge port 1354 corresponding to the normal variable prize device 37 having a correspondence relationship depending on the game state. The risk of spillage can be reduced. Such an outlet 1353 and an outlet 1354 constitute an outlet group 1357. The outlet group 1357 can be regarded as one outlet.

  Note that the outlet is not limited to being a component of only one outlet group, and may be a component of two outlet groups like the outlet 1353. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the risk of ball spill by arranging the outlets 1352 to the outlets 1353 and 1354 from the outlets 1352.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a third modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the eighth embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the eighth embodiment in that the gaming machine 10 has two out ports. FIG. 193 is a front view showing an example of the game board according to the third modification of the eighth embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 8th Embodiment, the code | symbol is the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the eighth embodiment includes a gaming board 3000. The game board 3000 has a safe ball receiving port and an out ball receiving port. The launched game ball enters either the safe ball receiving port or the out ball receiving port. The game board 3000 has two general prize holes 35 on the left side and the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general prize hole 35 on the lower right side of the center case 40. The general winning opening 35 is one of the safe ball entrances.

  Further, the gaming board 3000 has a starting port distribution device 361 (first starting winning port, second starting winning port, starting winning area) below the center case 40. The starting port distribution device 361 is one of the safe ball receiving ports. The starting port distributing device 361 includes a starting port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3), a starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3), and a distributing mechanism. The game balls are alternately distributed and guided to the starting port 2 switch 37a for each ball. Therefore, the game ball that has won the start-up port distribution device 361 is detected by the start-up port 1 switch 36a or the start-up port 2 switch 37a. The game balls received from the starting port sorting device 361 are the eighth balls to prevent the ball from being clogged due to the merging of the game balls detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the game balls detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a. It may be configured to discharge from a discharge port larger than the discharge port corresponding to the start winning port 36 described in the embodiment. Further, the game balls received from the start-up port distributing device 361 discharge the game balls detected by the start-up port 1 switch 36a and the game balls detected by the start-up port 2 switch 37a from different discharge ports. You may.

  In addition, the game board 30 has a normal fluctuation winning device 37 on the lower left side of the starting port sorting device 361. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member that can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end side falls down to the near side and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow. The normal variable prize winning device 37 is one of the safe ball receiving ports. The game board 30 has a special variable winning device 38 on the left side of the center case 40. The special fluctuation winning device 38 is provided with a single-blade type opening / closing door that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which an upper end side falls to the left side. The special variable winning device 38 is one of the safe ball receiving ports.

  Further, the game board 3000 has an out port 30 a below the start port distribution device 361. The out port 30a is one of receiving ports for out balls. The special variable prize winning device 38 and the out port 30a are capable of receiving a large amount of game balls as compared with other receiving ports.

  Further, the center case 40 has a warp port 39a provided below the special variable winning device 38. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port (warp inlet) 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, a part of which is guided to the warp outlet 39b, and another part is the out port 30b. Will be guided to. The warp exit 39b is located immediately above the starting port distribution device 361, and the game balls guided to the warp exit 39b can easily enter the starting port distribution device 361. The out port 30b is one of the receiving ports for out balls. The out port 30b receives a smaller amount of game balls than the out port 30a.

  Next, the position and size of the discharge port of the game ball received from the reception port will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a diagram illustrating an example of a position and a size of the outlet with respect to the back channel configuration unit according to Modification 3 of the eighth embodiment.

  The game board 3000 is provided with a discharge port 1370 to a discharge port 1376, and discharges a game ball entering either the safe ball reception port or the out ball reception port from the discharge port 1370 to the discharge port 1376.

  The discharge port 1370 is a discharge port corresponding to the general winning opening 35, and is disposed right above the receiving gutter 1311 (at a position L1 in the figure) with an emphasis on alignment ability because there is little possibility of ball spillage. The discharge port 1371 is a discharge port corresponding to the starting port distribution device 361, and is disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1311 with an emphasis on the alignment ability because the possibility of ball spilling is small. Further, the discharge port 1371 is disposed closer to the out sensor 1340 because there are more discharge opportunities than the discharge port 1370.

  The discharge port 1372 is a discharge port corresponding to the out port 30b, and is disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1311 with an emphasis on the alignment ability since the possibility of spilling is small. Further, the discharge port 1372 is disposed closer to the out sensor 1340 because there are more discharge opportunities than the discharge ports 1370 and 1371.

  The discharge port 1373 is a discharge port corresponding to the special variable winning device 38, and is disposed immediately above the receiving basin 1312 (position L2 in the drawing) having a high discharge ball receiving capability because the possibility of ball spilling is not small. You. The discharge port 1374 is a discharge port corresponding to the out port 30a, and is disposed immediately above the receiving basin 1312 having a high discharge ball receiving capacity because the possibility of spilling the ball is not small. It should be noted that the outlets 1373 and 1374 are provided with outlets having a larger width than other outlets.

  The discharge port 1375 is a discharge port corresponding to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and is disposed immediately above the receiving basin 1312 having a high discharge ball receiving capacity. The discharge port 1376 is a discharge port corresponding to the general winning opening 35, and is disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1311 with an emphasis on the alignment ability since the possibility of ball spilling is small.

  As described above, the game board 3000 includes the two out ports 30a and 30b, and the corresponding discharge ports 1372 and 1374. The discharge ball discharged from the discharge port 1372 and the discharge ball discharged from the discharge port 1374 fall to different positions of the back channel forming unit 1300 and reach the out sensor 1340 along different paths. In this way, the gaming machine 10 reduces the risk of ball clogging due to the discharge balls from the discharge ports corresponding to the two out ports 30a, 30b.

  In particular, the gaming machine 10 makes the receiving capacities of the game balls from the out ports 30a and 30b unbalanced, so that the discharging capacities from the respective outlets are also imbalanced. As a result, the gaming machine 10 arranges, among the outlets corresponding to the outlets 30a and 30b, the outlet having a low discharge capacity (that is, the width of the discharge port is small) right above the receiving gutter 1311 and has a high discharge capacity. The outlet (that is, the width of the outlet is large) can be disposed directly above the receiving basin 1312. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can further reduce the risk of clogging of balls due to discharge balls from the discharge ports corresponding to the two out ports 30a and 30b.

  In addition, the outlet 1372, the outlet 1373, and the outlet 1374 can form an outlet group as described in the second modification of the eighth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 arranges the discharge port 1373 corresponding to the special variable winning device 38 between the discharge ports 1372 and 1374 corresponding to the out ports 30a and 30b, thereby controlling the discharge amount as a discharge port group regardless of the game state. Can be leveled without the need. By arranging such outlet groups near the out sensor 1340, the gaming machine 10 stabilizes the inflow of game balls into the out sensor 1340, and reduces the risk of clogging of balls due to the discharged balls.

  Although the gaming machine 10 according to the third modification of the eighth embodiment has two out ports, the same applies to a case in which two special variable winning devices 38 are provided instead of the out ports. . That is, when the gaming machine 10 is provided with the first special variable prize device and the second special variable prize device, the gaming machine 10 has an outlet corresponding to the first special variable prize device, an outlet corresponding to the out port, An outlet group corresponding to the second special variable prize winning device can be formed and arranged near the out sensor 1340. At this time, the gaming machine 10 imbalances the discharge capacity from the outlet corresponding to the first special variable winning device and the outlet corresponding to the second special variable winning device, and accepts one of the outlets. It can be arranged directly above the gutter 1311 and the other outlet can be arranged directly above the receiving basin 1312.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fourth modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the fourth modification of the eighth embodiment includes two outlets corresponding to the out ports, similarly to the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the eighth embodiment. Note that the gaming machine 10 of Modification 4 of the eighth embodiment may be provided with two receiving ports for two outlets corresponding to the out ports, or two outlets corresponding to the out ports. May be provided with one receiving port for branching in the discharge channel. FIG. 195 is a diagram illustrating an example of a position and a size of a discharge port with respect to a back channel configuration unit according to Modification Example 4 of the eighth embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to the modification 3 of 8th Embodiment, the code | symbol is the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The game board 3000 is provided with a discharge port 1386 through a discharge port 1386, and discharges a game ball that has entered either the safe ball receiving port or the out ball receiving port from the discharge port 1380 through the discharge port 1386.

  The outlet 1380 is an outlet corresponding to the outlet 30a, and the outlet 1383 is an outlet corresponding to the outlet 30b. The discharge port 1380 is disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1311 (at the position L1 in the figure), and the discharge port 1383 is disposed immediately above the receiving pit 1312 (at the position L2 in the figure). In addition, since the discharge port 1380 discharges the out ball by sharing with the discharge port 1383, even if the discharge port 1380 is disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1311, the risk of spilling the ball is reduced.

  The outlets 1381, 1382, 1384, 1385, 1386 are outlets corresponding to safe balls. For example, the outlet 1381 is an outlet corresponding to the general winning opening 35, and the outlet 1382 is an outlet corresponding to the starter sorting device 361. The outlets 1381 and 1382 are provided immediately above the receiving gutter 1311. The outlet 1384 is an outlet corresponding to the special variable winning device 38, the outlet 1385 is an outlet corresponding to the normal variable winning device 37, and the outlet 1386 is an outlet corresponding to the general winning device 35. It is. The outlets 1384, 1385 are disposed immediately above the receiving basin 1312, and the outlet 1386 is disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1313 (the position of L3 in the figure).

  The discharge ball discharged from the discharge port 1380 and the discharge ball discharged from the discharge port 1383 fall to different positions of the back channel forming unit 1300, and reach the out sensor 1340 along different paths. In this way, the gaming machine 10 reduces the risk of ball clogging due to the discharge balls from the discharge ports corresponding to the two out ports 30a, 30b.

  The outlet 1380 is located farther from the out sensor 1340 than the other outlets (discharge ports 1381 and 1382) located immediately above the receiving gutter 1311. Therefore, when a ball is clogged in the flow path from the discharge port 1380 to the out sensor 1340, the discharge ball from the discharge port 1380 is not detected by the out sensor 1340.

  Further, the clogging of the out ball can be detected in a short time because the discharge amount is larger than that of the safe ball. By accepting the out ball at a position far from the out sensor 1340 on the receiving gutter 1311, the gaming machine 10 can detect the clogging of the ball on the receiving gutter 1311 at an early stage.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fifth modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the fifth modification of the eighth embodiment includes a gaming board 1000 similarly to the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 161). FIG. 196 is a diagram illustrating an example of a position and a size of a discharge port with respect to a back channel configuration unit according to Modification Example 5 of the eighth embodiment. In addition, about the structure similar to 7th Embodiment, the code | symbol is the same and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The game board 1000 is provided with a discharge port 1390 to a discharge port 1396, and discharges a game ball entering either the safe ball receiving port or the out ball receiving port from the discharge port 1390 to the discharge port 1396.

  In the back channel configuration unit 1301, the lengths of the receiving gutter 1311, the receiving tub 1312, and the receiving gutter 1313 are lengths L11, L21, and L3, respectively. That is, the receiving gutter 1311 can receive the discharging sphere in the range of the length L11 (<L1, L21), and the receiving tub 1312 can receive the discharging sphere in the range of the length L21 (> L2, L11). In addition, the receiving gutter 1313 can receive the discharge sphere in the range of the length L3. The length L3 is extremely smaller than the lengths L11 and L21. In this way, the back channel forming unit 1301 secures a united size for the lengths L11 and L21 by making the sizes of the receiving gutters 1311 and 1313 asymmetric. Further, the length of the receiving basin 1312 is increased corresponding to the outlet 1390 to the outlet 1396 facing the back channel forming unit 1301.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the outlet on the receiving gutter 1311 and the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the outlet on the receiving pit 1312. Such a gaming machine 10 can flexibly respond to the arrangement of the outlets even when the gaming board 1000 is replaced.

  The discharge port 1393 is a discharge port corresponding to the first special variable winning device (first large winning port) 1001, and the discharge port 1394 is a discharge port corresponding to the second special variable winning device (second large winning port) 38. Exit. The outlets 1393, 1394 are disposed immediately above the receiving basin 1312 (the position of L21 in the figure). The discharge port 1392 is a discharge port corresponding to the out port 30a, and is disposed immediately above the receiving basin 1312.

  The outlets 1390, 1391, 1395, and 1396 are outlets corresponding to the safe sphere. For example, the outlet 1390 is an outlet corresponding to the general winning opening 35, and the outlet 1391 is an outlet corresponding to the starting winning opening 36. The discharge ports 1390 and 1391 are disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1311 (at a position L11 in the figure). The outlet 1395 is an outlet corresponding to the ordinary variable winning device 37, and the outlet 1396 is an outlet corresponding to the general winning opening 35. The discharge port 1395 is disposed immediately above the receiving basin 1312, and the discharge port 1396 is disposed immediately above the receiving gutter 1313 (the position of L3 in the figure).

  It should be noted that the discharge port 1393 and the discharge port 1394 are arranged adjacent to each other since the first special variable prize device 1001 and the second special variable prize device 38 do not enter a state in which game balls can be simultaneously received. Even so, the risk of spilling is reduced.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 reduces the risk of ball spillage by arranging the two discharge ports 1393 and 1394 that do not simultaneously discharge game balls, and quickly flows down to the out sensor 1340. To reduce the risk of clogging of the balls due to the discharged balls.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a modification 6 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 and 198. The back channel configuration unit of Modification 6 of the eighth embodiment is different from the back channel configuration unit 1300 of the eighth embodiment in that it has a deenergizing unit. FIG. 197 is a plan view showing a discharge path of a safe sphere and an out sphere of a back channel configuration unit according to Modification 6 of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 198 is a cross-sectional view showing a discharge path of a safe sphere and an out sphere of a back channel constituting unit according to Modification 6 of the eighth embodiment. The cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 198 is a BB cross-sectional view of the back channel forming unit 1302 shown in FIG. 197.

  The back channel configuration unit 1302 includes ribs 1400, 1401, 1402 on the side surface of the receiving basin 1312. The ribs 1400, 1401, and 1402 are in a semicircular shape with rounded ends facing the outlet side. The rib 1400 is located below the receiving gutter 1311, and the rib 1402 is located below the receiving gutter 1313, so that the ribs 1400 and 1402 are in positions that cannot be seen from the upper opening of the receiving basin 1312. The rib 1401 is at a position that can be viewed from the upper opening of the receiving basin 1312. The rib 1401 has a function of diffusing the falling direction when a game ball received from the discharge port collides with the end, thereby reducing the risk of ball clogging.

The rib 1401 provided on the side surface on the front-side collecting gutter 1321 side is in a diagonal position not facing the rib 1401 provided on the side surface on the rear-side collecting gutter 1331 side.
The bottom surface of the receiving basin 1312 has a deceleration pattern 1403. The deceleration pattern 1403 is a trapezoidal pattern in which the lower bottom is in contact with the side surface on the front-side collecting gutter 1321 side or the side surface on the rear-side collecting gutter 1331 side. The deceleration pattern 1403 reduces the number of game balls rolling on the deceleration pattern 1403. The deceleration pattern 1403 can be realized by the surface shape (for example, uneven shape) of the bottom surface of the receiving basin 1312, the surface processing, the surface painting, the attachment of the energy dissipation sheet, and the like.

  The ribs 1400, 1401, 1402 and the deceleration pattern 1403 correspond to the energy-reducing portion provided in the back channel configuration unit 1302. The gaming machine 10 can arrange the game balls flowing down to the out sensor 1340 by such a deenergizing unit. Further, in the gaming machine 10, since the discharged ball flows down to the out sensor 1340 without delay, the risk of clogging the ball can be reduced.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with the ribs 1400, 1401, 1402 and the deceleration pattern 1403 as the energy reducing portion, but any one of them may be provided.
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a modification 7 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The back channel forming unit of the seventh modification of the eighth embodiment is different from the sixth modification of the eighth embodiment in that one end of the rib does not contact the bottom surface of the receiving tub 1312. FIG. 199 is a cross-sectional view showing a discharge path of a safe sphere and an out sphere of a back channel configuration unit according to Modification 7 of the eighth embodiment. The cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 199 is a cross-sectional view in the same direction as FIG. 198.

  The back channel configuration unit 1303 includes ribs 1404, 1405, and 1406 on the side surface of the receiving basin 1312. The ribs 1404, 1405, and 1406 are in the shape of a semicircle with both ends rounded. The ribs 1404, 1405, and 1406 prevent the lower end from being in contact with the bottom surface (the guide path 1315) of the receiving pit 1312, thereby achieving both reduction of the game ball and securing of the capacity of the receiving pit 1312, and excessive reduction. Prevents clogging of balls by force.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 of a modified example 8 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The back channel configuration unit of Modification 8 of the eighth embodiment differs from the eighth embodiment in that a movable gutter is provided. First, the operation state of the movable gutter will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200 is a cross-sectional view showing a discharge path of a safe sphere and an out sphere of a back flow path constituting unit according to Modification 8 of the eighth embodiment.

  The back channel configuration unit 1304 shown in FIG. 200 (1) includes movable gutters 1411 and 1412. The movable gutters 1411 and 1412 can advance and retreat from the rear-side collecting gutter 1331 side. In the back channel configuration unit 1304 shown in FIG. 200 (1), the movable gutter 1411 is in the advanced state, and the movable gutter 1412 is in the retracted state. Thereby, the back channel forming unit 1304 shown in FIG. 200 (1) enables the length of the receiving gutter 1410 to be extended by the length of the movable gutter 1411.

  In the back channel forming unit 1304 shown in FIG. 200 (2), the movable gutter 1412 is in the advanced state, and the movable gutter 1411 is in the retracted state. Thus, the back channel forming unit 1304 shown in FIG. 200 (2) enables the length of the receiving gutter 1413 to be extended by the length of the movable gutter 1412.

  The back channel forming unit 1304 not only switches the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 between the advanced state and the retracted state, but also sets the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 to the advanced state or the retracted state at the same time. Is also good. The movable gutters 1411 and 1412 are switched by an actuator.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can change the opening position and the opening size of the receiving basin 1312 in accordance with the discharge state from the discharge port.
Next, a movable gutter switching process for switching the states of the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the movable gutter switching process of the eighth modification of the eighth embodiment. The movable gutter switching process is a process executed by the effect control device 300 (control unit). Note that the game control device 100 may execute the movable gutter switching process instead of the effect control device 300.

  [Step E1] The control unit determines whether or not the current gaming state is a big hit state. The control unit proceeds to step E2 when the current gaming state is the big hit state, and proceeds to step E3 when the current gaming state is not the big hit state.

  [Step E2] The control unit sets the switching state of the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 to the movable gutter switching state 1 (for example, the movable gutter 1411 is in the advanced state and the movable gutter 1412 is in the retracted state), and ends the movable gutter switching processing. I do.

  [Step E3] The control unit sets the switching state of the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 to the movable gutter switching state 2 (for example, the movable gutter 1412 is in the advanced state and the movable gutter 1411 is in the retracted state), and ends the movable gutter switching processing. I do.

The gaming machine 10 can switch the state of the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 by operating the actuator according to the set movable gutter switching state.
The control unit controls the switching state of the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 based on the presence or absence of the big hit state. However, the control unit controls the switching state of the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 based on other game states such as a normal power support state. It may be something. The control unit may determine the type (model) of the game board and control the switching state of the movable gutters 1411 and 1412.

  In such a gaming machine 10, the opening position and the opening size of the receiving basin 1312 can be changed flexibly in accordance with the discharge state from the discharge port. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can guide the ejected ball to the out sensor 1340 while reducing the risk of ball spilling and clogging.

  Although the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 are switched by the actuator, they may be switched manually. When the movable gutters 1411 and 1412 are manually switched, the switching state may be selected by an operator, or the fitting state between the gaming machine 10 and the gaming board when the gaming board is mounted on the gaming machine 10. The switching state may be uniquely determined by the setting. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can guide the ejected ball to the out sensor 1340 corresponding to the replaced gaming board even if the gaming board is replaced.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described eighth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a first discharge unit (discharge port 1350), a second discharge unit (discharge port 1352), a detection unit (out sensor 1340), a guide flow path (a back flow path forming unit). 1300). The first discharge unit discharges the game balls from the game board (game board 30) at a first discharge amount. The second discharger discharges the game ball from the game board at a second discharge amount larger than the first discharge amount. The detection unit can detect a game ball. The guide flow path guides the game balls discharged from the first discharging unit and the second discharging unit to the detecting unit after receiving them in the pits (the receiving gutter 1311 and the receiving pit 1312). Further, the guide flow path has a receiving position for receiving the game balls discharged from the second discharge portion (receiving pit 1312), based on the depth of the basin of the receiving position (reception gutter 1311) of the game balls discharged from the first discharge portion. The depth of the measure was increased.

  (2) In the gaming machine 10 of (1), the depth of the cell at the receiving position of the game balls discharged from the first discharge unit is equal to or more than two game balls, and the game balls 10 are discharged from the second discharge unit. The depth of the measure at the receiving position of the game ball is less than two game balls.

(3) In the gaming machine 10 of (2), the depth of the cell at the receiving position of the game ball discharged from the second discharge portion is less than one game ball.
(4) The gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of discharge ports (discharge ports 1350 and 1352), a detection unit (out sensor 1340), and a guide channel (back channel configuration unit 1300). The plurality of outlets discharge game balls from the game board (game board 30). The detection unit can detect a game ball. The guide flow path guides the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the detection unit after receiving the game ball in a basin having a different depth according to a drop position. Further, the plurality of outlets are smaller than the size (width W4, width W7) of the reception opening (general winning opening 35, out opening 30a) which has received the game ball hit into the game area, and the number of the discharged game ball falls. It is located at a position where the depth of the position measure becomes large.

  (5) The gaming machine 10 has a first out port (out port 30a), a second out port (out port 30b), a first outlet (outlet 1374), and a second outlet ( (A discharge port 1372), a detection unit (out sensor 1340), and a guide channel (back channel configuration unit 1300). The first out port accepts a game ball that has not had a winning opportunity in the first downflow path. The second out port accepts a game ball that has not had a winning opportunity in a second flow path different from the first flow path. The first outlet discharges the game ball received from the first outlet. The second discharge port discharges the game ball received from the second out port. The detection unit can detect a game ball. The guide flow path guides the game ball discharged from the first discharge port and the second discharge port to the detection unit after receiving the game ball in the box. Further, the guide channel receives the game ball discharged from the first discharge port at a position corresponding to the depth of the first basin, guides the game ball to the detection unit through the first guide path, and is discharged from the second discharge port. The received game ball is received at a position where the depth of the second cell is different from the depth of the first cell, and is guided to the detection unit via the second guide route.

  (6) The gaming machine 10 has a first receiving portion (a safe ball receiving port or an out ball receiving port) and a second receiving portion (a safe ball receiving port or an out ball different from the first receiving portion). Receiving port), a first discharge section (discharge port 1374), a second discharge section (discharge port 1372), a detection section (out sensor 1340), and a guide flow path (back flow path configuration unit 1300). ,including. The first receiving unit receives a game ball that has flowed down in the first flow-down path. The second receiving unit receives a game ball that has flowed down on a second flow-down path different from the first flow-down path. The first discharging unit discharges the game balls received from the first receiving unit. The second discharging unit discharges the game balls received from the second receiving unit. The detection unit can detect a game ball. The guide flow path guides the game balls discharged from the first discharge unit and the second discharge unit to the detection unit after receiving the game balls in the box. Further, the guide channel receives the game ball discharged from the first discharge portion at a position corresponding to the depth of the first measure, guides the game ball to the detection portion along the first guide path, and is discharged from the second discharge portion. The received game ball is received at a position where the depth of the second cell is different from the depth of the first cell, and is guided to the detection unit via the second guide route.

  (7) The gaming machine 10 includes a discharge unit (the discharge port 1350 and the like), a detection unit (out sensor 1340), and a guide flow path (the back flow path configuration unit 1300). The discharge unit discharges game balls from the game board (game board 30). The detection unit can detect a game ball. The guide flow path guides the game ball discharged from the discharge unit to the detection unit after receiving the game ball in a predetermined amount (accepting cell 1312) capable of receiving the game ball. The basin includes an eave portion (eave portion 1311a). The eaves portion prevents the game balls discharged from the discharge portion from being stacked immediately below, and forms a collapse allowance space (collapse allowance space 1316) serving as a collapse allowance of the game balls in the basin.

(8) The eaves of (7) are located above the detection unit and form a space for collapse (room 1316 for collapse) above the detection unit.
(9) The guide channel of (7) has a gutter for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge portion to the pit, and a part or all of the gutter includes an eave portion.

(10) The guide flow path of (7) includes a first eave portion (eave portion 1313a), and the first eave portion has a first collapsible space (collapse margin space 1317) on the upstream side of the basin. Form.
(11) The guide channel of (7) or (10) includes a second eave portion (eave portion 1311a), and the second eave portion is provided with a second collapsing space (collapse margin) on the downstream side of the basin. A space 1316) is formed.

[Ninth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a ninth embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment adjusts the content of the effect of each of the pending notices when two or more pending notices overlap in the pending notice effect performed on the display device 41. The hold announcement effect is an announcement effect performed by changing the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 (see FIG. 108) on the display device 41. The suspension display 605 indicates the suspension display number (starting storage number) in the special figure fluctuation display game and can notify the degree of expectation for the corresponding game result. Further, the reserved digest display 606 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

  First, the display mode of the hold display in the hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the hold display according to the ninth embodiment. Although the display mode of the hold display will be described, the same applies to the display mode of the hold digest display.

  The hold display has a plurality of types of display modes, for example, seven display modes that can be identified by an identification code. The display mode identified by the identification code “H0” and the identification code “H1” is a default (standard) display mode, for example, a circular and white display mode. However, the display mode identified by the identification code “H0” is a display mode related to a hold storage in which a hold announcement effect is not scheduled. In other words, the display mode identified by the identification code “H0” is a display mode relating to a non-latency storage state in which the hold announcement effect is not hidden. Further, the display mode identified by the identification code “H1” is a display mode relating to a hold storage in which a hold announcement effect is scheduled. In other words, the display mode identified by the identification code “H1” is a display mode related to the storage of the hiding state in which the hold announcement effect is hiding.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 does not perform the hold announcement effect according to the display mode identified by the identification code “H1”, but even if the hold announcement effect is not performed, the gaming machine 10 receives the hold announcement by referring to the identification code “H1”. There can be no notice announcement effect (for example, character display, voice output, etc.).

  The display mode identified by the identification code “H2” is one of the display modes for notifying the predetermined degree of expectation, and is, for example, a circular and blue display mode. For example, the display mode identified by the identification code “H2” reports a jackpot expectation of about 3%. The display mode identified by the identification code “H3” is one of the display modes for notifying a predetermined degree of expectation, and is, for example, a circular and green display mode. For example, the display mode identified by the identification code “H3” reports a jackpot expectation of about 10%. The display mode identified by the identification code “H4” is one of the display modes for notifying the predetermined degree of expectation, and is, for example, a circular and red display mode. For example, the display mode identified by the identification code “H4” reports a jackpot expectation of about 30%.

  The display mode identified by the identification code “H5” is one of the display modes for notifying the predetermined degree of expectation, and is, for example, a circular and cherry-blossom display mode. For example, the display mode identified by the identification code “H5” reports a big hit expectation of about 70%. The display mode identified by the identification code “H6” is one of the display modes for notifying the predetermined degree of expectation, and is, for example, a circular and rainbow display mode. For example, the display mode identified by the identification code “H6” reports a jackpot expectation degree of about 100%.

  The display mode of the hold display is not limited to a circle, but may be another shape (for example, a rectangle or a star). Further, the display mode of the hold display is not limited to the display in the stationary state, and may be a display with a change in size or an action. In addition, the contents to be notified by the display mode of the hold display include whether or not a big hit (including a small hit) is derived and the possibility thereof, as well as the magnitude of the value at the time of the big hit derivation (for example, whether or not there is a probability change and whether or not a general power Or the like) or the possibility thereof. In addition, the content to be notified by the display mode of the hold display may be the presence or absence of the reach development and the possibility thereof.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can give a notice of the advance of the variable display game in accordance with the display mode of the hold display or the display mode of the hold digest display.
Next, the hold change mode of the hold display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a diagram illustrating an example of a holding change mode of the holding display according to the ninth embodiment. The hold change mode of the hold display indicates a display mode (hold display mode) for each hold display when the display position is shifted for each hold exhaustion.

  The table shown in FIG. 203 (1) shows the presence / absence of a reservation for each reservation position, the display mode, and the change mode of the reservation. As for the reserved position, a position corresponding to the reserved display is indicated by “0”, and a position corresponding to the reserved display is indicated by “1” to “8”. That is, the reserved position “0” indicates the reserved use display, and the reserved positions “1” to “8” indicate the reserve displays corresponding to the corresponding reserved storage numbers.

  The presence / absence of suspension is indicated by “0 (absent)” or “1 (present)” indicating the presence / absence of suspension / extension display and the presence / absence of suspension display corresponding to the corresponding number of stored memories. That is, the table shown in FIG. 203 (1) has a reserved display, a reserved display corresponding to the number of reserved storages “1” to “3”, and a reserved display corresponding to the reserved storage number “4” to “8”. Is shown. The display mode indicates the display mode of the hold display in the case of the display with hold or the display of the hold with the identification code. The hold change mode indicates a display mode for each hold display when the display position is shifted for each hold exhaustion.

  In the table shown in FIG. 203 (1), the display mode of the hold display at the hold position "1" is the default (non-latent) (identification code "H0"), and the display mode is shifted when the display position is shifted due to the hold exhaustion. To indicate the default (non-latent) without changing. In the table shown in FIG. 203 (1), the display mode of the hold display at the hold position "3" is default (hidden) (identification code "H1"), and each time the display position is shifted due to the use of the hold, the blue color is displayed. , Green and red (in the order of the identification codes “H2”, “H3”, “H4”).

  The table shown in FIG. 203 (2) is the same table as the table shown in FIG. 203 (1), but differs in the holding change mode of the holding display at the holding position “3”. In the table shown in FIG. 203 (2), the display mode of the hold display at the hold position “3” is default (hidden) (identification code “H1”), and when the display position is shifted for the first time due to the hold digestion, the red ( The display mode is changed to the identification code “H4”), indicating that the display mode will not be changed by the shift of the display position due to the reserved use.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 sets the current display mode for the display mode of the hold display, and sets the display mode for each display position in response to the change of the display position due to the holddown. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can set different progress even if the hold display is finally the same display mode. For example, in the hold display at the hold position "3" shown in FIG. 203 (1), the progress of elevating the rank to three levels, one step at a time, is set. However, the hold position shown in FIG. 203 (2) is set. In the hold display in "3", the progress of elevating three stages at one time is set. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform various on-hold notice effects. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player with respect to the hold notice effect.

  On the other hand, if the hold notice effect is performed independently for each occurrence of the start memory, the hold notice effect is performed by overlapping two or more hold displays, and the hold notice effect that is not always easy for the player to understand may be performed. Can not. For this reason, the gaming machine 10 adjusts the effect contents of the hold notice effect generated each time the start memory is generated. Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 204, of a pending change mode determination process for generating and adjusting the pending announcement effect. FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the pending change mode determination process of the ninth embodiment. The hold change mode determination process is a process executed by the game control device 100 (control unit). The game control device 100 executes a pending change mode determination process every time the start memory is generated. The game control device 100 can execute the hold change mode determination process in step A164 (see FIG. 26) of the special figure hold information determination process, for example. Note that, instead of the game control device 100 or together with the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 may execute a holding change mode determination process.

  [Step E11] The control unit executes a final suspension mode determination process. The final hold mode determination process is a process of determining the final hold mode, which is the final display mode of the hold display. Details of the final reservation mode determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step E12] The control unit determines whether the final suspension mode is the default (identification code “H0”). The control unit proceeds to Step E13 when the final suspension mode is not the default, and proceeds to Step E16 when the final suspension mode is the default. The fact that the final hold mode is the default indicates that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  [Step E13] The control unit executes an initial suspension mode determination process. The initial hold mode determination process is a process of determining an initial hold mode, which is the first display mode of the hold display. Details of the initial hold mode determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step E14] The control unit executes a step-up process determination process. The step-up process determining process is a process of determining a step-up process of the hold display from the initial hold mode to the final hold mode. Details of the step-up process determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step E15] The control unit executes a pending change individual schedule determination process. The suspension change individual schedule determination process is a process of determining a specific suspension change schedule (reservation change individual schedule) from the step-up process determined in the step-up process determination process. Details of the pending change individual schedule determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In this way, the control unit can determine the suspension change individual schedule corresponding to the generated start memory.
[Step E16] The control unit executes an overall schedule update process. The overall schedule update process is a process of adjusting the existing overall schedule and the individual pending change schedule determined in the individual pending change schedule determination process to update the overall schedule. The overall schedule is information including an update schedule of the display mode of all the hold displays. Details of the overall schedule update process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the overall schedule update process, the control unit ends the suspension change mode determination process.

In this way, the control unit can realize a hold announcement effect that is easy for the player to understand by adjusting the existing overall schedule and the hold change individual schedule.
Next, the final hold mode determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 205 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the final hold mode determination process of the ninth embodiment. The final suspension mode determination process is a process for determining the final suspension mode of the generated start memory. The final hold mode determination process is a process executed by the game control device 100 (control unit) in step E11 of the hold change mode determination process.

  [Step E21] The control unit obtains a final holding mode lottery condition. The final reservation mode lottery condition is a result derived based on the generated start memory, a control state when the start memory is generated, and the like. The final hold mode lottery condition is, for example, whether or not the generated starting memory derives a big hit, and may include the number of rounds in the case of a big hit, whether or not there is a probability change, whether or not there is a general power support, etc. Good. The final hold mode lottery condition includes, for example, the number of hold displays, the distinction between the hold display related to Toku-zu 1 and the hold display related to Toku-zu 2, whether the probability is fluctuating or not, and whether the phone is being supported by the public telephone. Is also good.

  [Step E22] The control unit selects a final reservation mode determination table based on the acquired final reservation mode lottery condition. The control unit prepares in advance two or more final holding mode determination tables having different determination values, and selects one final holding mode determination table based on the final holding mode lottery condition.

  [Step E23] The control unit determines a final hold mode corresponding to the generated start memory by a lottery using the selected final hold mode determination table. The control unit ends the final reservation mode determination processing after determining the final reservation mode. Thus, the control unit can determine the final holding mode corresponding to the generated start memory with different probabilities according to the final holding mode lottery condition.

  Here, determination of the final suspension mode corresponding to the generated start memory by lottery using the final suspension mode determination table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a diagram illustrating an example of a final hold mode determination table according to the ninth embodiment.

  The determination table A1 and the determination table A2 shown in FIG. 206 are each examples of the final hold mode determination table. For example, in the determination table A1, 980 of the 1024 determination values are determined as the determination values of the identification code “H0”, 30 are determined as the determination values of the identification code “H2”, and 10 are determined as the determination values of the identification code “H3”. Three values are used as the determination values for the identification code “H4”, and one is used as the determination value for the identification code “H5”. In the determination table A2, 512 of the 1024 determination values are determined as the determination values of the identification code “H0”, 100 are determined as the determination values of the identification code “H2”, and 112 are determined as the determination values of the identification code “H3”. As values, 150 are determined as identification values for the identification code “H4”, 100 are determined as determination values for the identification code “H5”, and 50 are determined as determination values for the identification code “H6”.

  The control unit can select one of the determination table A1 and the determination table A2 according to the final holding mode lottery condition. For example, the control unit selects the determination table A1 when the generated start memory does not derive the big hit, and selects the determination table A2 when the generated start memory derives the big hit.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform a notice announcement effect in the final reservation mode. The determination tables A1 and A2 do not include the determination value corresponding to the identification code “H1”, but may include the determination values corresponding to the identification code “H1”. For simplicity of explanation, the control unit is assumed to be able to select either the determination table A1 or the determination table A2 according to the final reservation mode lottery condition. It may be prepared.

  Next, the initial hold mode determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the initial hold mode determination processing of the ninth embodiment. The initial suspension mode determination process is a process of determining the initial suspension mode of the generated start memory. The initial hold mode determination process is a process executed by the game control device 100 (control unit) in step E13 of the hold change mode determination process.

  [Step E31] The control unit acquires the initial holding mode lottery condition. The initial hold mode lottery condition includes that the option does not include a hold mode indicating an expectation higher than the jackpot expectation corresponding to the final hold mode determined in the final hold mode determination process. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 suppresses the step-down of the jackpot expectation degree in the hold announcement effect. The initial hold mode lottery condition may include a result derived based on the generated start memory, a control state when the start memory is generated, and the like. The initial hold mode lottery condition may include, for example, whether or not the generated start memory derives a big hit, the number of rounds in the case of a big hit, the presence or absence of a probability change, the presence or absence of a public telephone support, and the like. . The initial hold mode lottery condition includes, for example, the number of hold displays, the distinction between the hold display related to Toku-zu 1 and the hold display related to Toku-zu 2, whether the probability is fluctuating or not, and whether the phone is being supported by Toden. It may be.

  [Step E32] The control unit selects an initial suspension mode determination table based on the acquired initial suspension mode lottery condition. The control unit prepares in advance two or more initial holding mode determination tables having different determination values, and selects one initial holding mode determination table based on the initial holding mode lottery condition.

  [Step E33] The control unit determines an initial hold mode corresponding to the generated start memory by a lottery using the selected initial hold mode determination table. The control unit ends the initial holding mode determination processing after determining the initial holding mode. Accordingly, the control unit can determine the initial holding mode corresponding to the generated start memory with different probabilities according to the initial holding mode lottery condition.

  Here, the determination of the initial suspension mode corresponding to the generated start memory by lottery using the initial suspension mode determination table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a diagram illustrating an example of the initial hold mode determination table according to the ninth embodiment.

  Each of the determination tables B1 to B5 illustrated in FIG. 208 is an example of the initial suspension mode determination table. For example, the determination table B1 sets 512 of the 1024 determination values as the determination value of the identification code “H1” and 512 as the determination value of the identification code “H2”. In the determination table B2, 256 of the 1024 determination values are the determination values of the identification code “H1”, 512 are the determination values of the identification code “H2”, and 256 are the determination values of the identification code “H3”. Value. In the determination table B3, 256 of the 1024 determination values are used as the determination value of the identification code “H1”, 512 are used as the determination values of the identification code “H2”, and 128 are used as the determination value of the identification code “H3”. And 128 as the determination value of the identification code “H4”. In the determination table B4, 192 of the 1024 determination values are used as the determination value of the identification code "H1", 512 are used as the determination values of the identification code "H2", and 128 are used as the determination values of the identification code "H3". 128 are used as the determination values of the identification code “H4”, and 64 are used as the determination values of the identification code “H5”. In the determination table B5, 128 of the 1024 determination values are determined as the determination value of the identification code “H1”, 512 are determined as the determination values of the identification code “H2”, and 128 are determined as the determination values of the identification code “H3”. The values are 128, the determination value of the identification code “H4” is 128, the determination value of the identification code “H5” is 64, and the determination value of the identification code “H6” is 64.

  The control unit can select any one of the determination tables B1 to B5 according to the initial holding mode lottery condition. For example, the control unit selects the determination table B1 when the final reservation mode is the identification code “H2”, selects the determination table B2 when the final reservation mode is the identification code “H3”, and sets the final reservation mode to the identification code “H3”. When it is "H4", the determination table B3 is selected, when the final reservation mode is the identification code "H5", the determination table B4 is selected, and when the final reservation mode is the identification code "H6", the determination table B5 is selected. .

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can perform a notice announcement effect from the initial holding mode to the final holding mode while stepping up.
Next, the step-up process determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the step-up process determining process of the ninth embodiment. The step-up process determining process is a process of determining a step-up process of the hold display from the initial hold mode to the final hold mode. The step-up process determination process is a process executed by the game control device 100 (control unit) in step E14 of the hold change mode determination process.

  [Step E41] The control unit detects a step-up difference from the initial suspension mode and the final suspension mode. The step-up difference is a difference when stepping up from the initial holding mode to the final holding mode. For example, when the initial reservation mode is the identification code “H1” and the final reservation mode is the identification code “H2”, the step-up difference is “1 (= 2-1)” and the initial reservation mode is the identification code “H2”. , And the final hold mode is the identification code “H6”, the step-up difference is “4 (= 6−2)”.

  [Step E42] The control unit detects a step-up delay number from the hold position (the number of stored starts). The step-up grace number corresponds to the number of reserved uses from the initial holding mode to the final holding mode. The control unit can detect the hold position as the step-up delay number. For example, when the reserved position is “4”, the step-up grace number is “4”.

  [Step E43] The control unit selects one hold change mode determination table from a plurality of hold change mode determination tables prepared in advance according to the combination of the step-up difference and the step-up grace number.

  [Step E44] The control unit determines a step-up process by lottery according to the pending change mode determination table. The step-up process refers to a process from the initial reserved mode to the final reserved mode within the range of the step-up grace number. For example, when the step-up difference is “2” and the step-up grace number is “2”, the possible step-up process is one step-up twice or two step-ups once. . Accordingly, the control unit can determine a different step-up process even if the initial holding mode and the final holding mode are the same. After determining the step-up process, the control unit ends the step-up process determination process.

  Here, the determination of the step-up process using the pending change mode determination table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending change mode determination table according to the ninth embodiment.

  Each of the determination tables C1, C2, C3, etc. shown in FIG. 210 is an example of the pending change mode determination table. For example, when the step-up difference is “1” and the step-up grace number is “8 or less”, the hold change mode determination table that can be selected is the determination table C1. The determination table C1 sets 1024 of the 1024 determination values as the determination value of the step-up process “1”. That is, when the step-up difference is “1” and the step-up grace number is “8 or less”, the control unit can select a step-up process in which one step-up is performed once in any of the eight reserves. .

  Further, when the step-up difference is “2” and the step-up grace number is “1”, the selectable suspension change mode determination table is the determination table C2. The determination table C2 sets 1024 of the 1024 determination values as the determination value of the step-up process “2”. In other words, when the step-up difference is “2” and the step-up grace number is “1”, the control unit can select a step-up process in which two step-ups are performed once with one hold-up completion. When the step-up difference is “2” and the step-up grace number is “2 or more and 8 or less”, the selectable change-of-hold change mode determination table is the determination table C3. The determination table C3 sets 512 of the 1024 determination values as the determination value of the step-up process “1,1”. The determination table C3 sets 512 of the 1024 determination values as the determination value of the step-up process “2”. That is, when the step-up difference is “2” and the step-up grace number is “2 or more and 8 or less”, the control unit performs a step-up process of performing one step-up twice or a step-up process of performing two step-ups once. Can be selected.

  In the following, the description is omitted because the same applies, but in this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform the hold announcement effect in a different step-up process even if the initial hold mode and the final hold mode are the same.

  Next, the pending change individual schedule determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the pending change individual schedule determination process of the ninth embodiment. The suspension change individual schedule determination process is a process of determining a specific suspension change schedule (reservation change individual schedule) from the step-up process determined in the step-up process determination process. The hold change individual schedule determination process is a process executed by the game control device 100 (control unit) in step E15 of the hold change mode determination process.

[Step E51] The control unit acquires the step-up process determined in the step-up process determination process.
[Step E52] The control unit arranges the step-up process in the range of the step-up grace number and determines the individual schedule of the change-on-hold. For example, when the step-up grace number is “3” and the step-up process is “1, 2”, the control unit sets “0, 1, 2” and “0, 2, 1” as the individual schedules of the pending change. , “1,0,2”, “1,2,0”, “2,0,1”, and “2,1,0”. It should be noted that the pending change individual schedule “0, 1, 2” indicates that the step is not raised in the first reserved processing, but is increased by one step in the second reserved processing, and is increased by two steps in the third reserved processing. .

  Note that the control unit may determine the suspension change individual schedule by arranging the step-up process within the range of the step-up grace number without duplication, or may select a suspension change that can be selected from a combination of the step-up grace number and the step-up process. One of the individual schedules may be selected.

  The control unit ends the suspension change individual schedule determination process after determining the suspension change individual schedule. In this way, the control unit can determine the suspension change individual schedule corresponding to the generated start memory.

  Next, the overall schedule update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the overall schedule update process of the ninth embodiment. The overall schedule update process is a process of adjusting the existing overall schedule and the individual pending change schedule determined in the individual pending change schedule determination process to update the overall schedule. The overall schedule update process is a process executed by the game control device 100 (control unit) in step E16 of the pending change mode determination process.

  [Step E61] The control unit acquires an existing overall schedule. Note that the control unit sets and acquires an empty overall schedule as an existing overall schedule when a startup memory occurs from a state where there is no startup memory.

  [Step E62] The control unit determines whether or not the acquired overall schedule has a pending change. The control unit proceeds to Step E63 when there is a change in suspension in the overall schedule, and proceeds to Step E64 when there is no change in suspension in the overall schedule.

  [Step E63] Since there is a pending change in the overall schedule, the control unit corrects the pending-change individual schedule determined in the pending-change individual schedule determination process. More specifically, the control unit corrects the hold change individual schedule so that the hold announcement effect is not performed simultaneously in two or more hold displays.

  [Step E64] The control unit updates the entire schedule so as to reflect the modified pending change individual schedule. After updating the overall schedule, the control unit ends the overall schedule update process.

  Next, an example of the entire schedule before and after the update and the individual schedule of the pending change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a diagram illustrating an example of an entire schedule before and after updating and an individual schedule of a change in suspension according to the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 213 (1) shows the entire schedule before updating. The entire schedule before the update indicates that there is a hold storage at the hold positions “0” to “5” and that there is no hold storage after the hold position “6” (not shown for the hold positions “7” and “8”). . Further, the entire schedule before the update indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” is displayed by default (latency). The entire schedule before the update indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” changes to blue, green, and red in order each time the hold position is shifted.

  FIG. 213 (2) shows the pending change individual schedule. The suspension change individual schedule corresponds to the start memory generated as the suspension display of the suspension position “6”. In addition, the suspension change individual schedule indicates that the suspension display of the suspension position “6” is displayed in blue. The hold change individual schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position "6" changes in order of blue, green, red, cherry blossom pattern, rainbow pattern, and rainbow pattern every time the hold position is shifted.

  If such an individual schedule for change in suspension is added to the entire schedule before updating, the suspension notices performed in the two suspension displays overlap, resulting in a suspension notice effect that is not always easy for the player to understand. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 updates the overall schedule by modifying the individual schedule of the change-on-hold.

  FIG. 213 (3) shows the updated overall schedule. The updated overall schedule indicates that there is a hold storage at the hold positions “0” to “6” and that there is no hold storage for the hold positions “7” and thereafter (not shown). Also, the updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” and the hold display of the hold position “6” are displayed by default (latency). The updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” changes in order from blue, green, and red each time the hold position is shifted. In addition, the entire schedule after the update is changed to default (hidden), default (hidden), default (hidden), cherry blossom pattern, rainbow pattern, and rainbow pattern every time the hold display of the hold position “6” shifts the hold position. It shows that it changes in order.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 sets the hold display of the hold position “6” to the default (hidden) at the timing when the hold display of the hold position “3” and the hold display of the hold position “6” overlap the hold notice. Updating of the suspension notice is eliminated by updating (indicated by the bold line in the figure). Note that the gaming machine 10 is updated to the default (latency) at the time of deduplication of the suspension notice, but may be updated to the default (non-latency).

  Next, the display contents of the hold display 605 and the display contents of the hold digest display 606 based on the updated overall schedule will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display contents of the hold display and the display contents of the hold digest display based on the updated entire schedule according to the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 214 (1) to FIG. 214 (8) show the pending changes based on the updated overall schedule shown in FIG. 213 (3). It is assumed that no new start memory is generated during the suspension digestion process. Hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 214, the display examples shown in FIGS. 214 (1) to (8) will be referred to as display examples (1) to (8).

  The hold display 605 and the hold display 606 shown in the display example (1) indicate that the hold display of “5” from the hold position “0 (corresponding to the display position of the hold display 606)” is displayed by default. It indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” is displayed by default (latency). That is, the display example (1) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  The display example (2) shows a display state in which one suspension display is newly added to the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (1). The display example (2) shows that the hold display of the hold positions "0" to "6" is displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position "3" and the hold display of the hold position "6" are default. (Hidden). That is, the display example (2) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  The display example (3) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (2). The display example (3) shows that the hold display of the hold positions “0”, “1”, and “3” to “5” is displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position “5” is the default ( (Latency). The display example (3) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “2” is displayed in blue. That is, the display example (3) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (4) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (3) is digested. The display example (4) shows that the hold position "0" and the hold display of "2" to "4" are displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position "4" is displayed by default (hidden). Indicates that The display example (4) indicates that the hold display of the hold position “1” is displayed in green. That is, the display example (4) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (5) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (4). The display example (5) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “1” to “3” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “3” is displayed by default (hidden). . The display example (5) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed in red. That is, the display example (5) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (6) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (5). The display example (6) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “0” and “1” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “2” is displayed in a cherry pattern. The display example (7) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (6) is digested. The display example (7) indicates that the hold display of the hold position “0” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “1” is displayed in a rainbow pattern. The display example (8) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (7). The display example (8) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed in a rainbow pattern. That is, the display examples (6) to (8) make the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 eliminates duplication of the hold announcement effect performed on two or more hold displays. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can provide an easy-to-understand reservation notice effect to the player.
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the ninth embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in that when a preliminary announcement effect performed in two or more suspension displays overlaps, a preliminary announcement effect performed in a later suspension display is invalidated. Gaming machine 10. Note that the gaming machine 10 can invalidate the hold announcement effect performed in the later hold display by modifying the hold change individual schedule performed in step E63 of the overall schedule update process.

  First, an example of the entire schedule before and after the update and the individual schedule of the change in suspension will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a diagram illustrating an example of an entire schedule before and after updating and an individual schedule for pending change according to Modification 1 of the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 215 (1) shows the entire schedule before updating. Note that the entire schedule before update shown in FIG. 215 (1) is the same as the entire schedule before update shown in FIG. FIG. 215 (2) shows the pending change individual schedule. The hold change individual schedule shown in FIG. 215 (2) is the same as the hold change individual schedule shown in FIG.

  FIG. 215 (3) shows the updated overall schedule. The updated overall schedule indicates that there is a hold storage at the hold positions “0” to “6” and that there is no hold storage for the hold positions “7” and thereafter (not shown). Also, the updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” and the hold display of the hold position “6” are displayed by default (latency). The updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” changes in order from blue, green, and red each time the hold position is shifted. Further, the updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “6” is fixed to the default (hidden) even if the hold position is shifted.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 updates the display mode to the default (hidden) at all the holding positions for the holding announcement effect at the holding position “6” having the same timing as the holding announcement effect at the holding position “3”. (Indicated by bold lines in the figure). This eliminates duplication of the hold announcement effect performed on two or more hold displays. Note that the gaming machine 10 is updated to the default (latency) at the time of deduplication of the suspension notice, but may be updated to the default (non-latency).

  Next, the display contents of the hold display 605 and the hold contents display 606 based on the updated overall schedule will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the hold display and the display contents of the hold digest display based on the updated overall schedule of the first modification of the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 216 (1) to FIG. 216 (8) show the pending changes based on the updated overall schedule shown in FIG. 215 (3). It is assumed that no new start memory is generated during the suspension digestion process. Hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 216, the display examples shown in FIGS. 216 (1) to (8) will be referred to as display examples (1) to (8).

  The hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 shown in the display example (1) show that the hold displays of the hold positions “0” to “5” are displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position “3” is the default. (Hidden). That is, the display example (1) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  The display example (2) shows a display state in which one suspension display is newly added to the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (1). The display example (2) shows that the hold display of the hold positions "0" to "6" is displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position "3" and the hold display of the hold position "6" are default. (Hidden). That is, the display example (2) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  The display example (3) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (2). The display example (3) shows that the hold display of the hold positions “0”, “1”, and “3” to “5” is displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position “5” is the default ( (Latency). The display example (3) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “2” is displayed in blue. That is, the display example (3) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (4) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (3) is digested. The display example (4) shows that the hold position "0" and the hold display of "2" to "4" are displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position "4" is displayed by default (hidden). Indicates that The display example (4) indicates that the hold display of the hold position “1” is displayed in green. That is, the display example (4) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (5) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (4). The display example (5) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “1” to “3” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “3” is displayed by default (hidden). . The display example (5) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed in red. That is, the display example (5) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (6) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (5). The display example (6) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “0” to “2” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “2” is displayed by default (hidden). . The display example (7) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (6) is digested. The display example (7) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “0” and “1” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “1” is displayed by default (latency). . The display example (8) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (7). The display example (8) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed by default (latency). That is, the display examples (6) to (8) make the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 eliminates duplication of the hold announcement effect performed on two or more hold displays. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can provide an easy-to-understand reservation notice effect to the player.
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a modification 2 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218. In the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the ninth embodiment, when the hold announcement effects performed in two or more hold displays overlap, the magnitude of the degree of expectation to be notified in the later hold announcement effect is the same as the previous hold announcement effect. It is different from the gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in that a limit is set so as not to exceed the magnitude of the expected degree of notification. Note that the gaming machine 10 can limit the hold announcement effect performed in the later hold display by modifying the hold change individual schedule performed in step E63 of the overall schedule update process.

  First, an example of the entire schedule before and after the update and the individual schedule of the pending change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating an example of the entire schedule before and after the update and the individual schedule of the pending change according to the second modification of the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 217 (1) shows the entire schedule before updating. The overall schedule before update shown in FIG. 217 (1) is the same as the overall schedule before update shown in FIG. FIG. 217 (2) shows the pending change individual schedule. Note that the suspension change individual schedule shown in FIG. 217 (2) is the same as the suspension change individual schedule shown in FIG.

  FIG. 217 (3) shows the updated overall schedule. The updated overall schedule indicates that there is a hold storage at the hold positions “0” to “6” and that there is no hold storage for the hold positions “7” and thereafter (not shown). Also, the updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” and the hold display of the hold position “6” are displayed by default (latency). The updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” changes in order from blue, green, and red each time the hold position is shifted. Also, the updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “6” changes to default (latent), blue, green, cherry blossom pattern, rainbow pattern, and rainbow pattern every time the hold position is shifted. .

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 sets the expected degree of notification to be notified in the pending notice effect at the reserved position “3” regarding the pending notice effect at the reserved position “6” having a timing overlapping with the reserved notice effect at the reserved position “3”. The display mode is limited so as not to exceed the size. For example, the initial display mode of the hold display at the hold position “6” is blue, but the display mode of the hold display at the hold position “3” is the default (latent). Therefore, the initial display mode of the hold display at the hold position “6” is limited to the default (latency).

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 restricts the display mode (shown by a thick frame line in the figure) at the same timing as the hold announcement effect at the hold position “3”. As a result, even if there is a duplication of the hold announcement effect performed on two or more hold displays, the hold announcement effect of performing the hold announcement effect that is performed earlier and not later is not damaged.

  Next, the display contents of the hold display 605 and the display contents of the hold digest display 606 based on the updated overall schedule will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display content of the hold display and the display content of the hold digest display based on the updated overall schedule of the second modification of the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 218 (1) to FIG. 218 (8) show the pending changes based on the updated overall schedule shown in FIG. 217 (3). It is assumed that no new start memory is generated during the suspension digestion process. Hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 218, the display examples shown in FIGS. 218 (1) to (8) will be referred to as display examples (1) to (8).

  The hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 shown in the display example (1) show that the hold displays of the hold positions “0” to “5” are displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position “3” is the default. (Hidden). That is, the display example (1) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  The display example (2) shows a display state in which one suspension display is newly added to the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (1). The display example (2) shows that the hold display of the hold positions "0" to "6" is displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position "3" and the hold display of the hold position "6" are default. (Hidden). That is, the display example (2) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  The display example (3) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (2). The display example (3) shows that the hold display of the hold positions “0”, “1”, and “3” to “5” is displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position “5” is the default ( (Latency). The display example (3) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “2” is displayed in blue. That is, the display example (3) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (4) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (3) is digested. The display example (4) shows that the hold display of the hold positions “0”, “2”, and “3” is displayed by default. The display example (4) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “1” is displayed in green, and the hold display at the hold position “4” is displayed in blue. That is, in the display example (4), the hold announcement effect is performed with the two hold displays, but the degree of expectation indicated by the previous hold display is larger than the degree of expectation indicated by the subsequent hold display. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's attention to the hold announcement effect by the previous hold display.

  The display example (5) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (4). The display example (5) shows that the hold display of the hold positions “1” and “2” is displayed by default. The display example (5) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed in red, and that the hold display at the hold position “3” is displayed in green. That is, in the display example (5), the hold announcement effect is performed with the two hold displays, but the degree of expectation indicated by the previous hold display is larger than the degree of expectation indicated by the subsequent hold display. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's attention to the hold announcement effect by the previous hold display.

  The display example (6) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (5). The display example (6) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “0” and “1” is displayed by default. The display example (6) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “2” is displayed in a cherry pattern. That is, the display example (6) is a display mode in which the restriction on the display mode by the hold display is released.

  The display example (7) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (6) is digested. The display example (7) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed by default. The display example (7) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “1” is displayed in a rainbow pattern. The display example (8) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (7). The display example (8) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed in a rainbow pattern.

  Such a gaming machine 10 improves the sense of expectation with respect to the preceding hold display when the hold announcement effect is being performed with the two hold displays. Further, such a gaming machine 10 improves the sense of expectation for the hold advance presentation effect by the later hold display after the hold advance display effect by the previous hold display ends. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 can perform a hold announcement effect that is easy for a player to understand, as compared with a case where a hold announcement effect is independently performed on two hold displays.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a third modification of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment has updated the entire schedule by modifying the individual schedule of the change-on-hold. However, the gaming machine 10 according to the third modification of the ninth embodiment modifies the entire schedule, and sometimes updates the entire schedule by adding a pending change individual schedule to the corrected entire schedule. It is different from the gaming machine 10 of the embodiment.

  First, an overall schedule update process according to the third modification of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the overall schedule update process of Modification 3 of the ninth embodiment. The overall schedule update process is a process of adjusting the existing overall schedule and the individual pending change schedule determined in the individual pending change schedule determination process to update the overall schedule. The overall schedule update process is a process executed by the game control device 100 (control unit) in step E16 of the pending change mode determination process.

  [Step E71] The control unit acquires an existing overall schedule. Note that the control unit sets and acquires an empty overall schedule as an existing overall schedule when a startup memory occurs from a state where there is no startup memory.

  [Step E72] The control unit determines whether or not the acquired entire schedule has a pending change. The control unit proceeds to Step E73 when there is a change in suspension in the overall schedule, and proceeds to Step E76 when there is no change in suspension in the overall schedule.

  [Step E73] The control unit determines whether or not there is a suspended display being displayed in blue or more (identification code “H2” to “H6”) from the acquired overall schedule. The control unit proceeds to step E74 when there is no pending display being displayed in blue or more, and proceeds to step E75 when there is a pending display being displayed in blue or more.

  [Step E74] The control unit corrects the entire schedule in accordance with the pending change individual schedule determined in the pending change individual schedule determination process. More specifically, the control unit corrects the entire schedule so as not to simultaneously perform a preliminary announcement effect in two or more suspension displays.

  [Step E75] The control unit corrects the pending change individual schedule determined in the pending change individual schedule determination process. More specifically, the control unit corrects the hold change individual schedule so that the hold announcement effect is not performed simultaneously in two or more hold displays. In this way, the control unit does not modify the entire schedule when there is a pending display being displayed in blue or more, thereby preventing a display change that causes a decrease in reliability during the pending announcement effect.

  [Step E76] The control unit updates the overall schedule by adding the pending change individual schedule to the modified overall schedule or by adding the modified pending change individual schedule to the overall schedule. After updating the overall schedule, the control unit ends the overall schedule update process.

  Next, an example of the entire schedule before and after the update and the individual schedule of the pending change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating an example of the entire schedule before and after updating and an individual schedule for pending change in Modification 3 of the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 220 (1) shows the entire schedule before updating. The overall schedule before update shown in FIG. 220 (1) is the same as the overall schedule before update shown in FIG. FIG. 220 (2) shows the pending change individual schedule. Note that the pending change individual schedule shown in FIG. 220 (2) is the same as the pending change individual schedule shown in FIG.

  FIG. 220 (3) shows the entire schedule after the update. The updated overall schedule indicates that there is a hold storage at the hold positions “0” to “6” and that there is no hold storage for the hold positions “7” and thereafter (not shown). Further, the updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” is displayed by default (hidden), and that the hold display of the hold position “6” is displayed in blue. The updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “6” changes in order of blue, blue, green, red, cherry, rainbow, and rainbow every time the hold position is shifted. Such a change of the hold display is the same as the hold change individual schedule shown in FIG.

  Further, the updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” is fixed to the default (hidden) even if the hold position is shifted. In this way, the gaming machine 10 updates the display mode to the default (hidden) at all the holding positions for the holding announcement effect at the holding position "3" having a timing overlapping with the holding announcement effect at the holding position "6". (Indicated by bold lines in the figure). This eliminates duplication of the hold announcement effect performed on two or more hold displays. Note that the gaming machine 10 has been updated to the default (hidden) at the time of deduplication of the hold announcement effect, but it may be updated to the default (non-hidden).

  Next, the display content of the hold display 605 and the display content of the hold digest display 606 based on the updated overall schedule will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents of the hold display and display contents of the hold digest display based on the updated overall schedule of the third modification of the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 221 (1) to FIG. 221 (8) show the pending changes based on the updated overall schedule shown in FIG. 220 (3). It is assumed that no new start memory is generated during the suspension digestion process. Hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 221, the display examples shown in FIGS. 221 (1) to (8) will be referred to as display examples (1) to (8).

  The hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 shown in the display example (1) show that the hold displays of the hold positions “0” to “5” are displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position “3” is the default. (Hidden). That is, the display example (1) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  The display example (2) shows a display state in which one suspension display is newly added to the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (1). The display example (2) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “0” to “5” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “3” is displayed by default (hidden). . The display example (2) indicates that the hold display of the hold position “6” is displayed in blue. That is, the display example (2) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (3) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (2). The display example (3) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “0” to “4” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “2” is displayed by default (hidden). . The display example (3) indicates that the hold display of the hold position “5” is displayed in blue. That is, the display example (3) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (4) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (3) is digested. The display example (4) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “0” to “3” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “1” is displayed by default (hidden). . The display example (4) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “4” is displayed in green. That is, the display example (4) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (5) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (4). The display example (5) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “0” to “2” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “0” is displayed by default (hidden). . The display example (5) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “3” is displayed in red. That is, the display example (5) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (6) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (5). The display example (6) indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “0” and “1” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “2” is displayed in a cherry pattern. The display example (7) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (6) is digested. The display example (7) indicates that the hold display of the hold position “0” is displayed by default, and that the hold display of the hold position “1” is displayed in a rainbow pattern. The display example (8) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (7). The display example (8) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed in a rainbow pattern. That is, the display examples (6) to (8) make the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 eliminates duplication of the hold announcement effect performed on two or more hold displays. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can provide an easy-to-understand reservation notice effect to the player.
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a modification 4 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223. FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the fourth modification of the ninth embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in that a hold notice prohibition period is set so that two hold notice effects are not continuous.

  First, an example of the entire schedule before and after the update and the individual schedule of the pending change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating an example of the entire schedule before and after the update and the individual schedule of the pending change in the fourth modification of the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 222 (1) shows the entire schedule before updating. The entire schedule before the update indicates that there is a hold storage at the hold positions “0” to “5” and that there is no hold storage after the hold position “6” (not shown for the hold positions “7” and “8”). . Further, the entire schedule before the update indicates that the hold display of the hold positions “3” and “4” is displayed by default (latency). Note that the hold display of the hold position “3” is set as a hold advance notice display, and the entire schedule before the update indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” shifts from the hold position to blue, green, It indicates that the color changes sequentially to red. The hold display of the hold position “4” is set as a hold advance notice prohibition period (indicated by a bold line in the drawing). Indicates that the default position (latency) is fixed even if the holding position is shifted.

  FIG. 222 (2) shows the pending change individual schedule. The suspension change individual schedule corresponds to the start memory generated as the suspension display of the suspension position “6”. In addition, the suspension change individual schedule indicates that the suspension display of the suspension position “6” is displayed in blue. The suspension change individual schedule indicates that the suspension display of the suspension position “6” is fixed to blue even if the suspension position is shifted.

  If such a change-on-hold individual schedule is added to the entire schedule before update, the hold notices performed on a plurality of hold displays overlap, resulting in a hold notice effect that is not always easy for a player to understand. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 updates the overall schedule by modifying the individual schedule of the change-on-hold.

  FIG. 222 (3) shows the updated overall schedule. The updated overall schedule indicates that there is a hold storage at the hold positions “0” to “6” and that there is no hold storage for the hold positions “7” and thereafter (not shown). Also, the updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3”, the hold display of the hold position “4”, and the hold display of the hold position “6” are displayed by default (latency). The updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “3” changes in order from blue, green, and red each time the hold position is shifted. The updated overall schedule indicates that the hold display of the hold position “4” is fixed to the default (hidden) even if the hold position is shifted. In addition, the entire schedule after the update is changed to a default (latency), a default (latency), a default (latency), a default (latency), a blue color, and a blue color every time the hold position of the hold position “6” shifts the hold position. It shows that it changes in order.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 restricts the appearance of a display mode having a higher degree of expectation than that of the hold announcement effect performed earlier when the hold announcement effect is performed later (shown by a thick frame line in the drawing). ). That is, the hold announcement effect based on the hold display of the hold position “6” not only does not cause a display mode having a higher degree of expectation to appear than the hold announcement effect based on the hold display of the hold position “3”, but also the hold position “4”. A display mode having a higher degree of expectation than that of the suspension notice effect based on the suspension display is not displayed. Note that the hold announcement effect based on the hold display at the hold position “4” is fixed to a default (hidden), and thus functions as a dummy hold advance effect for setting the hold announcement prohibition period.

  As a result, even if there is a duplication of the hold announcement effect performed in two or more hold displays, the hold announcement effect performed later of the hold announcement effect performed earlier does not deteriorate, and the period for easily distinguishing the two hold announcement effects ( (Preliminary notice prohibited period) can be set. It should be noted that the hold notice prohibition period is not limited to one hold and is not limited to one time and may be set to two or more hold and fill.

  Next, the display contents of the hold display 605 and the display contents of the hold digest display 606 based on the updated overall schedule will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display content of the hold display and the display content of the hold digest display based on the updated entire schedule in the fourth modification of the ninth embodiment.

  FIG. 223 (1) to FIG. 223 (8) show the pending changes based on the updated overall schedule shown in FIG. 222 (3). It is assumed that no new start memory is generated during the suspension digestion process. Hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 223, the display examples shown in FIGS. 223 (1) to (8) will be referred to as display examples (1) to (8).

  The hold display 605 and the hold digest display 606 shown in the display example (1) indicate that the hold displays of the hold positions “0” to “5” are displayed by default, and the hold display and the hold of the hold position “3” are displayed. This indicates that the hold display at the position “4” is displayed by default (latency). That is, the display example (1) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  The display example (2) shows a display state in which one suspension display is newly added to the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (1). The display example (2) shows that the hold display of the hold positions “0” to “6” is displayed by default, of which the hold display of the hold position “3”, the hold display of the hold position “4”, and the hold position This indicates that the hold display of “6” is displayed by default (latency). That is, the display example (2) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is not performed.

  The display example (3) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (2). The display example (3) shows that the hold positions “0”, “1”, and “3” to “5” are displayed by default, of which the hold position of the hold position “3” and the hold position are displayed. This indicates that the hold display of “5” is displayed by default (latency). The display example (3) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “2” is displayed in blue. That is, the display example (3) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (4) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (3) is digested. The display example (4) shows that the hold display of the hold positions “0” and “2” to “4” is displayed by default, of which the hold display of the hold position “2” and the hold display of the hold position “4” are displayed. Indicates that the display is to be displayed by default (hidden). The display example (4) indicates that the hold display of the hold position “1” is displayed in green. That is, the display example (4) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (5) shows a display state in which one of the suspension displays has been digested from the suspension display 605 shown in the display example (4). The display example (5) shows that the hold display of the hold positions “1” to “3” is displayed by default, and the hold display of the hold position “1” and the hold display of the hold position “3” are the default ( (Latency). The display example (5) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed in red. That is, the display example (5) makes the player feel that the hold announcement effect is being performed with one hold display.

  The display example (6) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (5). The display example (6) indicates that the hold display of the hold position “0” and the hold display of the hold position “2” are displayed by default (the hold display of the hold position “0” and the hold display of the hold position “2” are displayed by default). (Latency). The display example (6) is a display mode during the suspension notice prohibition period, and makes the player feel that the suspension notice production is not performed.

  The display example (7) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays 605 shown in the display example (6) is digested. The display example (7) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed by default. The display example (7) indicates that the hold display of the hold position “1” is displayed in blue. The display example (8) shows a display state in which one of the hold displays has been digested from the hold display 605 shown in the display example (7). The display example (8) indicates that the hold display at the hold position “0” is displayed in blue. That is, the display example (7) and the display example (8) allow the player to feel that the hold notice effect is being performed with one hold display.

  Such a gaming machine 10 has a holding advance notice effect of the display example (3) to the display example (5) and a hold notice effect of the display example (7) and the display example (8). Can be separated by ban period. Such a gaming machine 10 can perform a hold announcement effect that is easy for a player to understand, as compared with a case where different hold announcement effects are successively performed.

The gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment (including the modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores the start memory as the execution right of the variable display game, and changes the hold display mode (FIG. 202) of the start memory in association with the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. A hold announcement effect can be executed and includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit sets a change schedule (FIG. 220 (1), FIG. 213 (1)) for changing the hold display mode of the first start memory (for example, the hold position “3”) for starting the variable display game at the first timing. Scheduled change including change of the hold display mode of the second start memory (FIG. 220 (2), FIG. 213 (2)) in which the variable display game is started at the second timing (for example, the hold position “6”) which is later than the first timing. In the case of updating to "1", the change of the hold display mode of the first start memory is suppressed (FIG. 220 (3)), or the change of the hold display mode of the second start memory is suppressed (FIG. 213 (3)). Update an appointment.

  (2) The control unit of (1) sets the initial hold display mode (for example, blue, FIG. 213 (2)) in the scheduled change of the hold display mode of the second start memory to the standard display mode (for example, default (latent or non-latent)). ) (For example, the display mode identified by the identification code “H2” is changed to the display mode identified by the identification code “H1”, FIG. 213 (3)), and the hold notice effect (FIG. 214) is executed. .

  (3) The control unit of (1) changes the initial hold display mode (for example, blue, FIG. 220 (1)) in the change schedule of the hold display mode of the first startup memory to the standard display mode (for example, default (latent or non-latent)). ) (For example, the display mode identified by the identification code “H2” is changed to the display mode identified by the identification code “H1”, FIG. 220 (3)), and the hold notice effect (FIG. 221) is executed. .

(4) The control unit (1) changes the change schedule so that the change of the hold display mode of the first start memory and the change of the hold display mode of the second start memory do not overlap (FIG. 213).
(5) The control unit of (4) restricts the change of the hold display mode between the period of changing the hold display mode of the first start memory and the period of changing the hold display mode of the second start memory. By setting a (hold notice prohibition period), the change schedule is changed (FIG. 222 (3)).

(6) The control unit of (1) changes the change schedule so as to fix the hold display mode of the first startup memory to the standard display mode (FIG. 220 (3)).
(7) The control unit of (1) changes the change schedule so as to fix the hold display mode of the second startup memory to the standard display mode (FIG. 215 (3)).

(8) The control unit (1) changes the change schedule so that the degree of expectation indicated by the hold display mode of the second start memory does not become larger than the degree of expectation indicated by the first start memory (FIG. 217 (3)). .
(9) The gaming machine stores the start memory as the execution right of the variable display game, and changes the hold display mode of the start memory (FIG. 202) in relation to the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory to hold the start memory. It can execute a notice effect, and includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit generates a change schedule (for example, the entire schedule shown in FIG. 213 (1)) for changing the suspended display mode of the first start memory (for example, the suspended position “3”) for starting the variable display game at the first timing. 213 (2), which includes a change in the suspended display mode of the second start memory (for example, the suspended position “6”) in which the variable display game is started at the second timing later than the first timing. In the case of updating to the hold change individual schedule), the change of the hold display mode of the first start memory is prioritized, and the change of the hold display mode of the second start memory in the change schedule is limited to change (for example, FIG. 213 (3)). The overall schedule shown in (1) is updated.

  (10) The gaming machine stores the start memory as the execution right of the variable display game, and changes the hold display mode of the start memory (FIG. 202) in relation to the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory to hold the start memory. It can execute a notice effect, and includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit generates a change schedule (for example, the entire schedule shown in FIG. 213 (1)) for changing the suspended display mode of the first start memory (for example, the suspended position “3”) for starting the variable display game at the first timing. The change of the suspension display mode of the second start memory (for example, the suspension position “6”) for starting the variable display game at the second timing later than the first timing when the game is being performed (for example, the suspension change individual schedule shown in FIG. 213 (2)) ) Is updated to the change schedule (for example, the entire schedule shown in FIG. 213 (3)) in which the change of the hold display mode of the second start memory is restricted until the result of the first start memory is derived. I do.

  (11) The gaming machine 10 stores the start memory as the execution right of the variable display game, and changes the hold display mode (FIG. 202) of the start memory in association with the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. A hold announcement effect can be executed and includes a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The control unit sets the first change schedule (for example, the entire schedule shown in FIG. 220 (1)) for changing the suspended display mode of the first start memory (for example, the suspended position “3”) for starting the variable display game at the first timing. When the game is being generated, the variable display game is started at a second timing later than the first timing (for example, the reserved position “6”). ) Is generated, the first change schedule is corrected, and the second change schedule and the modified first change schedule obtained by correcting the first change schedule (for example, the entire schedule shown in FIG. 220 (3)) are used. To execute a hold announcement effect.

[Tenth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment can reset the setting contents set by the player in a waiting state for a customer.

  First, a setting change operation in the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 224 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen display displayed by the display device during a setting change operation according to the tenth embodiment.

Screen 1500 shows a screen display at the time of setting change. Screen 1500 includes an operation guide display 1501 in the display content.
The operation guide display 1501 includes a volume setting display 1502, a brightness setting display 1503, a guide explanation display 1504, an operation unit image display 1505, and a character setting display 1506. Volume setting display 1502 guides the volume setting of upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b. The volume setting display 1502 initially displays the current volume setting value as a number or an icon, and displays the volume setting value after setting change as a number or an icon by receiving a setting operation.

  The brightness setting display 1503 guides the brightness setting of the display device 41, the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. The brightness setting display 1503 initially displays the current brightness setting value by a number or an icon, and displays the changed brightness setting value by a number or an icon by receiving a setting operation.

  The guidance explanation display 1504 displays an operation guidance and an operation explanation of the setting change corresponding to the setting item (character, volume, brightness). The operation unit image display 1505 displays an image of the push button 25 serving as an operation unit for setting change. For example, operation unit image display 1505 displays an image of push button 25 in a display mode corresponding to guidance explanation display 1504.

  The character setting display 1506 displays characters 1506a and 1506b as options. Note that the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment has an effect mode for displaying the character 1506a, an effect mode for displaying the character 1506b, and an effect mode for displaying the character 1506a and the character 1506b alternately.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays on the screen an operation guide display corresponding to the setting item whose setting can be changed. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player on how to change the setting of the setting item.

  Next, the connection between the effect control device and the option setting unit according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 225 is a diagram illustrating a connection example of the effect control device and the option setting unit according to the tenth embodiment.

  The option setting unit 25 includes a push button LED 25c, a touch sensor 25d, and a push button SW 25e. The push button LED 25c is a nine-system full color LED. The touch sensor 25d can detect a player's touch operation in eight places. The push button SW25e can detect a pressing operation of the option setting unit 25.

  The effect control device 300 and the option setting unit 25 are electrically connected. The production control device 300 outputs a control signal of the push button LED 25c to the option setting unit 25, and inputs a detection signal of the touch sensor 25d and a detection signal of the push button SW 25e from the option setting unit 25.

  Here, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of a detection signal of the touch sensor 25d and a detection signal of the push button SW25e. For example, a state in which the touch sensor 25d detects a touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation and a state in which the push button SW25e detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. The state in which the touch sensor 25d detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW25e detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. Hereinafter, in the tenth embodiment, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or a PB (Push Button).

  Next, the arrangement of the push button LED 25c and the touch sensor 25d in the push button 25 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a diagram illustrating an example of the arrangement of the push button LEDs and the touch sensors in the push button according to the tenth embodiment.

  The push button 25 has a columnar shape that has a substantially circular top surface when the player looks down. The push button 25 has nine small circle portions 250 to 258 each having a size similar to a fingertip on the upper surface thereof, the small circle portion 250 is arranged at the center of the upper surface, and eight circles are formed on the circumference surrounding the small circle portion 250. Two small circle portions 251 to 258 are arranged.

  The small circle part 250 arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW4) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 251 is located to the left of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW1) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 252 is positioned diagonally above and to the left of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW2) within the circumference thereof. The small circle part 253 is located above the small circle part 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW3) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 254 is positioned diagonally above and to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW5) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 255 is located to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW6) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 256 is located diagonally downward and to the right of the small circle portion 250, and arranges one push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW7) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 257 is located below the small circle portion 250, and arranges one system of push button LED 25c and one touch sensor 25d (TSW8) within the circumference thereof. The small circle portion 258 is located diagonally downward and to the left of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs 25c is arranged within the circumference thereof. Since the small circle portion 258 does not include the touch sensor 25d, the small circle portion 258 has a star-shaped polygonal design so as to be easily distinguished from the small circle portions 250 to 257 in which the touch sensor 25d is arranged. Further, since the small circle portion 258 does not dispose the touch sensor 25d, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors 25d. When the push button 25 is in the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side, the small circle part 258 is located on the near left side of the small circle parts 251 to 258 when viewed from the player side. This makes it easy for the player to treat the small circle portion 258 as the home position.

  In the push button 25, the touch sensor 25d is not arranged in the small circle portion 258, but the touch sensor 25d may be arranged in the same manner as in the small circle portions 250 to 257. Further, the push button 25 may include a touch panel capable of detecting the position coordinates of the touch operation of the player, instead of the touch sensor 25d. In this case, the effect control device 300 can detect a touch operation on the small circle portions 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circle portions 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected on the touch panel.

Next, setting items of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting table according to the tenth embodiment.
The illustrated setting table includes a character, a volume, and brightness as setting items (setting contents). The setting item “character” includes, as selection items, character A (for example, character 1506a), character B (for example, character 1506b), and replacement of character A and character B (replacement of character 1506a and character 1506b). In the setting item “character”, replacement of the character A and the character B is set as a default setting (standard setting). The gaming machine 10 introduces the character A and the character B to the player by changing the default setting between the character A and the character B. In this way, the gaming machine 10 secures an opportunity for the player to feel various effects.

  The setting item “volume” includes eight setting values from level 1 to level 8 as selection items. For the setting item “volume”, the setting value of level 4 is set as default setting. The setting item “volume” includes eight setting values from level 1 to level 8 as selection items. For the setting item “volume”, the setting value of level 4 is set as a default setting. In this way, the gaming machine 10 guarantees an opportunity to start a game from a standard effect level while corresponding to an effect level according to the player.

  Next, the opportunity for changing the selection item in each setting item will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting state transition diagram according to the tenth embodiment. The illustrated state transition diagram shows that a certain setting item includes three selection items (a selection item A, a selection item B, and a selection item C), and the selection item C is set as a default setting (shown by a thick frame line). In the gaming machine 10, the selection item A, the selection item B, and the selection item C can be respectively changed by the setting operation of the player. The gaming machine 10 holds the selection items set by the player.

  When detecting the reset trigger when the selection item A is set or the selection item B is set, the gaming machine 10 changes the setting of the selection item A or the selection item B to the selection item C which is the default setting. I do. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 resets the selection item to the default setting for a certain setting item, waiting for the detection of the reset trigger.

  Next, an example of changing a selection item in each setting item will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart in resetting setting items according to the tenth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 accepts the setting operation of the player in the non-operation state of the customer waiting state, and sets the selection item A for a predetermined setting item (timing t11). At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays a display screen corresponding to the customer waiting period TA on the display device 41. Note that the customer waiting period includes a customer waiting period TA and a customer waiting period TL, and the gaming machine 10 sets the customer waiting period TA first in the customer waiting state, and sets the customer waiting period TL after the customer waiting period TA. Set.

  The gaming machine 10 enters the operating state at the timing t12 and displays a display screen corresponding to the game being played on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 holds the setting of the selection item A for the predetermined setting item in the operating state.

  The gaming machine 10 enters the non-operation state at the timing t13, and displays a display screen corresponding to the customer waiting period TA on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 holds the setting of the selection item A for the predetermined setting item in the customer waiting period TA even in the non-operation state.

  The gaming machine 10 becomes active at the timing t14 and displays a display screen corresponding to the game being played on the display device 41. The gaming machine 10 holds the setting of the selection item A for the predetermined setting item in the operating state.

  The gaming machine 10 becomes inactive at the timing t15, and the display device 41 displays a display screen corresponding to the customer waiting period TA. The gaming machine 10 holds the setting of the selection item A for the predetermined setting item in the customer waiting period TA even in the non-operation state.

  The gaming machine 10 expires the customer waiting period TA at timing t16, and transitions to the customer waiting period TL. At this time, the gaming machine 10 uses the expiration of the customer waiting period TA as a reset trigger of the setting content of the predetermined setting item. The gaming machine 10 resets the selection item C (default setting) for a predetermined setting item.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 resets the default setting for the predetermined setting item after waiting for the transition to the customer waiting period TL after the non-operation state. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide a game with default settings to a first-time player, regardless of the settings changed by the player who played the game earlier. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can provide sufficient interest to later players regardless of the settings changed by the player who played earlier. Further, since the gaming machine 10 retains the setting contents changed by the player who played the game earlier for the customer waiting period TA, the setting items are set to the default settings even when the player temporarily stops the game. Can be prevented from being reset. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 does not need to frequently set the player who played the game earlier. Such a gaming machine 10 can make settings according to the player, and the setting by one player (the previous player) impairs the opportunity for other players (the latter player) to gain interest. Nothing.

  Here, the customer waiting period TA and the customer waiting period TL will be described with reference to FIG. 230 and FIG. FIG. 230 is a customer waiting state table (part 1) illustrating an example of reset timing according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 231 is a customer waiting state table (part 2) illustrating an example of reset timing in the tenth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 holds the setting contents of the setting items for a predetermined period (the customer waiting period TA) in the customer waiting state after receiving the customer waiting command, and sets the setting contents of the setting items to the default in the subsequent period (the customer waiting period TL). Reset (reset) the settings. Note that the gaming machine 10 loops through the customer waiting period TL during the customer waiting state after the transition to the customer waiting period TL.

  First, a customer waiting state when a customer waiting command is received after the fluctuation without reach will be described with reference to FIG. Since the gaming machine 10 changes the gaming state from the customer waiting state to the variable display state by receiving the variable display command, the customer waiting state will be described below assuming that the variable display command is not received.

  After receiving the customer waiting command, the gaming machine 10 sets the display state of the display device 41 to “wait”. The gaming machine 10 displays the display state of the display device 41 after “wait”, “customer waiting state A”, “customer waiting state B1”, “customer waiting movie”, “logo display”, “customer waiting state B2”, The transition is made in the order of "waiting movie" and "logo display". When the display state of the display device 41 transitions from the “customer waiting state B2” to the “logo display” via the “customer waiting movie”, the gaming machine 10 changes the “customer waiting state B2”, “customer waiting movie”, “logo display”. Is repeated.

  The display state “wait” is a total of 10 seconds in which the time value includes the first half 2 seconds and the second half 8 seconds. In the display state “Wait”, the symbols are stopped and displayed for 10 seconds, decorations during normal fluctuation (for example, lighting of an LED or a lamp) are continued, and sound output of normal fluctuation BGM (BackGround Music) is continued. In this way, the gaming machine 10 keeps the decoration and voice output during the normal fluctuation even if the fluctuation display in the special figure game is interrupted, so that the effect is consistent with the start winning prize during the display state “wait”. It can return to the variable display state.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 turns off the push button 25 without displaying the option display (for example, the operation guide display 1501) in the display state “wait”. In the display state “wait”, the gaming machine 10 disables the function of pressing the push button 25 until the first two seconds elapse, and enables the function of pressing the push button 25 after the first two seconds elapse.

  The display state “customer waiting state A” has a time value of 5 seconds. In the display state “customer waiting state A”, decoration corresponding to the customer waiting state A is performed for 5 seconds. The display state “customer waiting state B1” is a total of 115 seconds in which the time value includes the first half 15 seconds and the second half 100 seconds. The display state "customer waiting state B1" performs decoration corresponding to the customer waiting state B1 for 115 seconds.

  The gaming machine 10 fades out the audio output of the normally varying BGM between the first half of the display state “customer waiting state A” and the display state “customer waiting state B1”. The gaming machine 10 silences the audio output after the second half of the display state “customer waiting state B” and switches the option display (for example, the operation guide display 1501) from “none” to “present”. Note that, even when the option display is “none”, the gaming machine 10 changes the option display from “none” to “available” by detecting the press of the push button 25 at the timing when the push function of the push button 25 is enabled. Switch. Thereby, when the player cannot confirm the intention to change the setting, the gaming machine 10 displays the option unnecessarily and suppresses the effect display content from being limited.

  The state of the option display “None” at this timing corresponds to a state in which the option display can be called upon detection of the press of the push button 25 (setting change calling state). Then, the state of the option display “present” by the detection of the push button 25 being pressed corresponds to a state where the setting of the gaming machine 10 can be changed is clearly indicated to the player (a setting change explicit state).

  Further, the gaming machine 10 provides the option display “present” state (setting change explicit state) irrespective of the detection of the push button 25 being pressed, thereby clearly indicating to the player that the gaming machine 10 has the setting change function. it can.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs a required voice (for example, the message “Ganbare”) when a touch (touch switch signal) on the operation unit (handle) 24 is detected from the display state “wait” to the display state “customer waiting state B1”. ) Is disabled, and is enabled after the display state “Movie waiting for customers”. Further, the gaming machine 10 displays a symbol animation as an effect using a decorative symbol on the display device 41 between the display state “customer waiting state A” and the display state “customer waiting state B1”.

  The gaming machine 10 is capable of accepting a setting change of a setting item during the latter 100 seconds of the display state “customer waiting state B1”. However, the gaming machine 10 may restrict the setting change during the latter 100 seconds of the display state “customer waiting state B1”.

  The display state “movie waiting for customer” has a time value of 30 seconds. In the display state “movie waiting for customer”, decoration corresponding to the movie waiting for customer is performed for 30 seconds. The gaming machine 10 displays a movie effect on the display device 41 during the display state “movie waiting for customer”.

  The display state “logo display” has a time value of 3 seconds. In the display state “logo display”, decoration corresponding to the logo display is performed for three seconds. Further, the gaming machine 10 displays a maker logo, an alert to immerse the game, and the like on the display device 41 during the display state of “logo display”. The gaming machine 10 does not display the symbol between the display state “Movie waiting for customer” and the display state “Logo display”.

  The display state “customer waiting state B2” is a total of 120 seconds in which the time value includes the first half 30 seconds and the second half 90 seconds. The display state “customer waiting state B2” performs decoration corresponding to the customer waiting state B2 for 120 seconds. The gaming machine 10 displays the symbol animation on the display device 41 during the display state “waiting for customer B2”. The gaming machine 10 sets the option display to “present” and turns on the push button 25 during the latter half of the display state “customer waiting state B2”. The gaming machine 10 is capable of accepting a setting change of a setting item during the latter 90 seconds of the display state “customer waiting state B2”. However, the gaming machine 10 may limit the timing at which the setting can be changed during the latter 90 seconds of the display state “customer waiting state B2”.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 resets the settings to the default settings at the timing of the display state “customer waiting state B2”. When the setting operation is performed by the player after the setting content is reset to the default setting, the gaming machine 10 transitions the customer waiting period TL to the customer waiting period TA, thereby changing the setting content for a predetermined period (customer waiting time). It can be held only for the period TA).

  Next, a customer waiting state when a customer waiting command is received after a fluctuation with reach will be described with reference to FIG. When the customer waiting command is received after the change with the reach, the gaming machine 10 performs an effect corresponding to the change with the reach until immediately before the reception of the command for the customer. If such an effect is continued until after the reception of the customer waiting command, the gaming machine 10 may give the player an unnecessary misunderstanding. Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 receives the customer waiting command after the fluctuation with the reach, the transition to the customer waiting state is specified without continuing the decoration and the voice output. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 performs the decoration corresponding to the customer waiting state A from the display state “wait”, and makes the sound output silent.

  Such a gaming machine 10 sets, in the customer waiting state, a setting changeable customer waiting state in which the setting can be changed and a setting change unavailable customer waiting state in which the setting cannot be changed. For example, the setting changeable customer waiting state is set at a timing excluding the first half of the display state “wait”, and the setting change impossible customer waiting state is set at the first half of the display state “wait”.

  Further, such a gaming machine 10 has a setting change calling state in which an option display can be called upon detection of the push button 25 being pressed in the setting changeable customer waiting state, and a setting change calling state in which the push button 25 is pressed. Set the setting change explicit state to display the option display. For example, the setting change call state is set at a timing excluding the first half of the display state “wait”, the second half of the display state “customer waiting state B1”, and the second half of the display state “customer waiting state B2”. The setting change explicit state is set in the second half of the display state “customer waiting state B1” and the second half of the display state “customer waiting state B2”.

Next, a display screen in the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is a diagram illustrating an example of a customer waiting display according to the tenth embodiment.
The screen 1510 shown in FIG. 232 (1) and the screen 1520 shown in FIG. 232 (2) are displayed between the display state “customer waiting state A” and the display state “customer waiting state B1” as an effect using a decorative design. This is a display content for displaying a symbol animation on the display device 41. The screen 1510 includes a decorative pattern 1511, a background display 1512, and a character display 1513. The screen 1510 allows the player to perceive the current setting contents (for example, the character A) from the decorative pattern 1511, the background display 1512, and the character display 1513. The screen 1520 includes a decorative pattern 1521, a background display 1522, and a character display 1523. The screen 1520 allows the player to perceive the current setting contents (for example, the character B) from the decorative pattern 1521, the background display 1522, and the character display 1523. Although the gaming machine 10 can set a character, it may be possible to set a background, a decorative pattern, or the entire display effect content (effect mode).

  The gaming machine 10 displays a screen 1510 or a screen 1520 according to the settings. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify the current setting content (for example, the character A or the character B) by displaying the screen 1510 or the screen 1520 during the customer waiting period TA. Further, the gaming machine 10 can notify the current setting contents (for example, replacement of the character A and the character B) by alternately or randomly displaying the screen 1510 or the screen 1520 in the customer waiting period TL.

  A screen 1530 shown in FIG. 232 (3) is a display content for displaying a movie effect on the display device 41 during the display state “movie waiting for customer”. Screen 1530 includes background display 1532 and character display 1533. The screen 1530 is a display content independent of the current setting content. For example, by not displaying a decorative design, the independence from the setting content is specified.

  Here, before describing the setting reset processing for resetting the current setting contents, the main processing including the setting reset processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 is a view illustrating a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the tenth embodiment.

[Main processing]
The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.

[Step D11] The control unit prohibits the interruption.
[Step D12] The control unit performs initialization of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs an initial setting of the VDP 312.

[Step D14] The control unit permits interruption.
[Step D15] The control unit permits display data generation. That is, the control unit permits a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

  [Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument to be given to the srand function, or use a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. May be.

  [Step D17] The control unit initializes an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, the RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags to be described later in control processing of the effect control apparatus 300)). Save the initial value at power-on in).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes an effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at a high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the input of the effect button in the effect button input process, or may execute the process in a short period timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

  [Step D20] The control unit executes a hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process of setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 and the like.

  [Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating a pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using a rand function, for example. Since the rand function generates a random number each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain a random number only by executing the rand function. Note that a counter that increments by “1” like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process.
[Step D23] The control unit performs an effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. For example, the control unit sets the commands in a table form in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is processing for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing processing has been completed.

  [Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing, and if it is a frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26, and if not a frame switching timing, waits for a frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 sec ≒ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 sec) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing of arrival at the target interval. Note that the V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing by the VDP 312 is completed. The generation cycle of the V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 seconds or more, or 1/30 seconds or less. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

  By the determination processing of the frame switching timing, the subsequent processing (Steps D26 to D30 and the subsequent Steps D18 to D24) is executed at the frame switching timing in each of the processing cycles. It should be noted that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed on a frame basis (ie, on the processing cycle basis). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, it becomes 100 ms in three frames. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

  [Step D26] The control unit instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table form and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

  [Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sound from speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body including various motors and SOL (solenoid) (for example, the board effect device 44).

  [Step D30] The control unit executes a launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and according to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, for a predetermined number of balls to be lent)). This is a process for correcting the mode of the effect.

  After executing Step D30, the control unit returns to Step D18, and thereafter repeats the processing of Step D18 to Step D30. That is, Steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (may be referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the activation of the effect control device 300.

  Note that the control unit executes the processing of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the effect of the screen, but the signals and data generated or set by these control processings (particularly, various LEDs and motors are controlled). The process of actually outputting the drive control signal to the port is performed in a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there may be a case where only a command is issued by serial communication or the like and a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt.

[Setting reset processing]
Next, a setting reset process for resetting the current setting content will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the setting reset process of the tenth embodiment. The setting reset process is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU 311) of effect control device 300) during the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process.

[Step D201] The control unit acquires a reset condition. The reset condition is a transition to the customer waiting period TL (expiration of the customer waiting period TA).
[Step D202] The control unit obtains monitoring parameters for determining whether a reset condition is satisfied. For example, the monitoring parameter is a time value for controlling a customer waiting state.

  [Step D203] The control unit determines whether the reset condition is satisfied based on the monitoring parameter. The control unit proceeds to Step D204 when the reset condition is satisfied, and ends the setting reset process when the reset condition is not satisfied.

[Step D204] The control unit changes the setting contents to default and ends the setting reset process.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide a game with default settings to a first-time player, regardless of the settings changed by the player who played the game earlier. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can provide sufficient interest to later players regardless of the settings changed by the player who played earlier. Such a gaming machine 10 can make settings according to the player, and the setting by one player (the previous player) impairs the opportunity for other players (the latter player) to gain interest. Nothing.

  The gaming machine 10 may include setting contents in addition to the brightness and the effect mode of the display device 41. For example, the gaming machine 10 can control the brightness and the effect of the lighting device (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18), the effect of the board effect device 44, and the sound output state of the sound output device (for example, output volume, output destination (2 The setting contents include a selective output from the above-described audio output devices, an output tone (adjustment of high and low tones), a selective output of BGM and sound effects, and an audio output effect (for example, echo).

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236. FIG. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the tenth embodiment differs from the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment in that the reset condition is different for each setting item.

First, setting items of the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting table according to the first modification of the tenth embodiment.
The illustrated setting table has the same setting items (setting contents), default settings, and selection items as the setting table illustrated in FIG. 227, and further includes a reset condition for each setting item. The reset condition of the setting item “character” is the first round of the customer waiting period TL, that is, transition to the customer waiting period TL (expiration of the customer waiting period TA).

  The reset condition of the setting item “volume” is the second round of the customer waiting period TL, that is, the end of one round of the customer waiting period TL. The reset condition of the setting item “brightness” is the third round of the customer waiting period TL, that is, the completion of two rounds of the customer waiting period TL.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the reset condition for each setting item. Such a gaming machine 10 can adjust the period until resetting in relation to the weight of a setting item (for example, a character) recommended to the player while respecting the setting of the player. Further, such a gaming machine 10 can make it more difficult to reset settings (for example, volume and brightness) left to the discretion of the player.

[Setting reset processing]
Next, a setting reset process according to a first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the setting reset process in the first modification of the tenth embodiment. The setting reset process is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU 311) of effect control device 300) during the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process.

[Step D211] The control unit acquires one setting item.
[Step D212] The control unit acquires a reset condition corresponding to the acquired setting item.

[Step D213] The control unit obtains monitoring parameters for determining whether a reset condition is satisfied.
[Step D214] The control unit determines whether the reset condition is satisfied based on the monitoring parameter. The control unit proceeds to Step D215 when the reset condition is satisfied, and proceeds to Step D216 when the reset condition is not satisfied.

[Step D215] The control unit changes the setting contents to default.
[Step D216] The control unit determines whether or not reset conditions have been satisfied for all setting items. The control unit proceeds to Step D211 when it is not determined that the reset condition is satisfied for all the setting items, and ends the setting reset process when it is determined that the reset condition is satisfied for all the setting items.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide a game with default settings to a first-time player, regardless of the settings changed by the player who played the game earlier. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reset the setting contents at an appropriate timing for each setting item. Such a gaming machine 10 can make settings according to the player. In addition, such a gaming machine 10 can prevent the setting by one player (the previous player) from impairing the opportunity for the other player (the latter player) to gain interest, and can prevent the setting by the first player. The settings can be inherited by later players.

In the gaming machine 10, all of the reset conditions are set in relation to the customer waiting period TA, but may be other conditions.
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 237 and 238. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the tenth embodiment is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the tenth embodiment in that the reset condition is different for each selection item. The gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the tenth embodiment also differs from the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the tenth embodiment in that the default setting can be different for each selection item.

First, setting items of the gaming machine 10 of Modification Example 2 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting table in Modification 2 of the tenth embodiment.
The illustrated setting table includes a reset condition for each setting item similarly to the setting table illustrated in FIG. 235, and further includes a reset condition for each selection item.

  For example, the reset condition of the setting item “character” is as follows: the selection item “character A” is the customer waiting period TL1 lap, the selection item “character B” is the customer waiting period TL2 lap, and the selection item “character A and “Replacement of character B” is the first round of the customer waiting period TL.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the reset condition for each selected item. Such a gaming machine 10 can adjust the period until resetting in relation to the weight of a selection item (for example, a character) recommended to the player while respecting the selection of the player. For example, the gaming machine 10 can make it more difficult to reset settings that are recommended to the player (for example, the character B), and make it easier to reset settings that are not recommended to the player (for example, the character A). it can.

  In the illustrated setting table, the default setting differs for each selection item for the setting item “volume” and the setting item “brightness”. For example, the selection item “1 (included in 1, 2)” of the setting item “volume” is the default setting “3”. The selection item “3 (included in 3-5)” of the setting item “volume” is the default setting “4”.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 resets the selection item “1” of the setting item “volume” to the default setting “3” by the first reset trigger, and resets it to the default setting “4” by the second reset trigger. be able to. Such a gaming machine 10 can reduce discomfort caused by a large amount of change (for example, volume or brightness) due to resetting.

  Further, in the setting table shown in the figure, the reset condition differs for each selection item in addition to the default setting for each selection item for the setting item “volume” and the setting item “brightness”. For example, the reset condition of the setting item “volume” is that the selection item “1, 2” is the third round of the customer waiting period TL, the selection item “3-5” is the tenth round of the customer waiting period TL, and the selection item “6”. “−8” is the third round of the customer waiting period TL. In addition, the reset condition of the setting item “brightness” is such that the selection item “1, 2” is the customer waiting period TL10 lap, the selection item “3-5” is the customer waiting period TL30 lap, “6-8” is the 20th lap of the customer waiting period TL.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 changes the reset condition for each selected item, and thus can flexibly set the amount of change due to resetting and the period required for the change.
[Setting reset processing]
Next, a setting reset process according to a second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the setting reset process in the second modification of the tenth embodiment. The setting reset process is a process executed by the control unit (control unit (CPU 311) of effect control device 300) during the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process.

[Step D221] The control unit acquires one setting item.
[Step D222] The control unit acquires a selection item corresponding to the acquired setting item.
[Step D223] The control unit acquires a reset condition corresponding to the acquired selection item.

[Step D224] The control unit obtains monitoring parameters for determining whether the reset condition is satisfied.
[Step D225] The control unit determines whether the reset condition is satisfied based on the monitoring parameter. The control unit proceeds to Step D226 when the reset condition is satisfied, and proceeds to Step D227 when the reset condition is not satisfied.

[Step D226] The control unit changes the setting content to a default corresponding to the obtained selection item.
[Step D227] The control unit determines whether reset conditions have been satisfied for all setting items. The control unit proceeds to Step D221 when it is not determined that the reset condition is satisfied for all the setting items, and ends the setting reset process when it is determined that the reset condition is satisfied for all the setting items.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can provide a game with default settings to a first-time player, regardless of the settings changed by the player who played the game earlier. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reset the setting contents at an appropriate timing for each selection item. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can adjust the amount of change by reset for each selected item.
Such a gaming machine 10 can make settings according to the player. Such a gaming machine 10 can reduce discomfort caused by a large amount of change (for example, volume or brightness) due to resetting. In addition, since the resetting condition is different for each selection item, the gaming machine 10 can flexibly set the amount of change due to resetting and the time period required for the change.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described tenth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes customer waiting state control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), game effect mode setting means (option setting unit 25, effect control device 300), and game effect mode resetting means. (Effect control device 300). The customer waiting state control means detects a non-gaming state (for example, no special figure game is on hold) and transitions to a first customer waiting state (customer waiting period TA), and after the first customer waiting state, the second customer waiting state. The state transits to the waiting state (customer waiting period TL). The game effect mode setting means accepts a setting operation and sets the game effect mode to a first game effect mode (selection item “character A”) in which a game effect is performed in the first mode, and a second game effect in which a game effect is performed in the second mode. An effect mode (selection item "character B") or a third game effect mode in which a game effect is performed while changing the first mode and the second mode (selection item "replacement of character A and character B") can be set. The game effect mode resetting means resets the game effect mode to the third game effect mode when the game effect mode is set to the first game effect mode or the second game effect mode in the second customer waiting state.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 includes customer waiting state control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), first setting change means (option setting unit 25, effect control device 300), and second setting change means ( It includes an option setting unit 25, an effect control device 300) and a resetting unit (effect control device 300). The customer waiting state control means detects the non-game state and transits to the customer waiting state. The first setting change means receives the setting operation and changes the first setting item (for example, the setting item “character”) from the first standard setting state (for example, the selection item “replacement of character A and character B”) to the first non-standard. The setting can be changed to a setting state (for example, the selection item “character A”). The second setting change means receives the setting operation and changes the second setting item (for example, the setting item “volume”) from the second standard setting state (for example, the selection item “4”) to the second non-standard setting state (for example, the selection item “4”). The setting can be changed to “2”). When the first setting item is set to the first non-standard setting state and the second setting item is set to the second non-standard setting state in the customer waiting state, the resetting means sets the first timing (for example, the reset condition). The first setting item is reset to the first standard setting state in the “customer waiting period TL1 lap”, and the second setting is performed at the second timing different from the first timing (for example, the reset condition “customer waiting period TL2 lap”). The item is reset to the second standard setting state.

  (3) The gaming machine 10 includes customer waiting state control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), setting change means (option setting unit 25, effect control device 300), and resetting means (effect control device 300). ). The customer waiting state control means detects the non-game state and transits to the customer waiting state. The setting change means receives the setting operation and changes the setting item (for example, the setting item “volume”) from the standard setting state (for example, the selection item “4”) to the first non-standard setting state (for example, the selection item “1”) or the first 2 The setting can be changed to a non-standard setting state (for example, selection item “3”). When the setting item is set to the first non-standard setting state in the customer waiting state, the resetting means resets the setting item to the standard setting state at the first timing (for example, the reset condition “the customer waiting period TL3 lap”). When the setting item is set to the second non-standard setting state, the setting item is reset to the standard setting state at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, the reset condition “the customer waiting period TL10 lap”). .

  (4) The gaming machine 10 includes customer waiting state control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300), game effect mode setting means (option setting section 25, effect control device 300), and output volume setting means (option The setting unit 25 includes the effect control device 300) and resetting means (effect control device 300). The customer waiting state control means detects a non-gaming state (for example, no special figure game is on hold) and transitions to a first customer waiting state (customer waiting period TA). The state transits to the waiting state (customer waiting period TL). The game effect mode setting means receives the setting operation and sets the game effect mode to a first game effect mode (selection item “character A”) in which the game effect is performed in the first mode, and a second game effect in which the game effect is performed in the second mode. An effect mode (selection item “character B”) or a third game effect mode in which a game effect is performed while changing the first mode and the second mode (selection item “replacement of character A and character B”) can be set. A sound output state setting means, a sound output state (for example, output volume, an output destination (selective output from two or more sound output apparatuses) of the sound output devices (speakers 19a and 19b) in response to a setting operation), and an output tone (Adjustment of treble and bass), selective output of BGM and sound effects, and sound output effects (e.g., echo) can be set. The resetting means resets the game effect mode to the third game effect mode when the game effect mode is set to the first game effect mode or the second game effect mode in the second customer waiting state, and outputs the output state. Is reset to the standard setting state (default value, etc.) to be set in advance.

[Eleventh embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment can assist a player in selecting an effect mode.

  First, an effect mode changing operation in the gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 and 240. FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating an example (1) of a screen display displayed on the display device at the time of an effect mode change operation according to the eleventh embodiment. Drawing 240 is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen display which a display displays at the time of a production mode change operation of an 11th embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 of the tenth embodiment displays the screen 1600 during the effect mode change operation to guide the player in the effect mode change method, and then displays the screen 1605 to accept the effect mode change operation.

  The screen 1600 is a display screen that guides the player on the effect mode changing method. The screen 1600 guides the player to a changeable effect mode and guides the user to change the effect mode. The screen 1600 includes an effect mode guidance display 1601, a guidance explanation display 1602, and an operation unit image display 1603 in the display content.

  The effect mode guidance display 1601 lists selectable effect modes. The effect mode guide display 1601 displays the selected effect mode so that it can be distinguished from the non-selected effect mode (for example, indicated by a thin frame display). For example, the effect mode guide display 1601 indicates the effect mode R being selected by a bold frame line display. The effect mode guidance display 1601 shows the effect modes A, B, C, and D that are not selected by thin frame lines.

  The guidance explanation display 1602 displays an operation explanation and the like corresponding to the effect mode selection and determination. The operation unit image display 1603 displays an image of the push button 25 serving as an operation unit for setting change. For example, operation unit image display 1603 displays an image of push button 25 in a display mode corresponding to guidance explanation display 1602.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 displays operation guidance for effect mode change on the screen. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player on the effect mode changing method.
The screen 1605 is a display screen when the effect mode change operation is received from the player. The screen 1605 guides the player to the selected effect mode and guides the user to change the effect mode. The screen 1605 includes a selected effect mode display 1606, a guide explanation display 1602, and an operation unit image display 1603 in the display content.

  The selected effect mode display 1606 specifies the selected effect mode. For example, the selected effect mode display 1606 includes an effect mode name 1606a, an effect mode exclusive background 1606b, and an effect mode exclusive symbol 1606c. The effect mode name 1606a displays, for example, a name (effect mode R) as character information capable of identifying the effect mode. The effect mode exclusive background 1606b displays, for example, a background, a character, or the like as image information that can identify the effect mode. The effect mode exclusive design 1606c displays a design (decorative design) that can identify the effect mode. Note that the gaming machine 10 sets a large symbol group among the decorative symbols as the effect mode exclusive symbol 1606c, and a small symbol group (not shown) among the decorative symbols as the common common symbol in the effect mode.

  Each time the gaming machine 10 receives an effect mode selection operation, the game machine 10 switches the effect mode display during selection. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the selected effect mode.

Next, the effect mode and the change of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating an example of a switching order of the effect modes according to the eleventh embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 has five types of effect modes: effect mode R, effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D. The five types of effect modes are effect modes in which display effects are performed on the display device 41 in different display modes during the variable display game on the display device 41.

  The effect mode A, the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D are independent effect modes each having a unique display mode, and the effect mode R is the effect mode A, the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D. This is an effect mode in which is switched at random by a predetermined event trigger or a timer trigger.

  Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can fix the production mode to the production mode A, the production mode B, the production mode C, or the production mode D in accordance with the taste of the player, and can produce the production mode A, the production mode B, and the production mode. Mode C and effect mode D can be switched at random. The gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the effect mode R by preparing various effect modes.

  The gaming machine 10 receives the effect mode selection operation, and can select any one of the effect mode R, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D. For example, the gaming machine 10 is capable of sequentially selecting the effect mode R, the effect mode A, the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D by switching in the forward direction and selecting the effect by switching sequentially in the reverse direction. I do. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 makes it easy for the player to check all the effect modes in the effect mode selecting operation.

Next, the exclusive symbols prepared in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol array of exclusive symbols for each effect mode according to the eleventh embodiment.
The special symbol for the effect mode A, the special symbol for the special effect mode B, the special symbol for the special effect mode C, and the special symbol for the special effect mode D correspond to the symbols constituting the large symbol group among the decorative symbols.

  The effect mode A exclusive symbol is a symbol displayed when the effect mode A is selected by the selection operation or when the effect mode A is selected in the effect mode R. The effect mode A exclusive symbols include symbols 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1614 that can be the symbols that constitute the big hit and symbols 1615 that cannot be the symbols that make the big hit in the symbol array.

  The symbols 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1614 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. The patterns 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1614 each have, on a disc-shaped base serving as the outer shape of the pattern, a graphic element (for example, a character) that has distinctiveness as a pattern and a character (for example, a number) that has distinctiveness. Add a character element.

  The symbol 1615 is a blank symbol. The symbol arrangement of the effect mode A exclusive symbol may include two or more symbols 1615. The design 1615 has a disk-shaped base serving as an outer shape of the design, and a graphic element (for example, a musical note) attached with a graphic element having distinctiveness as a blank design.

  The effect mode B exclusive symbol is a symbol displayed when the effect mode B is selected by the selection operation or when the effect mode B is selected in the effect mode R. The effect-mode B exclusive symbols include symbols 1620, 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, 1625, 1626, 1627, and 1628, which can be symbols constituting the big hit, and symbols 1629, which cannot be the symbols constituting the big hit, in the symbol array. .

  The symbols 1620, 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, 1625, 1626, 1627, and 1628 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. The patterns 1620, 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, 1625, 1626, 1627, and 1628 have a graphic element (for example, a character) having a distinctiveness as a pattern and a character element having a distinctiveness by a character (for example, a numeral).

  The design 1629 is a blank design. The symbol arrangement of the effect mode B exclusive symbols may include two or more symbols 1629. The design 1629 has a discrimination property as a blank design by a spiral disk.

  The effect mode C exclusive symbol is a symbol displayed when the effect mode C is selected by the selection operation or when the effect mode C is selected in the effect mode R. The effect mode C exclusive symbols include symbols 1630, 1631, 1632, 1633, and 1634 that can be the symbols that constitute the big hit, and symbols 1635 that cannot be the symbols that make the big hit.

  The symbols 1630, 1631, 1632, 1633, and 1634 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. Each of the symbols 1630 has a distinctiveness as a symbol by a figure (for example, a character) facing from a window provided in an S-shape on a rectangular base serving as an outer shape of the symbol. Each of the patterns 1631, 1632, 1633, and 1634 has distinctiveness as a pattern by a figure (for example, a character).

  The symbol 1635 is a blank symbol. The symbol arrangement of the effect mode C exclusive symbol may include two or more symbols 1635. The design 1635 has a distinctiveness as a blank design by a character (for example, cherry).

  The effect mode D exclusive symbol is a symbol displayed when the effect mode D is selected by the selection operation or when the effect mode D is selected in the effect mode R. The effect-mode D exclusive symbols include symbols 1640, 1641, 1642, 1643, 1644, and 1645 that can be the symbols that constitute the big hit, and symbols 1646 that cannot be the symbols that make the big hit.

  The symbols 1640, 1641, 1642, 1643, 1644, and 1645 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes. Each of the symbols 1640, 1641, 1642, 1643, 1644, and 1645 has a distinctiveness as a symbol by a figure (for example, a character) attached to a rectangular base serving as an outer shape of the symbol.

  The symbol 1646 is a blank symbol. The symbol arrangement of the effect mode D exclusive symbol may include two or more symbols 1646. The symbol 1646 has a distinctiveness as a blank symbol by a figure (for example, a heart) attached to a rectangular base serving as the outer shape of the symbol.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 prepares a symbol having a different display mode for each effect mode. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can indicate the selected effect mode by showing the symbol to the player. For example, the gaming machine 10 can indicate to the player that the selected effect mode is the effect mode A (including the effect mode R) by showing the symbol 1610.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily have the same number of symbols for each effect mode. For example, the effect mode A and the effect mode C have six types of symbols, the effect mode B has ten types of symbols, and the effect mode D has seven types of symbols. Further, the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily have the same number of symbols constituting the big hit in each effect mode. For example, the effect mode A and the effect mode C have five types of symbols, the effect mode B has nine types of symbols, and the effect mode D has six types of symbols. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 creates a variety of display effects for each effect mode.

  Next, a display screen for each effect mode on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 243 and 244. FIG. 243 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the effect mode A and an example of a display screen in the effect mode B according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen in the effect mode C and an example of a display screen in the effect mode D according to the eleventh embodiment.

  A screen 1650 shown in FIG. 243 (1) includes a large symbol group 1651, a small symbol group 1652, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1653, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1654, a reserved display 1655, and a reserved digest display 1656. Are included in the display content.

  The screen 1650 shows a state where the large symbol group 1651 and the small symbol group 1652 are stopped and displayed. The large symbol group 1651 includes an upper right symbol 1651a, a lower left symbol 1651b, an upper left symbol 1651c, a lower right symbol 1651d, and a central symbol 1651e.

  In the large symbol group 1651, each symbol is changed and displayed by rotating the vertical axis counterclockwise. The large symbol group 1651 is a first effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with a diagonally lower left line formed by an upper right symbol 1651a, a lower left symbol 1651b, and a central symbol 1651e. In addition, the large symbol group 1651 is a second effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with an upper left diagonal line formed by an upper left symbol 1651c, a lower right symbol 1651d, and a central symbol 1651e. For example, the large symbol group 1651 becomes a big hit when any one of the symbols 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1614 is aligned with one or more effective lines.

  At this time, the reserved use display 1656 indicates that the special figure variable display game is not in the variable display state by blank display, and the total display storage number of the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is “0” in the reserve display 1655. Indicates that there is. The total reserved storage number “0” indicated by the reservation display 1655 is the reserved storage number “0” of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reservation number display 1653 and the special figure 2 game reserved indicated by the special figure 2 reservation number display 1654. This is the total number with the storage number “0”.

  A screen 1660 shown in FIG. 243 (2) includes a large symbol group 1661, a small symbol group 1652, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1653, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1654, a reserved display 1655, and a reserved digest display 1656. Are included in the display content.

  Screen 1660 shows a state in which large symbol group 1661 and small symbol group 1652 are stopped and displayed. The large design group 1661 includes an upper left design 1661a, a middle upper design 1661b, an upper right design 1661c, a left middle design 1661d, a middle middle (center) design 1661e, a right middle design 1661f, a lower left design 1661g, a middle lower design 1661h, and a lower right design 1661i. And

  The large symbol group 1661 is composed of a horizontal scroll by a first line including an upper left symbol 1661a, a middle upper symbol 1661b, and an upper right symbol 1661c, and a second scroll including a left middle symbol 1661d, a middle middle symbol 1661e, and a right middle symbol 1661f. Variable display is performed by horizontal scrolling and horizontal scrolling by a third line including a lower left symbol 1661g, a lower middle symbol 1661h, and a lower right symbol 1661i.

  The large symbol group 1661 uses a left vertical line formed by an upper left symbol 1661a, a middle left symbol 1661d, and a lower left symbol 1661g as a first effective line forming a winning symbol combination. In addition, the large symbol group 1661 is a second effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with a middle vertical line formed by a middle and upper symbol 1661b, a middle and middle symbol 1661e, and a middle and lower symbol 1661h. The large symbol group 1661 is a third effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with a right vertical line formed by an upper right symbol 1661c, a right middle symbol 1661f, and a lower right symbol 1661i. In addition, the large symbol group 1661 is a fourth effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with a left-up diagonal line formed by an upper left symbol 1661a, a middle and middle symbol 1661e, and a lower right symbol 1661i. The large symbol group 1661 is a fifth effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with a diagonally lower left line formed by an upper right symbol 1661c, a middle and middle symbol 1661e, and a lower left symbol 1661g. For example, the large symbol group 1661 becomes a big hit when any one of the symbols 1620, 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, 1625, 1626, 1627, and 1628 is aligned with one or more effective lines.

  A screen 1670 shown in FIG. 244 (1) includes a large symbol group 1671, a small symbol group 1652, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1653, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1654, a reserved display 1655, and a reserved digest display 1656. Are included in the display content.

  The screen 1670 shows a state where the large symbol group 1671 and the small symbol group 1652 are stopped and displayed. The large symbol group 1671 includes an upper left symbol 1661a, a middle upper symbol 1671b, an upper right symbol 1671c, a left middle symbol 1671d, a middle middle (center) symbol 1671e, a right middle symbol 1671f, a lower left symbol 1671g, a lower middle symbol 1670h, and a lower right symbol 1671i. And

  The large symbol group 1671 performs variable display by vertical scroll for each symbol. The large symbol group 1671 uses a left vertical line formed by an upper left symbol 1671a, a middle left symbol 1671d, and a lower left symbol 1671g as a first effective line forming a winning symbol combination. In addition, the large symbol group 1671 sets a middle vertical line formed by the middle and upper symbols 1671b, the middle and middle symbols 1671e, and the middle and lower symbols 1671h as a second effective line that forms a winning symbol combination. The large symbol group 1671 is a third effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with a right vertical line formed by the upper right symbol 1671c, the middle right symbol 1671f, and the lower right symbol 1671i.

  In addition, the large symbol group 1671 is an upper horizontal line formed by the upper left symbol 1671a, the middle upper symbol 1671b, and the upper right symbol 1671c as a fourth effective line forming a winning symbol combination. In addition, the large symbol group 1671 is a fifth horizontal line formed by a left middle symbol 1671d, a middle middle symbol 1671e, and a right middle symbol 1671f as a fifth effective line forming a winning symbol combination. In addition, the large symbol group 1671 sets a lower horizontal line formed by a lower left symbol 1671g, a lower middle symbol 1671h, and a lower right symbol 1671i as a sixth effective line forming a winning symbol combination. In addition, the large symbol group 1671 is a seventh active line that forms a winning symbol combination with a diagonally leftward slanting line formed by an upper left symbol 1671a, a middle and middle symbol 1671e, and a lower right symbol 1671i. The large symbol group 1671 is an eighth effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with a diagonally lower left line formed by an upper right symbol 1671c, a middle and middle symbol 1671e, and a lower left symbol 1671g. For example, the large symbol group 1671 becomes a big hit when the symbols 1630 are arranged in one or more effective lines. The large symbol group 1671 becomes a big hit when all the stopped symbols are any of the symbols 1631, 1632, 1633, and 1634. The large symbol group 1671 becomes a big hit when all the stopped symbols are the symbols 1635.

  A screen 1680 shown in FIG. 244 (2) includes a large symbol group 1681, a small symbol group 1652, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1653, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1654, a reserved display 1655, and a reserved digest display 1656. Are included in the display content.

  The screen 1680 shows a state where the large symbol group 1681 and the small symbol group 1652 are stopped and displayed. The large symbol group 1681 includes an upper symbol 1681a, a left middle symbol 1681b, a right middle symbol 1681c, a lower left symbol 1681d, a lower middle symbol 1681e, and a lower right symbol 1681f.

  In the large symbol group 1681, each symbol is fluctuated by rotating the lower horizontal axis. In the large symbol group 1681, a horizontal line formed by the lower left symbol 1681d, the lower middle symbol 1681e, and the lower right symbol 1681f is a first effective line that forms a winning symbol combination. The large symbol group 1681 is a second effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with a diagonally lower left line formed by an upper symbol 1681a, a middle left symbol 1681b, and a lower left symbol 1681d. In addition, the large symbol group 1681 is a third effective line that forms a winning symbol combination with an obliquely upward line formed by an upper symbol 1681a, a middle right symbol 1681c, and a lower right symbol 1681f. For example, the large symbol group 1681 becomes a big hit when the symbols 1645 are arranged in one or more effective lines. The large symbol group 1681 becomes a big hit when all the stopped symbols are any of the symbols 1640, 1641, 1642, 1643, 1644.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 prepares different variable display modes for each effect mode. The gaming machine 10 prepares different active lines for each effect mode. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 differs in the position and the number of symbols to be displayed for each effect mode. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays five symbols on two activated lines in the effect mode A, displays nine symbols on the five activated lines in the effect mode B, and displays nine symbols on the eight activated lines in the effect mode C. In the effect mode D, six symbols are displayed on three effective lines. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 creates a variety of display effects for each effect mode.

  Such a gaming machine 10 can indicate to the player the effect mode selected by the number of symbols and the display position. For example, the gaming machine 10 can indicate to the player that the selected effect mode is the effect mode D (including the effect mode R) by indicating the large symbol group 1681.

  Next, display contents for each effect mode when the effect mode selection operation is received will be described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 248. First, display contents for each effect mode when an effect mode selection operation is received while effect mode A (including effect mode R) is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents for each effect mode when an effect mode selection operation is received while the effect mode A (including the effect mode R) of the eleventh embodiment is displayed.

  Screen 1690 is the display content when the effect mode selection operation is received, and displays the previous fluctuation display result. Screen 1690 shows large symbol group 1651 in the display screen of effect mode A in effect mode R.

  The screen 1691 is a display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode R to the effect mode A by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1651 in the effect mode A display screen. Both the screen 1690 and the screen 1691 display a large symbol group 1651, and the combination of symbols stopped is the same.

  The screen 1692 is a display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1661 in the effect mode B display screen. The screen 1682 displays a predetermined combination of symbols (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1651 displayed by the screens 1690 and 1691.

  The screen 1693 is a display content when the effect mode selection operation switches the effect mode B to the effect mode C, and shows a large symbol group 1671 in the effect mode C display screen. The screen 1693 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) irrespective of the large symbol group 1651 displayed on the screen 1690 and the screen 1691.

  The screen 1694 is the display content when the effect is switched from the effect mode C to the effect mode D by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1681 in the effect mode D display screen. The screen 1694 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1651 displayed on the screen 1690 and the screen 1691.

  As described above, when the gaming machine 10 receives the effect mode selection operation while the effect mode A (including the effect mode R) is displayed, the gaming machine 10 displays the previous fluctuation display in the effect mode A (including the effect mode R). The result is displayed, and a default stop symbol is displayed in other effect modes (effect modes B, C, and D). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player who is performing the effect mode selection operation that the effect mode when the effect mode selection operation is received is the effect mode A (including the effect mode R). .

  Next, display contents for each effect mode when an effect mode selection operation is received while effect mode B (including effect mode R) is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents for each effect mode when an effect mode selection operation is received while the effect mode B (including the effect mode R) of the eleventh embodiment is displayed.

  Screen 1700 is the display content when an effect mode selection operation is received, and displays the previous fluctuation display result. Screen 1700 shows large symbol group 1661 in the display screen of effect mode B in effect mode R.

  The screen 1701 is a display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode R to the effect mode A by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1651 in the effect mode A display screen. The screen 1701 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1661 displayed on the screen 1700.

  The screen 1702 is a display content when the mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1661 in the effect mode B display screen. The screen 1702 displays the large symbol group 1661 similarly to the screen 1700, and the combination of the stopped symbols is the same.

  The screen 1703 is a display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode B to the effect mode C by the effect mode selection operation, and shows the large symbol group 1671 in the effect mode C display screen. The screen 1703 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1661 displayed on the screens 1700 and 1702.

  The screen 1704 is the display content when the mode is switched from the effect mode C to the effect mode D by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1681 in the effect mode D display screen. The screen 1704 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1651 displayed on the screen 1700 and the screen 1701.

  As described above, when the gaming machine 10 receives the effect mode selection operation while the effect mode B (including the effect mode R) is displayed, the gaming machine 10 displays the previous fluctuation display in the effect mode B (including the effect mode R). The result is displayed, and a default stop symbol is displayed in other effect modes (effect modes A, C, and D). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player who is performing the effect mode selection operation that the effect mode when the effect mode selection operation is received is the effect mode B (including the effect mode R). .

  Next, display contents for each effect mode when an effect mode selection operation is received while effect mode C (including effect mode R) is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 247 is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents for each effect mode when an effect mode selection operation is received while the effect mode C (including the effect mode R) of the eleventh embodiment is displayed.

  Screen 1710 is the display content when the effect mode selection operation is received, and displays the previous fluctuation display result. Screen 1710 shows large symbol group 1671 in the display screen of effect mode C in effect mode R.

  The screen 1711 is a display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode R to the effect mode A by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1651 in the effect mode A display screen. The screen 1711 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1671 displayed on the screen 1710.

  The screen 1712 is a display content when the mode is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1661 in the effect mode B display screen. The screen 1712 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1671 displayed on the screen 1710.

  The screen 1713 is a display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode B to the effect mode C by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1671 in the effect mode C display screen. The screen 1713 displays the large symbol group 1671 similarly to the screen 1710, and the combination of the stopped symbols is the same.

  The screen 1714 is the display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode C to the effect mode D by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1681 in the effect mode D display screen. The screen 1714 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1671 displayed by the screens 1710 and 1713.

  As described above, when the game machine 10 receives the effect mode selection operation while displaying the effect mode C (including the effect mode R), the gaming machine 10 displays the previous fluctuation display in the effect mode C (including the effect mode R). The result is displayed, and a default stop symbol is displayed in other effect modes (effect modes A, B, and D). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player who is performing the effect mode selection operation that the effect mode when the effect mode selection operation is received is the effect mode C (including the effect mode R). .

  Next, display contents for each effect mode when an effect mode selection operation is received while effect mode D (including effect mode R) is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents for each effect mode when an effect mode selection operation is received while the effect mode D (including the effect mode R) of the eleventh embodiment is displayed.

  Screen 1720 is the display content when the effect mode selection operation is received, and displays the previous fluctuation display result. Screen 1720 shows large symbol group 1681 in the display screen of effect mode D in effect mode R.

  The screen 1721 is a display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode R to the effect mode A by the effect mode selection operation, and shows the large symbol group 1651 in the effect mode A display screen. The screen 1721 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1681 displayed on the screen 1720.

  The screen 1722 is the display content when the effect is switched from the effect mode A to the effect mode B by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1661 in the effect mode B display screen. The screen 1722 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1681 displayed on the screen 1720.

  The screen 1723 is the display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode B to the effect mode C by the effect mode selection operation, and shows the large symbol group 1671 in the effect mode C display screen. The screen 1723 displays a predetermined symbol combination (default stop symbol) regardless of the large symbol group 1681 displayed on the screen 1720.

  The screen 1724 is a display content when the effect mode is switched from the effect mode C to the effect mode D by the effect mode selection operation, and shows a large symbol group 1681 in the effect mode D display screen. The screen 1724 displays a large symbol group 1681 similarly to the screen 1720, and has the same combination of stopped symbols.

  As described above, when the gaming machine 10 receives the effect mode selection operation while displaying the effect mode D (including the effect mode R), the gaming machine 10 displays the previous fluctuation display in the effect mode D (including the effect mode R). The result is displayed, and a default stop symbol is displayed in other effect modes (effect modes A, B, and C). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player who is performing the effect mode selection operation that the effect mode when the effect mode selection operation is received is the effect mode D (including the effect mode R). .

  Next, a mode switching process for switching the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the mode switching process in the effect control device of the eleventh embodiment. The mode switching process is a process executed by the control unit (the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300) during the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process (see FIG. 233).

[Step D231] The control unit acquires the current effect mode (current mode).
[Step D232] The control unit sets stop symbol holding for the current mode.
[Step D233] The control unit sets a stop symbol reset for an effect mode other than the current mode.

  [Step D234] The control unit determines whether or not there is an effect mode switching (selection) end trigger. When the control unit does not detect the effect mode switching end trigger, the process proceeds to step D235. When the effect mode switching end trigger is detected, the control unit ends the mode switching process. The effect mode switching end trigger includes, for example, detection of an effect mode switching end operation, detection of no operation for a predetermined time, start of execution of a variable display game accompanying detection of start winning, and the like.

  [Step D235] The control unit determines whether or not there is an effect mode switching operation. When there is no effect mode switching operation, the control unit proceeds to step D234, and when there is an effect mode switching operation, proceeds to step D236.

[Step D236] The control unit switches the effect mode according to the effect mode switching operation.
[Step D237] The control unit determines whether or not the effect mode after switching is the current mode. When the effect mode after the switching is the current mode, the control unit proceeds to Step D238, and when not, the process proceeds to Step D239.

  [Step D238] The control unit sets the stop symbol held in the stop symbol of the effect mode after switching, and proceeds to step D234. Therefore, the control unit can display the combination of stopped symbols when the effect mode selection operation is received for the effect mode in which the current mode is set.

  [Step D239] The control unit sets a default stop symbol as the stop symbol in the effect mode after switching, and proceeds to step D234. Therefore, the control unit can display the combination of the default stop symbols for the effect mode in which the current mode is not set.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the effect mode selected when the effect mode selection operation is received. Further, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the effect mode that was not selected when the effect mode selection operation was received. Such a gaming machine 10 can assist a player in selecting an effect mode.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the eleventh embodiment is different from the eleventh embodiment in that an effect mode for displaying a combination of stopped symbols when an effect mode selection operation is received can be set in advance. Different from the gaming machine 10.

  First, a mode switching process according to a first modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the mode switching process in the effect control device of the first modification of the eleventh embodiment. The mode switching process is a process executed by the control unit (the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300) during the hall / player setting mode process (step D20) of the main process (see FIG. 233).

[Step D241] The control unit holds the stopped symbol (previous fluctuation display result) in the selected effect mode.
[Step D242] The control unit determines whether or not there is an effect mode switching (selection) end trigger. When the control unit does not detect the effect mode switching end trigger, the process proceeds to step D243. When the effect mode switching end trigger is detected, the control unit ends the mode switching process. The effect mode switching end trigger includes, for example, detection of an effect mode switching end operation, detection of no operation for a predetermined time, start of execution of a variable display game associated with start winning detection, and the like.

  [Step D243] The control unit determines whether or not there is an effect mode switching operation. When there is no effect mode switching operation, the control unit proceeds to Step D242, and when there is an effect mode switching operation, proceeds to Step D244.

[Step D244] The control unit switches the effect mode according to the effect mode switching operation.
[Step D245] The control unit refers to the symbol handover setting table, and determines whether or not the handover of the symbols in the effect mode after the switching is performed. The symbol takeover setting table defines “takeover” and “initial” for symbols displayed in the effect mode after switching in relation to the effect mode before switching. “Takeover” indicates that the design in the effect mode after switching takes over the design in the effect mode before switching. "Initial" indicates that the symbol in the effect mode after the switching is set as the updated symbol. The details of the symbol handover setting table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the control unit does not carry over the symbols in the effect mode after the switching, that is, if the symbols in the effect mode after the switching are set as the updated symbols, the control unit proceeds to step D246. On the other hand, when the control unit is to take over the symbols in the effect mode after switching, the process proceeds to step D248.

  [Step D246] The control unit selects an updated symbol to be set as a symbol in the effect mode after switching. The update symbol may be a default stop symbol prepared for each effect mode, or a stop symbol selected from two or more stop symbols prepared for each effect mode (including the default stop symbol). There may be. For example, the control unit may select one stop symbol from among two or more stop symbols prepared for each effect mode in accordance with a game state, a setting state, and the like.

  [Step D247] The control unit sets the updated stopped symbol (the selected updated symbol) as the symbol in the effect mode after switching, and proceeds to step D242. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the gaming state, the setting state, and the like by the updated symbol displayed when the effect mode is switched.

  [Step D248] The control unit sets the stop symbol held in the stop symbol of the effect mode after switching, and proceeds to step D242. Therefore, the control unit can display the combination of stopped symbols when the effect mode selection operation is received for the effect mode in which the current mode is set.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the effect mode selected when the effect mode selection operation is received. Further, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player of the effect mode that has not been selected when the effect mode selection operation is received, and can give an interest corresponding to the updated symbol. Such a gaming machine 10 can assist a player in selecting an effect mode.

Next, a symbol handover setting table according to a first modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 251 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol handover setting table according to Modification 1 of the eleventh embodiment.
The design takeover setting table shown in FIG. 251 defines “takeover” and “initial” for the design to be displayed in the effect mode after switching in relation to the effect mode before switching. The design takeover setting table shown in FIG. 251 indicates that, when the effect mode after switching is the same as the effect mode before switching, the symbol in the effect mode after switching takes over the symbol in the effect mode before switching. The design takeover setting table shown in FIG. 251 distinguishes the effect modes A, B, C, and D that are randomly switched in the effect mode R, and the effect modes A, B, C, and D in which the effect modes are fixed. .

  In addition, in the symbol handover setting table shown in FIG. 251, when the effect mode after switching is different from the effect mode before switching, a symbol of the effect mode after switching is set to a default stop symbol prepared for each effect mode. Indicates that

Next, a symbol handover setting table according to a second modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a diagram illustrating an example of the symbol handover setting table of Modification 2 of the eleventh embodiment.
The symbol handover setting table shown in FIG. 252 indicates that, when the effect mode after switching is the same as the effect mode before switching, the symbol in the effect mode after switching takes over the symbol in the effect mode before switching. The symbol handover setting table shown in FIG. 252 does not distinguish between effect modes A, B, C, and D that are randomly switched in effect mode R, and effect modes A, B, C, and D in which the effect mode is fixed. .

  In addition, the symbol handover setting table shown in FIG. 252 indicates that when the effect mode before switching is the effect mode R and the effect mode after switching is different from the effect mode before switching, the effect of the effect mode after switching is effect mode. It is set to one of the default stop symbols (initial A) prepared for each. In addition, the symbol handover setting table shown in FIG. 252 indicates that when the effect mode before switching is not the effect mode R and the effect mode after switching is different from the effect mode before switching, the symbol in the effect mode after switching is effect mode. It is set to another one (initial B) of the default stop symbols prepared for each.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player whether or not the effect mode before switching is the effect mode R in the display mode of the default stop symbol.
The gaming machine 10 of the above-described eleventh embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.

  (1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display mode switching unit (the option setting unit 25, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300), and a display mode presenting unit (the display device 41, the effect control device 300). The display mode switching means includes a first display mode (for example, effect mode A) for displaying the variable display game in the first display mode and a second display mode (for example, effect mode B) for displaying the variable display game in the second display mode. Can be switched by receiving a selection operation. The display mode presenting means, when displaying a first stopped symbol combination (stopped symbol combination) in the first display mode, accepts a display mode switching operation, and displays the first display as the display mode after the switching. When presenting a mode, a first stop symbol combination is displayed, and when presenting a second display mode as a display mode after switching, a second stop symbol combination (a combination of default stop symbols) different from the first stop symbol combination is displayed. .

  (2) The gaming machine 10 includes a display mode switching unit (the option setting unit 25, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300), and a display mode presenting device (the display device 41, the effect control device 300). The display mode switching means includes a first display mode (for example, effect mode A) for displaying a variable display game in a first display mode capable of displaying a stopped symbol combination based on a first symbol number (for example, five). Receiving an operation of selecting a second display mode (for example, effect mode B) for displaying a variable display game in a second display mode in which a stopped symbol combination can be displayed by a second symbol number (for example, nine) different from the symbol number. It can be switched. The display mode presenting means, when displaying a first stopped symbol combination (stopped symbol combination) in the first display mode, accepts a display mode switching operation, and displays the first display as the display mode after the switching. When presenting a mode, a first stop symbol combination is displayed, and when presenting a second display mode as a display mode after switching, a second stop symbol combination (a combination of default stop symbols) different from the first stop symbol combination is displayed. .

  (3) The gaming machine 10 includes a display mode switching unit (the option setting unit 25, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300), and a display mode presenting unit (the display device 41, the effect control device 300). The display mode switching means displays the variable display game in a first display mode capable of displaying a stop symbol combination having a first number (for example, two) of effective lines from which a specific result mode can be derived. (For example, effect mode A) and a variable display according to a second display mode capable of displaying a stop symbol combination having a second number (for example, 5) different from the first number of effective lines from which a specific result mode can be derived. A second display mode (for example, effect mode B) for displaying a game can be switched by receiving a selection operation. The display mode presenting means, when displaying a first stopped symbol combination (stopped symbol combination) in the first display mode, accepts a display mode switching operation, and displays the first display as the display mode after the switching. When presenting a mode, a first stop symbol combination is displayed, and when presenting a second display mode as a display mode after switching, a second stop symbol combination (a combination of default stop symbols) different from the first stop symbol combination is displayed. .

  Note that the above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In this case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the processing functions described above are realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include a magnetic storage device, an optical disk, a magneto-optical recording medium, and a semiconductor memory. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. The optical disk includes a DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), a DVD-RAM, a CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes an MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

  When distributing the program, for example, portable recording media such as DVDs and CD-ROMs on which the program is recorded are sold. Alternatively, the program may be stored in a storage device of a server computer, and the program may be transferred from the server computer to another computer via a network.

  The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. Note that the computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Further, the computer can also execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

  Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, but may include, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use a game ball, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

  The disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and a modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Game machine 25 Option setting part 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

A first display mode in which a variable display game is displayed in a first display mode in which a stop symbol combination can be displayed according to a first symbol number, and a stop symbol combination can be displayed according to a second symbol number different from the first symbol number. Display mode switching means capable of switching between a second display mode for displaying the variable display game in the second display mode and a selection operation ending condition after the selection operation, and
When accepting the selection operation of the display mode when displaying the first stop symbol combination in the first display mode, displaying the first stop symbol combination when presenting the first display mode as an option, Display mode presenting means for displaying a second stop symbol combination which is a predetermined combination instead of the first stop symbol combination when presenting the second display mode,
Gaming machines including.

Images